KONICA MINOLTA C500 CF5001 Service Manual (Field Service)

CF5001

Service Manual[Field Service]

Dual references may be used on the following:

Official Options name : Popular Options name

AFR-20 : RADF, DF

C-208 : LT

FN-120 : FNS

FN-9 : FNS

Cover Inserter D : PI

PK-5 : PU

TMG-3 TU

In-System Writer : ISW

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONTENTS

i

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

TII

I S

ER

VIC

E T

OO

LIV

S

ER

VIC

EV

C

OD

E L

IST

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

CONTENTSSAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13

I DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 Replacing the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.3 Replacing the toner collection box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.4 Angle adjustment of the operation board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main board unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

2. SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

2.1 Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

2.2 Removing and reinstalling the platen glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

2.3 Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

2.4 Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

2.5 Removing and reinstalling the exposure lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

2.6 Removing the scanner wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

2.7 Reinstalling the scanner wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

3. WRITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

3.1 Screw that must not be removed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

3.2 Removing and reinstalling the write unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

4. PROCESS UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

4.1 Flow of the disassembly of the process unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

4.2 Cleaning the charging corona unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

4.3 Cleaning/replacing, removing and reinstalling the charging wire assy/the charging control plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

4.4 Pulling out the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

4.5 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

4.6 Replacing the belt cleaning brush unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

4.7 Replacing the belt cleaning blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

4.8 Replacing the toner collection sheet /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

4.9 Replacing the belt separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38

4.10 Replacing the transfer belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39

4.11 Replacing the 1st transfer roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41

4.12 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

4.13 Replacing the drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43

CONTENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

ii

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

TII

I S

ER

VIC

E T

OO

LIV

SE

RV

ICE

V

CO

DE

LIS

TV

I D

IAG

RA

MS

4.14 Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44

4.15 Replacing the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

4.16 Replacing the developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48

4.17 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50

4.18 Removing and reinstalling the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51

4.19 Removing and reinstalling the image correction unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52

5. TONER SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53

5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53

5.2 Replacing the charging dust filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

6.1 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

6.2 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed trays /1 to /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

6.3 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58

6.4 Replacing the double feed prevention rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60

6.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61

6.6 Removing and reinstalling the tray up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62

7. BY-PASS TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66

7.1 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66

7.2 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68

7.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69

8. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71

8.1 Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71

8.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74

9. FIXING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75

9.1 Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75

9.2 Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76

9.3 Replacing the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77

9.4 Replacing the fixing lower heater lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79

9.5 Replacing the fixing roller /U, ball bearing /U and the heat insulating sleeve /U . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82

9.6 Replacing the fixing roller /L, ball bearing /L and the heat insulating sleeve /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84

9.7 Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /3, and removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /1 and the thermostat /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86

9.8 Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /4, and removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /2 and the thermostat /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91

9.9 Replacing the fixing drive gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96

9.10 Replacing the fixing cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98

9.11 Replacing the fixing torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100

10.REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102

10.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102

10.2 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104

10.3 Replacing the separation discharging plate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105

10.4 Replacing the transfer ground plate unit and the 2nd transfer roller /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106

10.5 Replacing the registration roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107

10.6 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 and /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109

10.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 and /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110

10.8 Replacing the ADU pre-registration clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111

10.9 Replacing the decurler roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112


iii

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

TII

I S

ER

VIC

E T

OO

LIV

S

ER

VIC

EV

C

OD

E L

IST

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

11. OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114

11.1 Installation of the Key Counter Socket (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114

11.2 Installation / Remove of the Memory Unit (OPTION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115

AFR-20 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117

1.1 RADF hinge opening/closing angle adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117

1.2 Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119

1.3 Removing and reinstalling the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120

1.4 Removing and reinstalling the registration roller cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121

2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122

2.1 Cleaning the no paper sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122

2.2 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123

2.3 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125

2.4 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127

3. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129

3.1 Cleaning the registration roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129

3.2 Cleaning the registration sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130

3.3 Removing and reinstalling the conveyance belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131

4. REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133

4.1 Cleaning the paper exit roller/the paper exit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133

4.2 Cleaning the reverse roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133

5. REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134

C-208 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135

1.1 Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135

1.2 Removing and reinstalling the clutch replacement cover and the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137

1.3 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed pick-up cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138

2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139

2.1 Cleaning the paper dust removing brush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139

2.2 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140

2.3 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141

2.4 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142

2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144

3. TRAY UP/DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145

3.1 Removing and reinstalling the rear drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145

3.2 Removing and reinstalling the up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150

FN-9/FN120 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159

1.1 Removing and reinstalling of the booklet tray (FN-9 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159

1.2 Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160

1.3 Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160

1.4 Removing and reinstalling of the side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161

1.5 Removing and reinstalling of the finisher door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161


iv

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

TII

I S

ER

VIC

E T

OO

LIV

SE

RV

ICE

V

CO

DE

LIS

TV

I D

IAG

RA

MS

1.6 Removing and reinstalling of the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162

1.7 Removing and reinstalling of the main tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163

1.8 Removing and reinstalling of the main paper exit opening cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164

1.9 Removing and reinstalling of the booklet paper exit opening cover (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164

2. CONVEYANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165

2.1 Replacing the paper exit roller /A (sponge roller). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165

2.2 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167

2.3 Removing and reinstalling of the paper exit opening unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168

3. MAIN TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170

3.1 Replacing the tray up/down motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170

3.2 Removing and reinstalling of the up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171

4. STACKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175

4.1 Replacing the stacking assist roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175

4.2 Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175

4.3 Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-176

5. STAPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179

5.1 Removing and reinstalling of the stapler unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179

5.2 Replacing the clincher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-180

5.3 Replacing the stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182

PK-5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1. PUNCH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185

1.1 Replacing the Punch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185

1.2 Cleaning the Punch Edges and Punch Scraps Full PS (PS802) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188

Cover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1. External Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189

1.1 Removing / Re-installing the External covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189

2. Paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191

2.1 Replacing the Paper feed roller and Feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191

2.2 Replacing the Double feed prevent roller and Torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-192

TMG-3 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1. TRIMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193

1.1 Replacing the trimmer knife /U and trimmer knife /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193

II ADJUSTMENT

1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

4. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

4.1 Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

4.2 Display transition of 36 modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

4.3 Display transition of 25 modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

4.4 Display transition of Key Operation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8


v

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

TII

I S

ER

VIC

E T

OO

LIV

S

ER

VIC

EV

C

OD

E L

IST

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

5.1 Checking method of the P function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

6. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

6.1 List of adjustment items for 25 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

6.2 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

6.3 Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

6.4 Paper size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

6.4.1 Standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

6.4.2 Non-standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

6.4.3 Wide paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

6.5 PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

6.5.1 Count reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

6.5.2 Change setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

6.6 Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

6.7 Parts counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

6.7.1 Count of special parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

6.7.2 Count of each parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

6.8 Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

6.9 Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

6.10 M/C serial number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

6.11 Indication of ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

6.12 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

6.13 Setting date input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

6.14 Board change mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

7. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

7.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

7.2 Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

7.2.1 High voltage adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

7.2.3 Sensor output check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

7.2.5 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

7.3 Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

7.3.1 Magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

7.3.2 Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

7.3.3 RADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

7.3.4 Centring adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76

7.3.5 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79

7.3.6 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80

7.4 Image quality adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81

7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81

7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82

7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87

7.4.4 Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88

7.4.5 Image judge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88

7.4.6 ACS adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90

7.4.7 Density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91


vi

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

TII

I S

ER

VIC

E T

OO

LIV

SE

RV

ICE

V

CO

DE

LIS

TV

I D

IAG

RA

MS

7.4.8 Tone adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93

7.4.9 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94

7.5 Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95

7.5.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95

7.6 Test pattern output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96

7.7 Test pattern density setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100

7.8 Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100

7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101

7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101

7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (Cover Inserter D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102

7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TMG-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102

7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-5 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103

7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105

7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106

7.9 List output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106

8. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107

8.1 47 mode/multi mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107

8.2 Adjustment data display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108

8.3 Hard disk check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108

8.4 Input check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109

8.5 Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121

9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131

9.1 Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131

9.2 Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132

9.3 Pick-up movement amount adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134

9.4 Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135

9.5 Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136

9.6 FNS adjustment of the by-pass conveyance guide plate magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138

9.7 FNS adjustment of the by-pass gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139

9.8 FNS adjustment of the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141

9.9 FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142

9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144

9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146

9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/L (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148

9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150

9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152

9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FN-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156

9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FN-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158

9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160

9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-holding position (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161

9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162

9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166

9.21 LCT tray mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167

9.22 LCT skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169

9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171

9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172

9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173


vii

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

TII

I S

ER

VIC

E T

OO

LIV

S

ER

VIC

EV

C

OD

E L

IST

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174

9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176

9.28 PK Adjusting the tilt of the punch hole position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178

9.29 Sensitivity adjustment for the PK paper edge sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179

9.30 PI Centering Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180

9.31 Adjusting the tilt of PI (when PK punch is used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181

III SERVICE TOOL

1. ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

1.1 Description of the ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

1.2 Installing the USB driver for ISWTrns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

1.3 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

1.3.1 Board used for the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

1.3.2 Data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

1.3.3 ISW transfer type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

1.3.4 Instances of ISW transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

1.3.5 Setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

2. UPDATING WITH ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

2.1 Setting Up ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

2.1.1 Installing the application program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

2.1.2 Setting up ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

2.1.3 ISW Trns Main Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

2.1.4 Parallel port setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

2.2 Copying Transfer Data (Update Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

2.3 Connecting the CF5001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

2.4 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

2.4.1 Update operation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

2.4.2 Checking the ROM version of the copier (before updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

2.4.3 Preparing the copier to transfer.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

2.4.4 Running ISW Trns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

2.4.5 Selecting transfer file (update data) conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

2.4.6 Selecting a version of transfer files (update data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

2.4.7 Verifying transfer files (update data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

2.4.8 Transmitting transfer files (update data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

2.4.9 Exiting ISW Trns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

2.4.10 Verifying the ROM version of the copier (after updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

2.5 ISW Trns Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

2.6 Troubleshooting ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

2.6.1 Unable to run ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

2.6.2 Send file is not displayed when a combo box item is selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

2.6.3 NG produced by a file check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

2.6.4 “??” produced by a file check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

2.6.5 Unsuccessful file transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

2.7 Connecting to the ISW connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

2.7.1 Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

3 INTERNET ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.1 What is the Internet ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23


viii

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

TII

I S

ER

VIC

E T

OO

LIV

SE

RV

ICE

V

CO

DE

LIS

TV

I D

IAG

RA

MS

3.2 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.3 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.4 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

3.4.1 Setting on Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

3.4.2 Setting on Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

3.5 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

3.5.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

3.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

3.6 Internet ISW using Web utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

3.6.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

3.6.2 How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

3.7 Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

3.7.1 Prior announcement to administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

3.7.2 If power failure occurs during data rewriting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

3.7.3 ISW of multiple programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

3.7.4 If ISW fails in low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

3.8 Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

3.8.1 What is a proxy server? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

3.8.2 Authentication of proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

3.8.3 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

3.8.4 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

4 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

4.1 What is the Mail remote notification system?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

4.2 Operation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

4.3 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

4.4 How to use the Mail remote notification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

4.5 Disabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

IV SERVICE

1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

1.1 Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

1.2 Maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

1.3 Periodic check items (main body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

1.4 Periodic check items (AFR-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

1.5 Periodic check items (C-208). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

1.6 Periodic check items (FN-120/FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

1.7 Periodic check items (Cover Inserter D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

1.8 Periodic check items (TMG-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

1.9 Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

1.10 Important maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

2. COPY MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

2.1 Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

2.2 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

2.3 PM parts kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22


ix

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

TII

I S

ER

VIC

E T

OO

LIV

S

ER

VIC

EV

C

OD

E L

IST

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

V CODE LIST

1. JAM CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

2. ERROR CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

3. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

VI DIAGRAMS

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

1.1 CF5001 parts layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

1.2 AFR-20 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

1.3 C-208 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

1.4 FN-120/FN-9 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

1.5 TMG-3 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

2.1 Main Body connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

2.2 AFR-20 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

2.3 C-208 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

2.4 FN-120/FN-9 connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

2.5 TMG-3 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

3. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

3.1 Main Body timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

3.2 AFR-20 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

3.3 C-208 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51

3.4 FN-120/FN-9 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52

3.5 TMG-3 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56

4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59

4.1 AFR-20 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59

4.2 C-208 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61

4.3 FN-120/FN-9 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63

4.4 TMG-3 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65

4.5 Cover Inserter D Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67

4.6 PK-5 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68

5. APPENDIX

5.1 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8)









x

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

TII

I S

ER

VIC

E T

OO

LIV

SE

RV

ICE

V

CO

DE

LIS

TV

I D

IAG

RA

MS

Blank page

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

S-1

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing ser-

vice work.

Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to

the copier, Minolta Corporation strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by Minolta-trained ser-

vice technicians.

Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service manual was printed.

Accordingly, Minolta Corporation does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in

this Service manual is complete and accurate.

The user of this Service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while ser-

vicing the copier for which this Service manual is intended.

Therefore, this Service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical

training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.

Keep this Service manual also for future service.

In this Service manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “ CAUTION” is defined

as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.

When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,

etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:


IMPORTANT NOTICE

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND

CAUTION

DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury

CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, andproperty damage

:Precaution when using the copier.General precaution Electric hazard High temperature

:Prohibition when using the copier.General prohibition Do not touch with wet hand Do not disassemble

:Direction when using the copier.General instruction Unplug Ground/Earth


S-2

1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY MINOLTA

Minolta copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and

a solid service network.

Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical

aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For

this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such mod-

ifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the rea-

soning behind this policy.

SAFETY WARNINGS

DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

• Using any cables or power cord not specified by Minolta.

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by Minolta. Safety will not be

assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.

• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, sol-

der or similar object.

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be

assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.

• Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by Minolta.

• Using parts not specified by Minolta.


S-3

2. CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Minolta copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in

order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However,

in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain

safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.

2.1 Power Supply

WARNING: Wall Outlet

• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedi-

cated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consump-

tion.

If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.

• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load

must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.

If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.

Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the

risk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is

damaged.

If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power

cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by Minolta. Using the damaged

power cord may result in fire or electric shock.

• When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to

observe the following precautions:

a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket

on the rear panel of the copier.

Secure the cord with a fixture properly.

b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord

(with plugs on both ends) specified by Minolta.

If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a

contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk

of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and

so on.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

kw


S-4

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.

Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in

fire.

• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.

The risk of electric shock exists.

• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.

The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.

WARNING: Wiring

• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same out-

let.

If used, the risk of fire exists.

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long

extension cord may result in fire.

Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may

result.

WARNING: Ground Lead

• Check whether the copier is grounded properly.

If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric

shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the

following points:

a. Ground terminal of wall outlet

b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done

WARNING: Power Plug and Cord


S-5

2.2. Installation Requirements

• Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.

Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed

below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:

a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)

b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)

c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case

of lightning.)

d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)

WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

• Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile

materials that may catch fire.

A risk of fire exists.

• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.

A risk of fire and electric shock exists.

WARNING: Nonoperational Handling

• When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),

switch it off and unplug the power cord.

Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.

CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity

• Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat

source such as a heater.

A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.

Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.

Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:

Temperature: 10 °C to 30 °CHumidity: 10 % to 80 % (no dew condensation)

Avoid other environments as much as possible.

CAUTION: Ventilation

• Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette smoke,

or ammonia gas.

Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems

and image faults.

WARNING: Ground Lead


S-6

• The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be

harmful to the human body.

If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room.

a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room

b. When taking a lot of copies

c. When using multiple copiers at the same time

CAUTION: Vibration

• When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to

install the copier in a level and sturdy place.

Constant vibration will cause problems.

• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.

In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a

injury.

CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (Service

manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the

prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do

not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.

If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a

risk of injury or fire exists.

• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from

the copier and options.

When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still pow-

ered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock

exists.

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.

DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check

with the copier powered.

If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external

cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be

caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.

CAUTION: Ventilation


S-7

• Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.

High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.

WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.

The user or CE may be injured.

• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the

copier.

They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.

(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)


• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and elec-

trode units such as a charging corona unit.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.


• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and

sign of leakage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.

• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make

sure that the power cord has been disconnected.

The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.

• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write

unit shifted from the specified mounting position.

The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.

• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery speci-

fied in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the

method specified by local authority.

Improper replacement can cause explosion.

DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered


S-8

WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and

fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.


• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the

interlock functions properly.

If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be

injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper

jam).

• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or

other pointed parts.


• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were

removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the orig-

inal location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,

forgotten screws, etc.)

A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.

DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not

to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with

eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.

If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.

When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.

DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are

highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.


S-9

3. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

• If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency

measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.

• If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried

out quickly and Minolta Corporation must be notified.

• To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site

checks, in accordance with instructions issued by Minolta Corporation.

• For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in “Serious Accident

Report/Follow-up Procedures”.

4. CONCLUSION

• Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration.

Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer

engineer.

• When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must

verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.

• Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants

on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.


• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any

liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.


• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.

DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS


S-10

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented

regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products mar-

keted in the United States.

This copier is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S.

Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation

Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within

protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user opera-

tion.

SAFETY INFORMATION

IMPORTANT INFORMATION


S-11

This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious

accidents.

• Overall protection circuit

• Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit

These safety circuits are described below to provide

the service engineer with a renewed awareness of

them in order to prevent servicing errors that may

impair their functions.

1. Overall protection circuit

1.1 Protection by circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) and circuit breaker /2 (CBR2)

CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instantaneously when an excessive current flows due to a short in

the AC line.

CAUTION:

The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

SAFETY CIRCUITS

NF

CBR1

CBR2

8050sf001


S-12

2. Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating

prevention circuit

2.1 Protection by software

The output voltage from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) is read

by the CPU. If this voltage is abnormal, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening main relay (RL1).

CAUTION:

• The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing

lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the

specified clearances.

• The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

2.2 Protection by the hardware circuit

The output voltages from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2), fixing

temperature sensor /3 (TH3), and fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) are compared with the abnormality

judgment reference value in the comparator circuit. If the output voltage from TH1, TH2, TH3, or TH4

exceeds the reference value, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening RL1.

CAUTION:

• The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing

lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the

specified clearances.

• Periodically check the contact between the fixing upper roller and TH3 and the contact

between the fixing lower roller and TH4, and replace them if any abnormality is detected.

• The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.

2.3 Protection by thermostat /1 (TS1) and thermostat /2 (TS2)

When the temperature of the fixing upper roller exceeds the specified value, TS1 is turned OFF, thus inter-

rupting the power to L2 and L3 directly. When the temperature of the fixing lower roller exceeds the speci-

fied value, TS2 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L4 directly.

CAUTION:

Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2.

Control

section

AC driver

section

TS1

PRCB ACDB

TS2

L2

L3

L4

RL1RL1

TH1

TH3

TH2

TH4

FHCB

8050sf002e


S-13

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.

When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid

burns and electric shock.

CAUTION

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury.

8050sf003e


S-14

CAUTION

-


8050sf004e


S-15

CAUTION

8050sf005e

-



S-16

CAUTION

8050sf006e

-



S-17

CAUTION

8050sf007e

-

Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury..


S-18

CAUTION

8050sf008e

Unplug the machine before removing platen glass.

Debrancher le copieur avant de retirer la vitre d'exposition.

Desenchufe la maquina antes de quitar el vidrio.

Desconecte a unidade da tomada antes de remover o vidro de exposicao.

PS

~

-


CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR

1-1

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LYI DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

Caution:

• Make sure the power cord of the copier is

unplugged from the power outlet before dis-

assembly or assembly.

1. EXTERIOR

1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle

• Dust filter /2: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure

1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the filter cover

[2].

2. Pull out the dust filter /2 [2] from the filter cover

[1].

3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal

steps in reverse.

[1]

[2] 8050ma3001

[2][1] 8050ma3002

EXTERIOR CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-2

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.2 Replacing the dust filter /1and the ozone filter /1


• Dust filter /1: Every 100,000 copies

• Ozone filter /1: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure

1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover /

2 [2].

2. Pull out the filter replacement duct [1].

[1]

[1][2] 8050ma3004

[1] 8050ma3005


1-3

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. Remove the 2 dust filters /1 [2] and the ozone fil-

ter /3 [3] from the filter replacement duct [1].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling the ozone filter /1, be care-

ful not snap and fracture it.

• When reinstalling the dust filter /1, be sure to

press it against the stopper section [4] of the

filter replacement duct.

[4]

[1] [3] [2]

8050ma3006


1-4

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.3 Replacing the toner collec-tion box


• Toner collection box: Every 50,000 copies (to be

replaced by the user)

B. Procedure

1. Open the toner collection door [1] and pull out

the toner collection box [2]. [1]

[2] 8050ma3007


1-5

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2. Peel the label [2] off the toner collection box [1]

and plug the entrance of the toner collection box

[1].


steps in reverse.

[1]

[2]

[2][3]

8050ma3008


1-6

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.4 Angle adjustment of theoperation board

Note:

• The operation board can be set at the two

steps of 7 and 18 degrees depending on the

front cover /2 provided or not provided.

When the front cover /2 provided: 7 degrees

When the front cover /2 not provided: 18

degrees

A. Procedure

1. Open the front door [1] and the toner supply

door [2].

2. Remove 2 screws [3] and release the fixing of

the operation board [4].

3. With the operation board raised up, remove the

front cover /2 [5] (when the angle is changed

from 7 to 18 degrees).

4. Fasten the operation board [4] with 2 screws [3].

5. Close the front door [1] and the toner supply

door [2].

Note:

• When changing the angle of the operation

board from 18 to 7 degrees, install the front

cover /2 by following Step 3.

[4][3] [5] [3]

[1]

[2]

8050ma3009


1-7

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.5 Removing and reinstallingthe main board unit

A. Procedure

1. Remove the platen cover.

2. Remove the filter cover. (See "1.1 Replacing the

dust filter /2.")

3. Loosen 2 screws [1], remove 13 screws [2], and

then remove the rear cover [3].

4. Remove the side cover /2. (See "1.2 Replacing

the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1.")

5. Remove the screws [5], one for each, and then

remove the 2 original cover supports [6].

6. Remove 2 caps [4].

7. Remove 4 screws [7] and then remove the scan-

ner cover /R [8].

8. Remove the special screw [1].

9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the

board seal plate /2 [3].

[8] [7] [6] [5] [4][6] [5]

[1][3]

[2]

[2]

[2]

[4]

8050ma3010

[1][3]

[2] 8050ma3011


1-8

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

10. Remove 5 connectors [1].

11. With the lock lever [2] brought down this side,

release the lock and pull out the ribbon cable [3].

Note:

• Move the lock lever [1] forward, then insert the

ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector

while ensuring that the conductive face of the

ribbon cable [3] is positioned on the opposite

side of the lock lever.

[1] [3] [1]

[1]

8050ma3012

[2][3]

[1]

[2]

[3]


1-9

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

• Then with the lock lever [1] brought back to its

original position, lock the ribbon cable [2].


board seal plate /4 [2].

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2] 8050ma3013


1-10

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

13. Remove a bracket cable clamp [1].


15. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the main

board unit [4].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When removing or reinstalling the main board

unit, be careful that the battery on the memory

board (MB) does not touch with the frame.

[3][4]

[3][1]

[2]

8050ma3014

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SCANNER

1-11

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2. SCANNER

2.1 Screws that must not beremoved

Note:

Screws that have been paint-locked are not

allowed to be removed. So, be careful not to

remove them.

2.2 Removing and reinstallingthe platen glass

A. Procedure

1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the origi-

nal positioning plate /R [2].

2. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the origi-

nal positioning plate /L [4].

3. Remove 2 screws [5] and the remove the scan-

ner cover /M [6].

4. Remove the platen glass [7].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be sure to reinstall the platen glass with its

white reference plate [8] up.

[1]

[1][1][1] 8050ma3015

[5][1] [6][4] [2]

[7][3] [8] 8050ma3016

SCANNER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-12

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2.3 Removing and reinstallingthe CCD unit

A. Procedure for removal

1. Remove the platen glass. (See "2.2 Removing

and reinstalling the platen glass.")

2. Remove the connector [1].

3. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the CCD

cover [3].

4. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the rib-

bon cable cover [5].

5. With the lock lever [1] brought down, release the

lock and pull out the ribbon cable [2].

Note:

• Move the lock lever [1] downward, then insert

the ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector

while ensuring that the conductive face of the

ribbon cable is positioned on the opposite

side of the lock lever.

• Then bring the lock lever back to its original

position, lock the ribbon cable.

[4] [5] [3]

[2][1] 8050ma3141

[2][1] 8050ma3142


1-13

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD

unit [2].

Note:

• Be careful not to remove screws other than

those mentioned above. Otherwise, it

becomes necessary to make all sort of optical

adjustments which cannot be handled in the

field.

• Be careful not to touch the lens. This may

result in poor images.


steps in reverse.

[1] [2]

[1] 8050ma3143


1-14

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2.4 Removing and reinstallingthe exposure unit

A. Procedure for removal

1. Remove the slit glass. (See "2.2 Removing and

reinstalling the slit glass.")

2. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Open-

ing and closing of the toner supply section.")


4. Remove 6 screws [1].

5. After removing the relay connector [4] with the

scanner cover /F [3] shifted to the front side

once, remove the scanner cover /F [3].

[1]

[4][3]

[1][2] [2]

8050ma3017


1-15

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the fixing of

the exposure unit [2].

7. Rotate the exposure unit [2] while holding it hor-

izontally, pull it up and place it upon the scanner

room [6].


9. Remove the screw [2] and release the cable [4]

from the cable holder [3].

10. Remove the exposure unit [5].

[2][5][1] [4]

[1]

[3]

[6] [5] 8050ma3018

[5][1][2] [3]

[4] 8050ma3019


1-16

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

B. Procedure for reinstallation

1. Set the exposure unit [1] into the main body.

2. Move the V-mirror unit [2] to the paper exit side,

and pass an optical positioning jig [3] through

each of the exposure unit [1] and the V-mirror

unit [2] from the front side.

Note:

• When reinstalling the exposure unit, be sure

to use the optical positioning jig.

3. Fasten the exposure unit [1] with 2 screws [4].

4. Remove 2 optical positioning jigs [3].

5. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts fol-

lowing the removal steps in reverse.

[2] [1][4]

[4]

[3] 8050ma3020


1-17

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2.5 Removing and reinstallingthe exposure lamp

A. Procedure

1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing

and reinstalling the exposure unit.")

2. Cut the binding band [1] and release the fixing

of the cable [2].

3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the HP

detection plate [4].

4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove L1 (expo-

sure lamp) [6].


steps in reverse.

[6][1] [3]

[2] [4] [5] 8050ma3021


1-18

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2.6 Removing the scanner wire

A. Procedure

1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing

and reinstalling the exposure unit.")


3. Remove the screw [2] and remove the scanner

cover /R [3].

4. Remove the screw [4] and remove the scanner

cover /L [5].

5. Loosen the screws [1], one for each, and

release the fixing of two spring fixing plates [2].

[1] [4] [1][3] [2]

[5] 8050ma3022

[2]

[1] 8050ma3023


1-19

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6. Remove the wire terminal [3] of the scanner wire

/R [2] from the spring fixing plate [1], and then

remove the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of

the pulley /3 [4], the outside of the V-mirror pul-

ley [5] and the pulley /2 [6].

7. Remove the metal bead [8] of the scanner wire /

R [2] from the wire stopper [7], and then remove

the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of the inside

of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /1 [9].

8. Remove the scanner wire /R [2] from the drive

pulley [10].

9. Remove the scanner wire /F [11] by following

Steps 5 to 7.

Note:

• The scanner wires /F and /R are installed sym-

metrically.

[2]

[3]

[1]

[2] [8][7][11]

[5]

[3][6][4]

[2]

[10]

[9]

8050ma3024


1-20

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2.7 Reinstalling the scanner wire

A. Procedure

1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] to the paper exit side,

and pass the optical positioning jig [2] through

the V-mirror unit [1] from the front side.

Note:

• Be careful not to damage the mirror with the

jig.

• When reinstalling the scanner wire, be sure to

fasten the V-mirror with the optical position-

ing jig.

2. Drop into the fitting hole of the drive pulley [4] a

metal bead [3] provided at the center of each of

the scanner wires /F [1] and /R [2], and starting

from this hole, wind the scanner wire 2.5 turns

[5] outwards and 3.5 turns [6] inwards.

Note:

• For the scanner wires /F and /R, common

wires are used.

• Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that

the wire terminal is on the outside and the

metal bead [7] on the inside.

• Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that

both ends of the wire come out under the

drive pulley.

• Be sure to wind each of the scanner wires

closely around the drive pully with no wire

running on another wire.

3. After winding the scanner wires /F and R/, be

sure to fasten each wire end with a tape [8] so

that it will not come off.

[1]

[2] 8050ma3025

8050ma3026

[7] [3]

[5][6]

[4]

[1]

[7][3]

[5] [6]

[4]

[2]

[8]

[8]

[4]


1-21

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the metal bead

[3] side (inside) which is wound around the drive

pulley [1] through the pulley /1 [4] and the V-mir-

ror pulley [5] in this order, and then hook the

metal bead [3] onto the wire stopper [6].

5. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the wire terminal

[7] side (outside) which is wound around the

drive pulley [1] through the pulley /2 [8] and the

outside of V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /3 [9]

in this order, and then hook the wire terminal [7]

onto the spring fixing plate [10].

6. Reinstall the scanner wire /F [11] by following

Steps 4 and 5.

[2]

[3]

[1]

[2] [8][7][11]

[5]

[3][6][4]

[2]

[10]

[9]

8050ma3027

FRONT


1-22

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

7. Tighten the screws [1], one for each, and fasten

the 2 spring fixing plates [2].



[2]

[1] 8050ma3140

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 WRITING

1-23

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. WRITING

3.1 Screw that must not beremoved

Note:

• The screws [1] of each unit of the YMCK are

not allowed to be removed. So, be careful not

to remove them.

[1] 8050ma3028

WRITING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-24

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3.2 Removing and reinstallingthe write unit

Warning:

• Be sure that the write unit should not be

powered with it slid from its normal instal-

lation position.

• Be sure not to remove the write unit cover

while being supplied with power. Otherwise,

laser beams get into your eyes and you may

lose your sight.

Note:

• Be sure not to remove the write unit cover. Do

not loosen the screws, either.

• When removing the write unit, be careful not

to touch the dust glass (to prevent the mirror

from being stained).

• Be sure not to remove the write unit for at

least two minutes after the main power switch

is turned off.

• When replacing the side cover /1, insert the

prong [1] on the side cover /1 into the notch

on the main body.

A. Procedure

1. Open the by-pass tray [1].


2 [3].


1 [5].

8050ma3175[1]

[4] [2][5]

[3]

[1] 8050ma3029

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 WRITING

1-25

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Remove 5 relay connectors [1].

5. Remove 10 screws [2] and then remove the fan

holder /R [3].

Note:

• Check the direction where the fan is assem-

bled.

[1] Turn the label side inside.

[2] Turn the label side outside.

6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the write

pressing board [2] while pressing it downward.

7. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove 2 write

cooling ducts [4].

Note:

• Be sure to hold the upper half of the write

pressing board when removing it.

[2] [2]

[2][1][2] [3] 8050ma3030

[2] 5001ma3030[1]

[3]

[4]

[1]

[2][3] 8050ma3031

WRITING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-26

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY 8. Remove the connectors [1], 2 each, and then

remove the write unit /Y [2], write unit /M [3],

write unit /C [4] and the write unit /K [5].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• The write units /C, /M and /Y are all common.

• The bottom of the write units /C, /M and /Y is

provided with a wire tension spring [1] which

differentiates these three write units from the

write unit /K.

• Be careful not install any other write unit in

the installation place for the write unit /K.

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1][2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

8050ma3032

[1] 8050ma3034

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PROCESS UNIT

1-27

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. PROCESS UNIT

4.1 Flow of the disassembly ofthe process unit section

Open the toner supply section

Pull out the process unit Remove the charging corona unit

Pull out the transfer belt unit

Remove the drum cartridge Remove the developing unit

Remove the process unit

Remove the image correction unit

Open the front fan cover

PROCESS UNIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-28

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.2 Cleaning the charging corona unit

A. Procedure

Note:

• The charging corona units are provided for

the four colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and

black. These units are common. Do not reuse

a charging corona unit that was once used for

a color since it has been stuck with the toner

of the color.


ing and closing the toner supply section.")

2. With the lever [2] of the charging corona unit [1]

pressed down once to the lower right side, pull

out the charging corona unit this side for

removal.

[2]

[1]

8050ma3037


1-29

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. Remove a charging cleaning block [3] from the

charging suction assembly [2] provided on the

outside of the toner supply unit [1].

Note:

• There are two charging cleaning blocks pro-

vided. Be sure to use either of these two

blocks when cleaning the charging corona.

4. Holding the charging corona unit [2] so that the

charging control plate [1] comes up, set the

charging cleaning block [3] to the notch and

insert it from under the bottom on the rear side,

and turn it about 45° clockwise.

Note:

• If the charging wire is cleaned with the charg-

ing control plate facing down, there is a risk

that dust that has stuck to the charging wire

sticks to the charging control plate. So, when

cleaning the charging wire, be sure to hold the

charging corona unit so that the charging

control plate comes upward.

5. Clean the charging wire [4] by sliding back and

forth the charging cleaning block [3].


steps in reverse.

[2]

[3] [1]

8050ma3038

[3]

[1]

[2]

8050ma3039


1-30

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.3 Cleaning/replacing, remov-ing and reinstalling the charging wire assy/the charging control plate


• Charging wire assy: Every 100,000 copies

• Charging control plate: Every 200,000 copies

• Charging grid spring: Every 200,000 copies

Note:

• The charging corona unit is made up of a

charging wire assy, charging control plate and

a charging grid spring.

B. Procedure

1. Remove the charging corona unit. (See "4.2

Cleaning and replacing the charging corona

unit.")

2. Remove 2 charging control springs [1] and then

remove the charging control plate [2].

3. Clean the charging control plate by blowing off

dust with a blower brush.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be sure to install the charging control plate so

that the side on which the charging control

spring is hooked comes to the front of the

charging corona unit.

• Be sure to install each of the charging control

springs with its tips [3] of both ends point

toward the charging wire.

[3]

[1]

[2]

[2]

8050ma3040


1-31

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.4 Pulling out the process unit

Note:

• In order to prevent the main body from falling

down, the process unit and the ADU are pro-

vided with a safety mechanism so that they

cannot be pulled out at the same time.

• If the ADU has been pulled out when pulling

out the process unit, be sure to push it back

into the main body.

A. Procedure



2. Loosen the screw [1] and open the front fan

cover [2].

3. Bring down the stand handle /L [1] and the

stand handle /R [2] to the inside at the same

time to release the fixing of the process unit [3].

Then, hold each of the stand handles to pull out

the process unit [3].


steps in reverse.

[2]

[1] 8050ma3035

[3]

[1]

[2]

8050ma3036


1-32

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.5 Removing and reinstallingthe transfer belt unit

A. Procedure

1. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out

the process unit.")

2. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each.

3. After turning once the belt positioning shaft [2]

counterclockwise, pull it out for removal.

4. Remove the supporting rod [3] from the charg-

ing corona suction assembly [2] provided on the

inside of the toner supply unit [1].

Note:

• The supporting rod is an auxiliary device to

allow a removed transfer belt unit to self

stand. When removing the transfer belt unit,

be sure to make necessary arrangements in

advance.

[1]

[1]

[2]

8050ma3043

[2]

[3] [1]

8050ma3044


1-33

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. With the handle [1] raised up, remove the trans-

fer belt unit [2].

Note:

• Be careful not to touch and damage the trans-

fer belt [3] with bare hands.

• Make sure to grab both ends of the handle of

the transfer belt with both hands.

6. Set the supporting rod [2] to the transfer belt unit

[1] to allow it to self stand.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Make sure not to touch and damage the trans-

fer belt unit with the drum at installation.

[3]

[1]

[2]

[2]

5001ma3045

[1]

Hold Hold

[1][2] 8050ma3046


1-34

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

Note:

• When reinstalling the transfer belt unit [1], be

sure to turn the cam [3] clockwise fully until it

will not turn any more before starting work.

• Be sure to install the transfer belt unit so that

2 transfer support blocks /F [4] and the 2

transfer support blocks /R [5] are accompa-

nied with the guide pins [2] provided at two

places each at front and rear.

• Be sure not to rotate the transfer belt when

the transfer belt unit self stand with a support-

ing rod.

[4]

[1]

[5] 8050ma3047

[2]

[3]

[2]


1-35

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.6 Replacing the belt cleaningbrush unit


• Belt cleaning brush unit: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure

1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Remov-

ing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.")

2. Remove 2 screws [2] while holding the belt

cleaning unit [1] by hand, and then remove the

belt cleaning unit.

3. Replace the belt cleaning brush unit with a new

one.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• The belt cleaning unit is made up of the belt

cleaning brush unit and the parts listed below.

(For details of these parts, see "4.7 Replacing

the belt cleaning blade" and "4.8 Replacing

the toner collection sheet /1.")

Belt cleaning blade : 1 piece

Blade spring : 2 pieces

Stop ring : 2 pieces

Blade fulcrum shaft : 1 piece

Toner collection sheet /1 : 1 piece

Toner collection sheet /2 : 1 piece

Screw : 3 pieces

• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, apply

the setting powder on the portion [3] on the

transfer belt.

• When reinstalling it, set the guide sections

provided on both sides below the belt clean-

ing unit to the pins of the transfer belt unit,

and then attach the screws.

[1]

[2][2]

[3]

8050ma3048


1-36

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.7 Replacing the belt cleaningblade


• Belt cleaning blade: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure

1. Remove the belt cleaning unit. (See "4.6

Replacing the belt cleaning unit.")

2. Remove 2 blade springs [1].

3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the

blade support shaft [3] and remove the belt

cleaning blade [4].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, coat

the entire surface on the side on the transfer

belt, on which the belt cleaning unit is to be

mounted, with the setting powder. [1][3]

[2]

[3][4]

8050ma3049


1-37

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.8 Replacing the toner collec-tion sheet /1


• Toner collection sheet /1: Every 200,000 copies

B. Procedure

1. Remove the belt cleaning unit.

2. After removing 3 screws [1], remove the toner

collection sheet /2 [2] and then remove the toner

collection sheet /1 [3].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be careful not to fold the PET sheet of the

toner collection sheet /1, or damage it by hit-

ting it on the edge.

[3][2]

[1]

8050ma3159


1-38

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.9 Replacing the belt separa-tion claw


• Belt separation claw: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure



2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the sep-

aration claw unit [2].

Note:

• Be careful not to touch and/or damage the

transfer belt [3] with bare hands.

• When reinstalling the separation claw unit, be

sure to apply setting powder to the semicircle

[4] of the transfer belt [3].

3. Remove the screws [1], one each, and then

remove 3 transfer belt separation claws [2].


steps in reverse.

[2]

[2]

[1]

[4]

[3]

8050ma3050

[2]

[1]

8050ma3051


1-39

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.10 Replacing the transfer belt

A. Screw that must not be removed

Note:

• The screws [1] shown in the drawing below

are not allowed to be removed. Be careful not

to remove them.

B. Periodically replaced parts/cycle

• Transfer belt: Every 200,000 copies

C. Procedure



2. Remove the belt cleaning unit. (See "4.6

Replacing the belt cleaning unit.")

3. Remove the separation claw unit. (See "4.9

Replacing the belt separation claw.")

4. Remove 2 tension springs [1].

[1] 8050ma3148

[1][1]

8050ma3053


1-40

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. Stand up the transfer belt unit [1] by using the

front side of the transfer belt unit [1] as the bot-

tom.

6. Remove the screw [2] and release the fixing of

the handle [3].

7. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the shaft

stopper [5].

8. Remove the screw [6] and then remove the ten-

sion plate /R [7].

Note:

• When reinstalling the tension plate /R, knock

against the projection of the tension plate /R.

9. Remove 2 screws [8] and then remove the high

voltage supply curler /R [9].

10. Remove the stop ring [10] and then remove the

bearing [11].

Note:

• When reinstalling the stop ring, be sure to

raise the shaft so that the stop ring is set in

the groove of the shaft.

11. Pull up the transfer belt [12] for removal.

Note:

• Be sure to reinstall the transfer belt so that

the rear side stamped with "UP SIDE" at the

edge of the belt comes up.

• When holding the transfer belt by hand, hold it

within 10mm from the upper end. Be careful

not touch any part other than this.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be careful not to touch and/or damage the

transfer belt with bare hands.

• Before installing the belt cleaning unit, coat

the entire surface on the side on the transfer

belt, on which the belt cleaning unit is to be

mounted, with the setting powder.

[3] [6][2]

[8][11]

8050ma3054

[7]

[5][4]

[9][10]

[12] [1]

8050ma3152


1-41

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.11 Replacing the 1st transferroller


• 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K: Every 200,000

copies

B. Procedure

1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing

the transfer belt.")

2. Place the transfer belt unit as shown in the illus-

tration.

3. Remove the stop ring [1].

4. After removing 1 bearing [2], slide the stopper /4

[3] to open the tip end of the transfer release

arm [4].

5. Remove the 1st transfer roller /K [6] while sliding

it.

6. Remove 3 1st transfer rollers/Y, /M, /C [5].

Note:

• Be sure to reinstall the 1st transfer roller so

that a shallow groove near the groove of the

E-ring comes this side.

7. Remove the E-rings [7], 2 each, from each of

the 1st transfer rollers.


steps in reverse.

[3] [4]

[2][1]

[7]

[7][5]

[7]

[7] [6][4] [3]

8050ma3055


1-42

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.12 Replacing the 2nd transferroller /U


• 2nd transfer roller /U: Every 200,000 copies

B. Procedure

1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing

the transfer belt.")

2. After raising the 2nd transfer roller /U [1] once,

remove it diagonally from the lower side.

Note:

• The fixing of the 2nd transfer roller /U was

released when the transfer belt was removed

at the time of the removal of the high voltage

supply curler.

• Be sure to reinstall the 2nd transfer roller /U

so that the shaft end with a dent comes to the

bottom.

3. Remove 2 bearings [2] from the 2nd transfer

roller /U [1].


steps in reverse.

[2]

8050ma3056

[1]

[1][2]

1

2


1-43

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.13 Replacing the drum car-tridge


• Drum cartridge: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure

Note:

• The drum cartridges are provided for the four

colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black,

and they are all common. However, be sure to

avoid reusing a drum cartridge that was once

used for a color since it has been stuck with

the toner of that color.



2. After raising once both ends [2] of the drum stay

/U [1], hold them and remove the drum cartridge

/Y [3].

3. Remove the drum cartridge /M [4], drum car-

tridge /C [5] and the drum cartridge /K [6] in the

same manner as in Step 2.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling each drum cartridge, be

sure to check if both ends of the cartridge

have been dropped into the grooves of the

drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8]. (The

drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8] are

for yellow drum cartridges. Repeat the steps

for other cartridges in the same manner.)

• When reinstalling the drum cartridge /K [6], be

careful that the mylar [9] is not caught up.

• Be careful not touch and damage the photo-

sensitive material of the drum with bare

hands.

• When the drum cartridge is not used for a

long period of time, be sure to store it in the

dark place with a cover on it (to shield the

light).

[2]

[8]

[1]

[6]

[5]

[4]

[3][7]

[9] 8050ma3057


1-44

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.14 Removing and reinstallingthe drum

A. Screw that must not be removed

Note:

• Screws that are paint locked are not allowed

to be removed. Be careful not to remove them

at all costs.

B. Procedure

1. Remove the drum cartridge. (See "4.13 Replac-

ing the drum cartridge.")

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the drum

stay /U [2].

[1][1]

8050ma3058

[1]

[2] 8050ma3059


1-45

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. Remove the coupling shaft /A [1] and then

remove the coupling /A [2].


5. Remove the position adjusting plate /R [8].


screw idler gear [5].

7. Remove 3 screws [6] (be careful not to remove

black screw.).

8. Remove the position adjusting plate /F [7].

9. Hold both ends of the drum [9] and raise it up for

removal.

Note:

• Be sure to reinstall the drum so that the cou-

pling side of the drum flange comes to the

rear side of the drum cartridge.


steps in reverse.

[1] [8][2]

[6]

[7] [5] [4][9]

[3]

8050ma3060


1-46

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.15 Replacing the developingunit


• Developing unit: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure

Note:

• Be careful not to fold the Teflon sheet posted

at the developing sleeve side of the develop-

ing unit upper cover.

• When cleaning the developing unit, be sure to

use Hydro-Wipe which is specified as a CE

tool. Using paper or cloth other than Hydro-

Wipe will cause the developing regulation

plate in the developing unit to be stuck with

dust and lint of the paper or cloth, thus result-

ing in white streaks on the images.

• The developing units are provided for the four

colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black,

and they are all common. However, be sure to

avoid reusing a developing unit that was once

used for a color since it has been stuck with

the toner of that color.



2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove 4 devel-

oping support legs [3] provided inside the toner

supply unit [2].

Note:

• When placing the developing unit by itself, be

sure to set the developing support legs to the

body of the developing unit as a seat to pre-

vent the toner bristles section from getting in

touch with other sections.

3. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out

the process unit.")

[2][3]

[3][1]

8050ma3062


1-47

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Remove the screws [1], 3 each, and then

remove 2 developing pressing blocks [2] while

sliding the upper side of the developing pressing

blocks.

5. Remove the relay connectors [1], 1 each, and

then remove 4 developing units [2] one at a time.


steps in reverse. Place an appropriate color

label supplied with the developing unit on the

new unit.

Note:

• Be careful not to open the developing unit

cover.

[1] [1]

[2] 8050ma3063

[1] [2] 8050ma3064


1-48

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.16 Replacing the developer


• Developer: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure

1. Remove the developing unit. (See "4.15 Replac-

ing the developing unit.")

2. Put the developing unit [1] on end and rotate its

upper end in drawing an arc to discharge devel-

oper. After discharging the developer, repeat

Steps 3 and 4 below to discharge all of the

developer.

3. Install the rotating jig [1] provided inside the

toner supply unit to the coupling [2] on the agita-

tor screw side and turn it in the arrow-marked

direction.

8050ma3149

[1] [2]

8050ma3150


1-49

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Install the rotating jig to the coupling [1] on the

developing sleeve side and turn it in the arrow-

marked direction.

Note:

• If the jig is turned in the reverse direction, it

sometimes occurs that the developer is not

discharged completely. Be careful not to turn

it in the reverse direction.

5. Charge a new developer. (See "7. 36 mode," "II .

Adjustment" in Field Service.)

[1]

8050ma3151


1-50

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.17 Replacing the belt separa-tion claw solenoid


• Developer: Every 1,500,000 copies

B. Procedure



2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the sole-

noid lever [2].

3. Remove the relay connector [3].

4. Remove the screw [4] and release the cable [6]

from the cable clamp [5].

5. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the SD1

(belt separation claw solenoid) [8].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When having reinstalled the solenoid bar,

check to see if the shaft [9] of SD1 (belt sepa-

ration claw solenoid) moves smoothly while

sliding it.[7]

[8]

[4] [5] [6] [3] [2] [1] 8050ma3069


1-51

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.18 Removing and reinstallingthe process unit

A. Procedure



2. Remove all of the drum cartridges. (See "4.13

Replacing the drum cartridge.")

3. Remove all of the developing units. (See "4.15

Replacing the developing unit.")

4. Remove the screws [1], 2 each.

Note:

• When removing the process unit, be sure to

remove in advance the transfer belt unit, drum

cartridge and the developing unit.

• Be careful not to remove black screws.

5. Push back the process unit [6] until it becomes

possible to see the screw [5] through each hole

[4] of the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3].

6. Remove the screws [5], 1 each.

Note:

• Be careful not to remove black screws.

7. Pull out the process unit [6] again. Then remove

it from the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3] as

explained below:

The projection [7] on the guide rail /L is set into

the notch [8] of the process unit. The notch [10]

of the process unit is placed on the projection [9]

on the guide rail /R. Accordingly, slide the guide

rail /L a little against the process unit to remove

it from the guide rail /L, and then remove it from

the guide rail /R by raising the process unit.


steps in reverse.

[5]

[10] [9]

[3]

[4]

[1]

[6][8]

[1]

[7][6]

[4]

[5]

[2]

8050ma3070


1-52

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.19 Removing and reinstallingthe image correction unit

A. Procedure

1. Remove the process unit. (See "4.18 Removing

and reinstalling the process unit.")

2. Remove a relay connector [1].

3. Remove 2 screws and then remove the image

correction unit [3].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When removing the image correction unit, be

sure to remove in advance the process unit.

• When removing the image correction unit, be

careful not to touch the drum drive shaft [4] of

each color. Otherwise, this may cause stress

to it.

[4]

[2]

[4][3] [1] 8050ma3071

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TONER SUPPLY

1-53

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. TONER SUPPLY

5.1 Opening and closing thetoner supply section

A. Procedure

1. Open the front door [1].

2. Loosen the screw [2] and open the toner supply

section [3].

Note:

• With the toner supply section left open, be

sure not to apply force to the toner supply

sections such as the operation board. If

applied, the hinge of the toner supply section

may be deformed.

• When closing the toner supply section,

tighten the screw with a hand before using a

driver to prevent stripping the thread.

3. Remove once the door lock [2] provided on the

inside of the toner supply section [1] and replace

it at a new position where it becomes a stopper.

4. Close the front door following the steps for

opening in reverse order.

Note:

• When the toner supply section is opened, be

sure to replace the door lock to a new position

where it becomes a stopper and prevent it

from getting in touch with the process unit

when being pulled out.

[1] [2] [3] 8050ma3072

[1]

[2]

[2]

[1]

8050ma3073

TONER SUPPLY CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-54

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5.2 Replacing the charging dustfilter


• Charging dust filter: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure



2. Remove the charging dust filter [3] from the

charging suction assembly [2] provided on the

inside of the toner supply section [1].


steps in reverse.

[2]

[3] [1]

8050ma3074

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3

1-55

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3

6.1 Removing and reinstallingthe paper feed unit

A. Procedure

Note:

• Since the composition of the paper feed trays

/1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is

made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1.

1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1 [1].


paper feed unit cover [3].

[2]

[1]

[2]

[3]

8050ma3160

PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-56

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY


4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down

shaft screw [3].

5. After sliding the paper feed unit [4] to the rear

side, lift it up. Remove the connector [5] and

then remove the paper feed unit [4].


steps in reverse.

[1]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[3]

8050ma3161


1-57

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6.2 Removing and reinstallingthe paper feed trays /1 to /3

A. Procedure

Note:




1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1.

2. Remove the paper feed unit.

3. Remove 4 screws [1] and lift up the paper feed

tray /1 [2] for removal.


steps in reverse.

[2][1]

[1]

8050ma3162


1-58

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6.3 Replacing the paper feedroller and the feed rubber


• Paper feed roller: Every 2,500,000 copies (Every

800,000 copies in actual replacement count)

• Feed rubber: Every 400,000 copies (Every


B. Procedure

Note:






3. Remove 2 stop rings [1], slide 2 bearings [2] to

the outside and then remove the paper feed

roller assembly [3].

[2] [3]

[1]

8050ma3163


1-59

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Remove a bearing [1].

5. Remove a stop ring [2] and then remove the

paper feed roller [3].


feed roller [5].

7. Remove the feed rubber [6] from the feed roller

[5].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be sure to install the feed rubber [6] so that

the paint mark [7] turns in the arrow-marked

direction.

• Be sure to check that each roller is not stuck

with grease.

[6]

[7]

[5]

[4]

[1]

[2][3] 8050ma3164


1-60

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6.4 Replacing the double feedprevention rubber


• Double feed prevention rubber: Every 400,000

copies (Every 125,000 copies in actual replace-

ment count)

B. Procedure

Note:






3. Remove the paper feed roller assembly.


double feed prevention roller [2].

5. Remove the gear [3] from the double feed pre-

vention roller [2].

6. Remove the double feed prevention rubber [4]

from the double feed prevention roller [2].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be sure to install the double feed prevention

rubber [4] so that the paint mark [5] turns in

the arrow-marked direction.

• Be sure to check that the double feed preven-

tion roller is not stuck with grease.

[5]

[1]

[2][4][3] 8050ma3165


1-61

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6.5 Replacing the paper feedclutch and the pre-registra-tion clutch


• Paper feed clutches /1 to /3 (MC7, MC9, MC11):

Every 4,000,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies

in actual replacement count)

• Pre-registration clutches /1 to /3 (MC8, MC10,

MC13): Every 4,000,000 copies (Every

2,000,000 copies in actual replacement count)

B. Procedure

Note:








MC7 [3].


MC8 [5].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling the clutches, be sure to

check that the stopper [6] of each clutch is in

the specified position.

[5] [4]

[6]

8050ma3166

[3]

[2]

[1]


1-62

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6.6 Removing and reinstallingthe tray up/down wire

Wire length:

• Up/down wire /A and up/down wire /C: 531mm

• Up/down wire /B and up/down wire /D: 160mm

A. Removing the wire

Note:






3. Remove the paper feed tray /1.

4. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the wire

cover /FR [2].


cover /FL [4].


cover /RR [6].


cover /RL [8].

[5][7] [6] [2]

8050ma3167

[1]

[3]

[4][8]


1-63

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

8. Remove an E-ring [1].

9. Slide the drive pulley [2] to the inside and

remove the wires /C [3] and /D [4].

10. After removing an E-ring [5], remove the pulley

[6] and release the wires /C [3] and /D [4] from

the wire restraining cover [7].

11. Remove a screw [8] from the bottom of the

paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /D

[4].


[10] and release the wire /C [3] from the wire

restraining cover [11].


paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /C

[3].


15. Slide the drive pulley [14] to the inside and

remove the wires /A [15] and /B [16].


[18] and release the wires /A [15] and /B [16]

from the wire restraining cover [19].


paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /B

[16].


[22] and release the wire /A [15] from the wire

restraining cover [23].


paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /A

[15].

[13][14][24][15]

[3]

[10]

[11][7]

[6]

[5]

[8]

[1]

[16]

[15]

[21]

[9]

[2][12]

[19][22][23] [18]

[4]

[17]

[20]

[3]

8050ma3168


1-64

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

B. Attaching the wire

Note:




1. Install the wire /C [3] to the wire holding shaft [2]

with a screw [1] from the bottom side of the

paper feed tray.

2. After winding the wire /C [3] around the pulley

[4], insert it into the shaft [6] together with the

wire restraining cover [5] and fasten it with an E-

ring [7].

3. Install the wire /D [10] to the wire holding shaft

[9] with a screw [8] from the bottom side of the

paper feed tray.

4. After winding the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10]

around the pulley [11], insert it into the shaft [13]

together with the wire restraining cover [12] and

fasten it with an E-ring [14].

Note:

• Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley

[11] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the out-

side and the wire /D [10] to the inside.

5. After sliding the drive pulley [15] to the outside

with the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10] inserted

into the up/down drive shaft [14], fasten it with

an E-ring [16].

[17]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[12]

[11]

[13][4]

[8]

[9]

[16]

[18]

[17]

[7]

[6]

[15][14][1][2]

[10]

[3]

8050ma3169


1-65

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

Note:

• Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley

[14] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the out-

side and the wire /D [10] to the inside.

6. Install the wires /A [17] and /B [18] by following

Steps 1 to 5.

Note:

• After completion of attaching the wires, be

sure to rotate the up/down drive shaft by hand

to check to see if the up/down plate goes up

and down smoothly.



BY-PASS TRAY CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-66

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

7. BY-PASS TRAY

7.1 Replacing the paper feedroller and the feed roller


• Paper feed roller: Every 800,000 copies in actual

replacement count

• Feed roller: Every 125,000 copies in actual

replacement count

B. Procedure

1. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and

reinstalling the ADU.")


paper feed solenoid cover [2].

3. Remove the stop ring [1].

4. Remove the bearing [2] and then remove the

paper feed roller unit [3].

[1][2]

[1]

8050ma3075

[3]

[1][2]

8050ma3076

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 BY-PASS TRAY

1-67

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. After removing the stop ring [1], pull out the feed

shaft [2] and remove the paper feed gear

assembly [3].

6. Remove the paper feed roller [4] from the paper

feed gear assembly [3].

7. Remove the feed roller assembly [2] from the

by-pass drive shaft [1].

8. Remove the feed roller [3] from the feed roller

assembly [2].

Note:

• Be sure to install the feed roller [3] so that the

paint mark [4] turns in the direction shown in

the drawling.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1]

so that the actuator section [2] coincides with

the detection section of the PS47 (no paper

sensor /BP) [3].

• Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1]

so that the tip end of the paper feed side of

the paper up/down lever comes into contact

with the inside of the top plate of the paper

feed roller unit [1].

[4] [1]

[3][2]

8050ma3077

[4]

8050ma3078[2] [1][3]

[1]

[3] [2][4]

8050ma3079


1-68

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

7.2 Replacing the double feedprevention roller


• Double feed prevention roller: Every 125,000

copies in actual replacement count

B. Procedure

1. Remove the paper feed roller and the feed roller.

(See "Replacing the paper feed roller and the

feed roller.")

2. Remove 2 double feed pressure springs [1].

3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the dou-

ble feed prevention shaft [3] and remove the

flange [4] and the double feed prevention roller

assembly [5].

4. Remove the double feed prevention roller [6]

from the double feed prevention roller assembly

[5].


steps in reverse.

Note:


roller [6] so that the paint mark [7] turns in the

direction shown in the drawing.

[7]

8050ma3080[6][4] [5]

[1]

[2][3][1]

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 BY-PASS TRAY

1-69

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

7.3 Replacing the paper feedclutch /BP


• Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6): Every 2,000,000

copies in actual replacement count

B. Procedure





3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "9.2 Removing and

reinstalling the fixing unit.")

4. Remove 4 screws [1]. (One of the screws is

installed on the underside of the ADU cover/R

[2].)

5. After pulling out the ADU cover /R [2] halfway,

remove 2 relay connectors [3] and then remove

the ADU cover /R [2].

6. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the

stand pulling lever [5].

7. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the ADU

cover /L [7].

[1]

[2]

8050ma3081

[1]

[3][5][6]

[7]

[4]


1-70

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY



paper feed clutch /BP (MC6) [3].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling the paper feed clutch /BP

(MC6) [1], be sure to set the stopper in the

detente groove [2].

[1]

[2][3]

8050ma3082

[2]

[1]

8050ma3083

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE

1-71

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

8. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE

8.1 Removing and reinstallingthe vertical conveyance

A. Procedure


4 [2].


5 [4].

[4]

8050ma3170

[2]

[1]

[3]

VERTICAL CONVEYANCE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-72

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. Pull out the paper feed trays /1 [1], /2 [2] and /3

[3].

4. Loosen a screw [4].


6. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the side

cover /3 [7].

7. Push up the hooks [1] in 2 positions at both

sides, and separate the by-pass up/down cover

[2] from the vertical conveyance section [3].

[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[6] [7]

8050ma3171

8050ma3172

[3]

[1][2]

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 VERTICAL CONVEYANCE

1-73

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY


9. Pull out the vertical conveyance section [2],

remove a connector [3] and then remove the

vertical conveyance section [2].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When installing the vertical conveyance sec-

tion, be sure to fasten it with screws with the

vertical conveyance door closed.

8050ma3173

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]

VERTICAL CONVEYANCE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-74

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

8.2 Replacing the intermediateconveyance clutch /1


• Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13):

Every 2,000,000 copies

B. Procedure

1. Remove the vertical conveyance section.

2. Remove a connector [1].

3. Remove an E-ring [2] and then remove the

spacer [3] and the gear [4].


MC13 [6].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling the clutch, be sure to check

that the stopper [7] of the MC13 is in the spec-

ified position.

8050ma3174

[3]

[2]

[1]

[5][6]

[4]

[7]

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 FIXING

1-75

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9. FIXING

Caution:

• The fixing unit is very hot immediately after

turning off the main switch (SW2). In order to

avoid getting burnt, be sure to start operation

after the temperature goes down sufficiently.

9.1 Screws that must not beremoved

2 double nuts [1] are not allowed to be removed. Be

careful not to remove them. [1]

8050ma3153

FIXING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-76

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9.2 Removing and reinstallingthe fixing unit

A. Procedure

1. Open the front door.

2. Pull out the ADU.

3. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing

knob [2].

4. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the fixing

cover /F [4].

5. Open the reverse section [1] and remove a

screw [1] and 3 connectors [3]. And then remove

the fixing unit [4].

Note:

• When removing or reinstalling the fixing unit,

slide it toward front and raise it while holding

both ends [5] at front and rear.


steps in reverse.

[4] [1][3] [2]

8050ma3098

[2] [3]

[4][5][5][1]

8050ma3099


1-77

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9.3 Replacing the fixing upperheater lamps /1 and /2


• Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2): Every 2,500,000 cop-

ies

• Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3): Every 2,500,000 cop-

ies

B. Procedure

1. Remove the fixing unit.


cover /R [2].

Note:

• Be careful not to touch the glass section of

the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This

may shorten the effective life of the heater

lamp.

• Be careful not to damage the surface of the

fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing

or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to

contact and damage the inner surface of the

fixing roller.

• When the installation is completed, check to

see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to

the fixing plate and the faston terminal is

properly installed.

3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web

motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at

the 3 places.

[1]

[2]

8050ma3100

[2]

[3]

[1] 8050ma3154


1-78

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper

unit [2].

Note:

• The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When

attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder sec-

tion securely into the screw hole.

5. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] at the front, and a

clamp fixing screw [2], 2 faston terminals [3] and

a screw [4] at the rear. And then remove the fix-

ing plate [5] and pull out gently the fixing heater

lamps /1 and /2 [6] from the fixing roller /U [7] for

removal.

Note:

• When removing the faston terminal, be sure to

hold it at the connector.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so

that the maker mark indication comes to the

rear.

• When reinstalling the fixing heater lamps,

please note that the lamp fitting holes on the

fixing plate are different.

[2]

[1][1]

8050ma3101

[4][5]

[3]

[2] [7]

[1]

[6]

8050ma3102


1-79

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9.4 Replacing the fixing lowerheater lamp


• Fixing lower lamp (L4): Every 2,500,000 copies

B. Procedure



cover /R [2].

Note:

• Be careful not to touch the glass section of

the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This

may shorten the effective life of the heater

lamp.


fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing

or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to

contact and damage the inner surface of the

fixing roller.

• When the installation is completed, check to

see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to

the fixing plate and the faston terminal is

properly installed.



the 3 places.

[1]

[2]

8050ma3103

[2]

[3]

[1] 8050ma3155


1-80

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper

unit [2].

Note:

• The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When

attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder sec-

tion securely into the screw hole.

5. Remove the clamp fixing screw [1] and the con-

nector [2] at the front.

[2]

[1][1]

8050ma3104

[1]

[2] 8050ma3105


1-81

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6. Remove a clamp screw [1], a connector [2] and

a screw [3] at the rear to remove the fixing plate

[4]. And then pull out gently the fixing heater

lamp [5] from the fixing roller /L [6] for removal.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so

that the maker mark indication comes to the

rear.

[1][5][6]

[2]

[3]

[4]

8050ma3106


1-82

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9.5 Replacing the fixing roller /U,ball bearing /U and the heatinsulating sleeve /U


• Fixing roller /U: Every 100,000 copies

• Heat insulating sleeve /U: Every 600,000 copies

• Ball bearing /U: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure


2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the fixing unit

upper cover.

Note:

• When removing the fixing unit upper cover,

raise it up without tilting it to avoid damage to

the fixing roller /U.

3. Remove the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2.

[1] [2]

8050ma3177


1-83

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Remove the fixing upper lamps /1 and /2.

5. Remove the rear side O-ring [3].

Remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and the

ball bearing [5] at the rear side, from the fixing

roller /U [6].

Note:


fixing roller.

6. Remove the fixing roller /U [6].

7. Remove the O-ring [1] and then remove the fix-

ing gear [2].

8. After removing the O-ring [3] of front side,

remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and the

ball bearings /U [5] from the fixing roller /U [6].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• After replacing the fixing roller, check whether

the fixing temperature sensor /3 is contacting

with the roller.

• When fixing temperature sensor /3 is soiled

with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum

cleaner and cleaning pad.

• When having replaced the fixing roller /U, be

sure to make adjustments by referring to the

36 mode "Adjustment item list." Otherwise,

poor images may result.

• Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripher-

ies of the heat insulating sleeve with Maltemp

FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it.

• When reinstalling them, be sure to take note

of the directions of the ball bearing and the

flange of the heat insulating sleeve. Reinstall

them so that their upper surface turns to the

inside as seen in the picture in which they are

arranged after disassembly.

[6][5][4][3][5] [4] [3] [2]

[5] [4]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[3] [2] [1]

[1]

8050ma3108


1-84

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9.6 Replacing the fixing roller /L,ball bearing /L and the heatinsulating sleeve /L


• Fixing roller /L: Every 100,000 copies

• Heat insulating sleeve /L: Every 600,000 copies

• Ball bearing /L: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure


2. Remove the fixing cover /R.

3. Open the fixing upper unit.

(See “9.4 Replacing the fixing lower heater

lamp.”

4. Remove the fixing lower heater lamp.


entrance plate /L [2].

Note:

• Be careful not to damage the paper passage

section of the entrance plate /L.


fixing rollers /U and /L with the entrance plate

/L.

6. After loosening the stopper screw [1] once, open

the fixing paper exit guide [2] up to the turnout

position and retighten it temporarily and then

remove the fixing roller /L [3].

Note:


fixing roller.

[2]

[1] 8050ma3109

[3] [2]

[1][1]

8050ma3110


1-85

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

7. Remove the ball bearings /L [1], 1 each at both

sides, and the heat insulating sleeves /L [2], 1

each at both sides, from the fixing roller /L.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripher-

ies of the heat insulating sleeve with Multemp

FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it.

• When reinstalling them, be sure to take note

of the directions of the ball bearing and the

flange of the heat insulating sleeve.

• After replacing the fixing roller/r, check

whether the fixing temperature sensor /4 is in

touch with the roller.

• When fixing temperature sensor /4 is soiled

with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum

cleaner and cleaning pad.

[3]

[2]

[1]

8050ma3111


1-86

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9.7 Replacing the fixing temper-ature sensor /3, and remov-ing and reinstalling the fixingtemperature sensor /1 andthe thermostat /1

Caution:

• After installing the fixing temperature sensor

/3, be sure to check that the sensor section is

in touch with the fixing roller. If not, the tem-

perature control may go abnormal or the fix-

ing temperature sensor /3 may detect the low

fixing temperature abnormality.

• Be sure to check that the wiring harness is

not in touch with the fixing roller.

Caution:

• The thermostat /1 is an essential safety part.

Be sure to follow the cautions and steps

given below when removing and reinstalling.

Caution:

• After completion of the installation of the

thermostat /1, be sure to check that the wiring

harness is not in touch with the fixing upper

roller.

• Be sure to fasten the thermostat /1 after posi-

tioning it properly with a positioning jig

(4969-1885-01). Be sure to apply screws with

screw lock paint. Also be sure to conduct this

adjustment under the pressure-released con-

dition and the temperature low condition of

the fixing roller /U.


• Fixing temperature sensor /3: Every 2,500,000

copies


1-87

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing tempera-

ture sensor /3)



upper cover [2].

3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1] and the connector

[2].


temperature sensor /3 [2].

Note:

• When reinstalling it, check that the sensor

section of the fixing temperature sensor is in

touch with the fixing roller.


steps in reverse.

[1] [2]

8050ma3112

[1] [2]

8050ma3113

[1][2]

8050ma3114


1-88

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling the

fixing temperature sensor /1)

1. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the

mounting board [2] of the fixing temperature

sensor /1.



Note:

• Be careful not to change the position of the

set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /1.

• Be careful not to damage the internal surface

of the sensor.

• A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling

it.


steps in reverse.

D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /1)

1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2]

of the thermostat /1 and then remove the ther-

mostat section.

[1][2]

8050ma3115

[2][1]

8050ma3139

[1]

[1] [2]

8050ma3116


1-89

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ther-

mostat /1 [3] from the thermostat mounting

board [2].

E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat)

1. Fasten the thermostat /1 [2] with 2 screws [1].

2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board [2] with 2

screws [1].

3. Connect 2 faston terminals [3] to the thermostat

/1.

8050ma3117[3]

[1] [2]

8050ma3118

[1]

[2]

[1][2]

[3]

8050ma3119


1-90

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. With a thermostat positioning jig (4969-1885-01)

set between the thermostat /1 [1] and the fixing

upper roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting

board with 2 screws so that the mounting board

becomes the same thickness as the positioning

jig.

• Specification: a = 3.1 ± 0.2mm

5. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with

screw lock paint.

a

[2]

[1]

8050ma3120

[1] 8050ma3121


1-91

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9.8 Replacing the fixing temper-ature sensor /4, and remov-ing and reinstalling the fixingtemperature sensor /2 andthe thermostat /L

Caution:

• After reinstalling the fixing temperature sen-sor /4, be sure to check that the sensor sec-tion is in touch with the fixing roller. If not, thetemperature control may go abnormal or thefixing temperature sensor /4 may detect thelow fixing temperature abnormality.

• Be sure to check that the wiring harness isnot in touch with the fixing roller.

Caution:

• The thermostat /L is an essential safety part.Be sure to follow the cautions and stepsgiven below when removing and reinstalling.

Caution:

• After completion of the installation of thethermostat /L, be sure to check that the wir-ing harness is not in touch with the fixinglower roller.

• Be sure to fasten the thermostat /L after posi-tioning it properly with a positioning jig(4969-1886-01). Be sure to apply screws withscrew lock paint. And also be sure to conductthis adjustment under the pressure-releasedcondition and the temperature low conditionof the fixing roller /L.


• Fixing temperature sensor /4: Every 2,500,000

copies


1-92

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing tempera-

ture sensor /4)



entrance plate /L [2].

Note:

• Be careful not to damage the paper passage

section of the fixing admission plate /L [2].

3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1], connector [2] and a

screw [3], and then remove the fixing tempera-

ture sensor /4 [4].

Note:

• When reinstalling it, be sure to check that the

sensor section of the fixing temperature sen-

sor /4 is in touch with the fixing roller.


steps in reverse.

C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling the

fixing temperature sensor /2)

1. Remove a clamp screw [1], connector [2] and 2

screws [3], and then remove the mounting board

[4] of the fixing temperature sensor /2.

[2]

[1] 8050ma3122

[3]

[4]

[2]

[1]

8050ma3123

[1]

[3] [2] 8050ma3124


1-93

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY



Note:

• Be careful not to change the position of the

set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /2.

• Be careful not to damage the internal surface

of the sensor.

• A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling

it.


steps in reverse.

D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /L)

1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2]

of the thermostat /L and then remove the ther-

mostat section.

[2][1] 8050ma3125

[2]

[1]

8050ma3126


1-94

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ther-

mostat /L [3] from the thermostat mounting

board /L [2].

E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat /

L)

1. Fasten the thermostat /L [2] with 2 screws [1].

2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board /L [2]

with 2 screws [1].

3. Connect 2 faston terminals [4] to the thermostat

/L [3].

[1]

[2]

[3]

8050ma3127

[1]

[2]

8050ma3128

[4][3]

[2] [1] 8050ma3129


1-95

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. With a thermostat positioning jig (4969-1886-01)

set between the thermostat /L [1] and the fixing

lower roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting

board /L with 2 screws so that the mounting

board becomes the same thickness as the posi-

tioning jig.

• Specification: a = 2.7 ± 0.2mm

5. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with

screw lock paint.

a

[2]

[1]

8050ma3130

[1] 8050ma3131


1-96

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9.9 Replacing the fixing drivegear


• Fixing drive gear: Every 1,000,000 copies

B. Procedure


2. Remove the connector [1] and a screw [2], and

then remove the PS16 (fixing pressure release

sensor) [3].

Note:

• Be careful not to damage the PS16 [3].

3. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the

actuator [5].

Note:

• Be sure to take note of the direction of the

actuator when reinstalling it.



the 3 places.

[4][5][2]

[3] [1] 8050ma3132

[2]

[3]

[1] 8050ma3155


1-97

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. Remove 3 screws [1] and the connector [2], and

then remove the fixing drive panel assembly [3].


drive gear [2].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When installing the fixing drive gear, apply

Multemp FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) on it.

[3]

[1]

[2]

[1]

8050ma3133

[1]

[2]

8050ma3134


1-98

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9.10 Replacing the fixing cleaningunit


• Fixing cleaning unit: Every 200,000 copies

B. Procedure


2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then the remove the

fixing upper cover [2].

Note:

• When removing the fixing upper cover, raise it

up without tilting it to avoid damage to the fix-

ing roller /U.


cleaning unit [2].

Note:

• Be sure to turn the web drive gear [3] to take

up the slack of the cleaning web before rein-

stalling it to the fixing unit.

[1] [2]

8050ma3156

[2]

[1] [3] 8050ma3157


1-99

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

• When reinstalling it to the fixing unit, be sure

to press it against the paper exit side [2] hori-

zontally while being careful that the paper

entrance prevention plate [1] does not get in

touch with the roller. This is because the

paper entrance prevention plate may cause

damage to the roller.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• After replacing the fixing cleaning unit, be

sure to reset the count of the fixing cleaning

unit in accordance with the 25 mode "Parts

counter - Count of special parts."

If not, a problem such as image smudge may

arise because the web feed amount becomes

less than the set value or the machine dis-

plays the message "The fixing cleaning unit is

require to be replaced. Contact the service

manager or the authorized distributor” and is

disabled to copy or print.

[1][2]

8050ma3158


1-100

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9.11 Replacing the fixing torquelimiter

A. Periodically replaced part/cycle

• Fixing torque limiter: Every 600,000 copies

B. Procedure


2. Place it gently on an even table with its paper

feed side down.

3. Remove the E-ring [1].

4. Slide the shaft [1] to the rear side, and pull it out

with the notch [2] of the shaft aligned with the

panel.

[1] 8050ma3144

[2] [1]

8050ma3145


1-101

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. Remove the E-ring [1].

6. Remove the gear [1] and the fixing torque limiter

[2] and replace the fixing torque limiter with a

new one.

Note:

• The shaft [3] contains a pin [4]. Be careful that

the pin does not get lost.


steps in reverse.

[1] 8050ma3146

[1][2][3][4] 8050ma3147

REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-102

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

10.REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

10.1 Removing and reinstallingthe ADU

Note:

• In order to prevent the main body from falling

down, the process unit and the ADU are pro-

vided with a safety mechanism so that they

cannot be pulled out at the same time.

• If the process unit has been pulled out when

pulling out the ADU, be sure to put the pro-

cess unit back into the main body.

A. Procedure



2. Release the lock and pull down the ADU release

lever [1] counterclockwise and pull out the ADU

[2].



4. Remove the ADU cover /R, ADU release lever

and the ADU cover /L. (See "7.3 Replacing the

paper feed clutch /BP").

5. Remove the paper feed solenoid cover. (See

"7.1 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed

roller.")[1] [2] 8050ma3084

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

1-103

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY


7. Remove the screw [2] and then release the fix-

ing of the ADU wiring harness assembly [3].

8. Remove 4 screws [1].9. Remove the screw [2].10. Push back the ADU [6] so that each of the

screws [5] can be seen through the holes [4] inthe guide rail /L [3], and then remove the screws[5] one at a time.

Note:• Be careful not to remove black screws.

11. Pull out the ADU [6] once again and move theguide pin [8] of the guide rail /R [7] into the turn-out place of the oblong hole [9].

12. Remove the ADU [6] from the guide rails /L [3]and /R [7].

Note:• When removing the ADU [6], please note that

this work requires two persons, with one per-son at the paper feed side and the other at thepaper exit side.

• When removing the ADU [6], a person at thepaper feed side must hold the ADU handle /R[10].

• When removing the ADU [6], a person at thepaper exit side must hold the handle providedat the center of the fixing positioning rail [11].

13. Reinstall the above parts following the removalsteps in reverse.

[1]

[3]

[2]

8050ma3085

[9]

[8]

[7]

[6]

[3][2][5][4]

[10]

[11]

[1]

8050ma3086


1-104

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

10.2 Replacing the registrationcleaning sheet


• Registration cleaning sheet: Every 600,000 cop-

ies

B. Procedure





3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the regis-

tration cleaning sheet [2].


steps in reverse.

[1]

[2]

8050ma3087


1-105

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

10.3 Replacing the separationdischarging plate unit


• Separation discharging plate unit: Every 100,000

copies

B. Procedure







4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the transfer

release cover.

5. Remove 2 separation fitting screws [2].

6. Raise the separation discharging plate unit [2]

once, remove a faston [3] and then remove the

separation discharging plate unit [2].

Note:

• When removing the faston from the separa-

tion discharging plate unit, be sure to pull out

straight the faston cover section.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling the separation discharging

plate unit, be sure to fasten in advance the

separation fitting screw on the front side for

positioning.

8050ma3176[1]

[2]

[1]

[3][2]

8050ma3088


1-106

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

10.4 Replacing the transferground plate unit and the2nd transfer roller /L


• Transfer ground plate unit: Every 1,000,000 cop-

ies

• 2nd transfer roller /L: Every 200,000 copies

B. Procedure

1. Remove the separation discharging plate unit

[1]. (See "10.3 Replacing the separation dis-

charging plate unit.")

2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the

transfer ground plate unit [3].

3. Remove 2 stop rings [5].

4. Slide each of 2 bearings [6] to the outside and

remove the 2nd transfer roller /L [4].

5. Remove 2 bearings [6] from the 2nd transfer

roller /L [4].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be careful not to touch with bare hands the

2nd transfer roller /L [4] on any sections other

than the shaft section.

• When installing the 2nd transfer roller /L,

install it with the dent on the roller shaft

comes to the rear of the machine (instead of

coming to the side contacting with the trans-

fer earth plate).

[1]

[4]

[6]

[5][6]

[5][3][2] 8050ma3089


1-107

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

10.5 Replacing the registrationroller


• Registration roller: Every 1,500,000 copies

B. Procedure

1. Remove the registration cleaning sheet. (See

"10.2 Replacing the registration cleaning

sheet.")



paper feed clutch /BP.")

3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the gear

cover [2].


5. Remove the stop rings [4], 1 each, and then

remove the bearings [5], 1 each at front and

rear.

6. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the regis-

tration unit [7].

Note:

• When removing the registration unit [7], open

the conveyance guide plate /U [8] and slide

the registration unit toward the rear of the

ADU to pull out the shaft of the front side from

the ADU panel, and then remove the registra-

tion unit.

[7]

[3] [6] [1][2] [8]

[6]

[4][5]

[4][5] 8050ma3090


1-108

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

7. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the reg-

istration gear [2] and the pin [3].

Note:

• When reinstalling the registration gear [2], be

sure to attach the pin [3] without fail.

8. Remove 2 registration pressure springs [4].

9. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and 2 bearings [6] and

then remove the registration roller [7].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling the registration unit, be

careful not to damage the paper passage of

the guide plate.

• Make sure to replace the registration pressure

springs to the original position.

[1] [2]

[3]

[5] [4]

[6]

[7][4]

[5][6]

8050ma3091


1-109

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

10.6 Replacing the intermediateconveyance clutches /2 and /3






B. Procedure

1. Remove the ADU cover /R. (See "7.3 Replacing

the paper feed clutch /BP.")



intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) [3].



intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) [6].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling the MC4 and MC5, be sure

to take note of the position of the stopper.

[4] [1][2] [3]

[5] [6]

8050ma3092


1-110

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

10.7 Replacing the ADU convey-ance clutches /1 and /2


• ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1):


• ADU pre-registration clutch (MC2):


B. Procedure

1. Remove the ADU release lever and the ADU

cover /L (See "7.3 Replacing the paper feed

clutch /BP").



ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) [3].



ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) [6].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling the MC1 and MC2, be sure

to take note of the position of the stopper.

[2][4][3]

[1][6][5]

8050ma3093


1-111

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

10.8 Replacing the ADU pre-regis-tration clutch


• ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3):


B. Procedure



paper feed clutch /BP.")

2. Remove two relay connectors [1].

3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the ADU

lock section [3].


ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) [2].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling the ADU lock section, be

sure to take note of the stopper position of the

the MC3.

[2]

[1][3]

8050ma3094

[2]

[1]

8050ma3095


1-112

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

10.9 Replacing the decurler roller


• Decurler roller: Every 100,000 copies

B. Procedure





3. Remove the paper exit drive belt /1 [1].

4. Remove 3 screws [2] and the screw [3], and the

remove the paper exit guide plate /4 assembly

[4].

Note:

• The screw [2] and the screw [3] are different in

length. Be sure to take note of the position of

the screw [3] when reintalling the assembly.

[2]

[4] [3]

[2]

[1]

8050ma3096


1-113

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the knob

[2].

6. Remove the paper exit mounting plate /F [3] and

the paper exit open/close spring /F [4].

7. Remove two screw [5] and then remove the

bearing [6].


paper exit drive pulley /1 [8] and the pin [9].


paper exit drive gear /4 [11] and the pin [12].

10. Remove the bearing [13], paper exit mounting

plate /R [14], curler /1 [15] and the paper exit

open/close spring /R [16].

11. Slide the bearing [17] to the inside and remove

the decurler [18].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling the paper exit drive pulley /1

[8], be sure to take note of the direction of the

belt guide.

• When the decurler roller is replaced, reset "5.

Parts counter" and "1. Count of special

parts." If not, the fixing jam may occur.

[1][2] [3]

[17][9]

[7][8][10][11][14][15]

[12][13][16]

[4]

[18][5][6][5]

8050ma3097

OTHER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-114

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

11.OTHER

11.1 Installation of the KeyCounter Socket (OPTION)

A. Procedure

1. Remove the Filter Cover.

See 1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2.

2. Remove the Hinge cover and Scanner cover /R.

See 1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main

board unit.

3. Remove the Key Counter Cover from the Scan-

ner cover /R..

4. Remove two screws and the Cover.

5. Use two screws, secure the Key Counter

Socket.

6. Remove dummy connector.

Connect the Key Counter Socket connector.

Note:

• When the Key Counter Socket is mounted, Set

to the Software DIP Switches.

*25mode: DipSW No.4 Bit.4

Key counter removal recovery.

*25mode: DipSW No.9 Bit.3 - 0

Operation at the counter removal.

Key Counter Cover

Scanner cover /R.

4969D510aa

4969D511aa

4969D512aa

4969D513aa

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER

1-115

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

11.2 Installation / Remove of theMemory Unit (OPTION)

Note: Handling

• Precautions against static electricity.

Keep the memory unit in an antistatic bag

while transporting or storing.

Discharge electricity from your body by

touching somewhere metallic portion before

handling, when working on the place where

static electricity tend to generate such as on a

carpet.

• Do not touch the gilded pins of memory unit

directly with hands. Direct touch may cause

malcontinuity.

• Do not give the mechanical shock to the mem-

ory unit by dropping or bending and so on.

A. Procedure

1. Remove the Platen cover to Main Board unit.

See 1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main

board unit.

2. Pull it out toward you to remove it from the main

body.

Note:

• When pulling out the main board assembly, be

careful that the memory board doesn’t touch

the stay.

3. If the HDD-7 is installed, remove it.

4. Memory unit into the memory slots (4 places) of

the Image processing board.

5. To mount the memory unit successfully.

a Insert the memory unit into the memory slot

while being careful to ensure the direction is as

shown in the picture.

b Fit the slot pins into the holes at both ends of

the memory unit, and then push it down so that

the claws at both ends of the slot secure the

memory unit.

6. When demounting the memory unit.

a Release the claws at both ends of the slot.

b Raise the memory unit gently to remove it.


steps in reverse.

4 places

Image processing board (IPB) 4969D514aa

4969D515aa

a

b

4969D516aa

b

a

a

OTHER CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-116

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

Blank page

AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 EXTERIOR

1-117

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LYAFR-20 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

1. EXTERIOR

1.1 RADF hinge opening/clos-ing angle adjustment

A. Replacing 70-degree and 40-degree fixtures

1. Untighten 4 screws [1] and remove 2 hinge

opening/closing angle adjusting fixtures [2].

Fixtures are for 70 or 40-degree use and can be

distinguished by the stamp on them.

2. Install 2 hinge opening/closing angle adjusting

fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [2] positively.

[2]

[1]

df3193001

EXTERIOR AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003

1-118

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

B. Fixing the fixture at 90 degrees

Note:

• When removing RADF or when opening RADF

to remove the scanner components, the fix-

ture should be fixed at an degree of 90°. If not,

the RADF installing metal plate may be

deformed.

1. Fix the hinge opening/closing angle adjusting

fixture at an angle of 90° by either one of the fol-

lowing methods. Two types of fixtures, 70° and

40-degree use, are installed. They can be dis-

tinguished by the mark on them.

70-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjust-

ing fixture: As shown in the drawing right,

untighten 4 screws [1], slide down 2 adjusting

fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [2] positively.


ing fixture: Untighten 4 screws [1], install 2

adjusting fixtures [2] changing their upper and

lower positions and retighten 4 screws [2] posi-

tively.

2. After completion of required process, return

them to the original positions.

[2]

[2] [1][1]

df3193002


1-119

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.2 Removing and reinstallingthe front cover

1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and paper exit

cover [2].

2. Untighten 2 screws [3] and remove the front

cover [4].

3. Install the removed components in the steps

reverse to removal.

[4] [1] [2]

[3][3]

df3193003

EXTERIOR AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003

1-120

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.3 Removing and reinstallingthe rear cover

1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and paper exit

cover [2].

2. Untighten 2 screws [3] and remove the rear

cover [4].

3. Install the removed components in the steps

reverse to removal.

[2]

[1] [3] [4] [3]

df3193004


1-121

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.4 Removing and reinstallingthe registration roller cover

1. Open the paper feed cover [1].

2. Pull up the paper feed tray [2].

3. Unscrew 4 screws [3] and remove the registra-

tion roller cover [4].


steps in reverse.

[2]

[3]

[1][4]

[3]

df3193005

PAPER FEED AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003

1-122

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2. PAPER FEED

2.1 Cleaning the no paper sen-sor

1. Remove the registration roller cover. (See "1.4

Removing and reinstalling the registration roller

cover.")

2. Clean the no paper sensor (PS304) [1] with a

brush, etc. [1]

df3193006

AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 PAPER FEED

1-123

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY



2. Push 2 claw locks [2] at both ends of the paper

feed cover [1] to release and remove the paper

feed guide [3].

[2]

[1] [3]

[2]

df3193007


1-124

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. Untighten 1 screw [1] and remove the shaft fix-

ing plate [2].

4. Remove 2 snap rings [3].

5. Pushing 2 bearings [4] inward, remove the

paper feed unit [5].


steps in reverse.

[1]

[2][5]

[4] [3] [3] [4] df3193008


1-125

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY



• Feed roller: Every 1,800,000 copies (every

625,000 copies for actual durable count)

• Paper feed roller: Every 1,800,000 copies (every


B. Procedure

1. Remove the paper feed unit. (See "1.4 Remov-

ing and reinstalling the paper feed unit.")

2. Remove 1 bearing [1].

3. Remove 1 snap ring [2] and remove 1 pin [3].

4. Remove the gear [4] and remove the belt [5].

5. Remove the black snap ring [6] and remove 1

pin [7] (long pin) and gear [8].

6. Remove the plastic arm [9] and remove 1 pin

[10].

7. Remove 1 snap ring [11] and remove the paper

feed roller assembly [13] from the arm [12].

df3193009

[5] [3] [4] [2] [9] [13]

[6][1] [8] [7] [10] [12] [11]

df3193010


1-126

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

8. Remove 1 snap ring [1].

9. Remove 1 feed roller [2] and replace with new

one.

10. Remove 1 snap ring [3] and remove 1 pin [4].

11. Remove 2 paper feed rollers [5] and replace

with new ones.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be careful not to lose the paper feed roller and

feed roller fixing pins.

[5][1]

[4]

[3][2]

df3193011


1-127

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY



• Double feed prevention roller: Every 1,800,000

copies (every 625,000 copies for actual durable

count)

B. Procedure


2. Release the claw lock of the double feed preven-

tion unit cover [2] and remove the cover.

[2]

[1]

[2]

df3193012


1-128

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. Holding both edges of the roller shaft, stand the

double feed prevention roller [1].

4. Remove the double feed prevention unit [1] and

replace with new one.


steps in reverse.

[1]

df3193013

[1]

df3193014


1-129

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. PAPER FEED

3.1 Cleaning the registrationroller



cover.")

2. Moisten cloth with alcohol and wipe 3 registra-

tion rollers [1] with the cloth. [1]

df3193015


1-130

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3.2 Cleaning the registrationsensor



cover.")

2. Clean PS301 (registration sensor) [1] with a

blower brush, etc. [1]

df3193016


1-131

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3.3 Removing and reinstallingthe conveyance belt

Note:

• Be careful not to touch the belt roller or avoid

damage or crease on it. If touching it by hand,

hold at the area of 20mm from the edges in

the width direction.

1. Fix the hinge opening/closing angle adjusting

fixture at an angle of 90 degrees.

2. Open RADF [1] vertically.

3. Slide 2 stoppers [3] in the upper part of the con-

veyance belt [2] rightward and loosen.

4. Remove the drive interlocking belt [4] on the left

lower inside of the conveyance belt [2].

5. Remove the conveyance belt unit.

Note:

• When reinstalling, fit the drive interlocking

belt to the conveyance belt unit securely.

[3][1] [2][3]

[4] df3193017


1-132

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6. Remove 2 screws [1] and stand the roller.

7. Remove the conveyance belt.


steps in reverse.

[1]

[1]

df3193018

AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003 REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

1-133

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

4.1 Cleaning the paper exitroller/the paper exit sensor

1. Open the paper exit cover [1].

2. Moisten the cloth with alcohol and wipe 4 paper

exit rollers [2] with the cloth.

3. Clean the paper exit sensor (PS306) [3] with a

brush, etc.

4.2 Cleaning the reverse roller

1. Open the paper exit cover [1].

2. Open the reverse guide [2].

3. Moisten the cloth with alcohol and wipe 5

reverse rollers [1] with the cloth.

[2] [1]

[3] df3193019

[2] [1]

df3193020

[1]

df3193021

REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003

1-134

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF

Note:

• Before removing RADF, fix the RADF hinge

opening/closing angle at 90 degrees. Fix the

fixture also at 90 degrees when opening RADF

and removing parts of the scanner section. If

not, RADF installing metal plate may be

deformed.


2. Fix 2 hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fix-

tures [2] at an angle of 90 degrees.

Two types of fixtures, 70 and 40-degree use, are

installed. They can be distinguished by the

mark on them.


ing fixture: Untighten 4 screws [3], slide down 2

adjusting fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [3]

positively.


ing fixture: Untighten 4 screws [3], install 2

adjusting fixtures [2] changing their upper and

lower positions and retighten 4 screws [3] posi-

tively.

3. Open RADF [1] vertically.

4. Remove 3 screws [2] and 2 fixtures [3].

5. Raise and remove RADF [1].


steps in reverse.

Note:

• After installing RADF, perform the 36-mode

"RADF installing position adjustment".

[3] [1] [3]

[2]

df3193023

[3][1][3]

[2][2] df3193024

C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR

1-135

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LYC-208 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

Caution:




1. EXTERIOR

1.1 Removing and reinstallingthe front cover

1. Remove the LCT from the main body.

2. Open the top cover [1], remove 4 screws [2] and

then remove the right side cover [3]. [1]

[3]

[2] lt2113004

EXTERIOR C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-136

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. Open the front door [1] and remove 3 screws [2]

provided on the side inside the door.

4. Remove a screw [3] on the upper face.

5. Remove 2 screws [4] on the right side and then

remove the front cover [5].

[1]

[3]

[5]

[4]

[2]

lt2113005

C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 EXTERIOR

1-137

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.2 Removing and reinstallingthe clutch replacement coverand the rear cover

1. Remove the right side cover.


clutch replacement cover [2].

3. Remove 12 screws [1] and then remove the rear

cover [2].


steps in reverse.

[2]

[1]

[1] lt2113007

[1][2]

[1]

[1]

[1]

lt2113008

EXTERIOR C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-138

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.3 Removing and reinstallingthe paper feed pick-up cover


2. Open the top cover [1].

3. Remove the spring [3] from the paper feed unit

[2].


5. Pull out the paper feed pick-up cover /B [5] to

the right side and remove it.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Be sure to fit the spring that connects the top

cover to the paper supply unit without fail.

[3][4]

[1]

[4]

[5]

[2]

lt2113009

C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PAPER FEED

1-139

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2. PAPER FEED

2.1 Cleaning the paper dustremoving brush


2. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B.

3. Close the top cover [1].

4. Clean the paper dust removing brush [2] with

the blower brush.


steps in reverse.

Note:



[1]

[2] lt2113010

PAPER FEED C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-140

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY





4. Slide 2 bearings [2] to the outside and remove

the paper feed unit [3].


steps in reverse.

Note:



[2] [3] [2] [1]

[1] lt2113011


1-141

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY



• Paper feed roller: Every 600,000 copies (Every


• Feed roller: Every 600,000 copies (Every


B. Procedure



3. Remove the paper feed unit [1].

4. Remove the bearing [1].

5. Remove 2 stop rings [2] and then remove the

arm [3].

6. Remove the holder plate [4].

7. Remove a stop ring [5].

8. Remove the feed roller [6] and replace it with a

new one.

9. Remove the paper feed roller [7] and replace it

with a new one.


steps in reverse.

[1] lt2113012

[6]

[7] [4][5][3][2][1]

lt2113013


1-142

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY



• Double feed prevention roller: Every 600,000

copies (Every 500,000 copies in actual replace-

ment count)

B. Procedure

Note:

• Be sure to lower the up/down plate to its lower

most position in advance by pressing the tray

down switch (SW100) with electricity sup-

plied.



3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the pro-

tective cover [3].

4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the dou-

ble feed prevention unit [2].

[1]

[2][3] lt2113014

[1][2] lt2113015


1-143

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY


6. With the "D" cuts [2] of the shaft and the fixture

attached together, remove the double feed pre-

vention roller [3].

7. Remove the double feed prevention roller rubber

[2] from the shaft [1] and replace it with a new

one.


steps in reverse.

Note:


roller rubber [2] so that the paint mark [3]

turns in the arrow-marked direction.

• Be sure to check to see if the PET sheet for

the drive gear cover is not damaged.

• Be sure to check that the double feed preven-

tion roller is not smeared with grease.

[1]

[2]

[1] [3]

lt2113016

[2]

[1]

[3]

lt2113017


1-144

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2.5 Replacing the paper feedclutch and the pre-registra-tion clutch


• Paper feed clutch (MC101): Every 2,500,000

copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in actural

replacement count)

• Pre-registration clutch (MC102): Every

2,500,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in

actural replacement count)

B. Procedure




clutch replacement cover [3].



6. Remove 2 clutches [3] and replace them with

new ones.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling them, be sure to check that

a stopper for each clutch is in its specified

position.

[3]

[2] [1]

[2] lt2113018

[2]

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[3]

lt2113019

C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRAY UP/DOWN

1-145

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. TRAY UP/DOWN

3.1 Removing and reinstallingthe rear drive

A. Removing the cover

Note:




plied.


2. Remove the right side cover and the front cover.

3. Remove the clutch replacement cover and the

rear cover.

B. Removing the paper feed drive

1. Remove 9 connectors [1] provided on the rear

left side.

2. Remove the paper feed clutch (MC101) and the

pre-registration clutch (MC102) [1]. See ("2.5

Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-

registration clutch").


[1]

[1]

[1] lt2113020

[1][2]

lt2113021

TRAY UP/DOWN C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-146

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Remove 6 screws [1], remove then a bearing [2]

and the LCT drive unit [3].

5. Remove 2 connectors [4] provided on the back

of the LCT drive unit [3] and then remove the

LCT drive unit [3].

C. Removing the up/down drive

1. Remove 6 connectors [1] provided on the lower

back side.

[3] [2] [1]

[1]

[4]

lt2113022

[1]

[1]

lt2113023


1-147

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY



4. Remove 2 bearing [3] and then remove the

guide plate [4].

5. Remove the gear [1].

Note:

• When reinstalling this gear, be sure to make

the positioning adjustments of the remaining

paper detection gear at this step. For posi-

tioning adjustments, see "D. Reinstalling the

rear drive."

6. Remove an E-ring [2] and a pin [3] and then

remove the gear [4].

7. Remove an E-ring [1], and then remove a bear-

ing [2], the gear [3] and a bearing [4].

8. Remove an E-ring [5] and then remove the gear

[6] and a pin [7].

[2]

[2] [3][1] [4]

lt2113024

[3] [2][4][1] lt2113025

[2]

[3]

[1]

[4]

[5] [6][7] lt2113026


1-148

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9. Remove an E-ring [1] and then remove a bear-

ing [2].

10. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the up/

down motor unit [2].

[1][2] lt2113027

[1]

[1][2]

[1] lt2113028


1-149

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

D. Reinstalling the rear drive

Note:

• Reinstall the rear drive following the removal

steps in reverse, but be sure to make position-

ing adjustments of the remaining paper detec-

tion gear at "C. Removing the up/down drive."

1. Conduct in reverse the steps 10 to 6 of "C.

Removing the up/down drive."

2. With the up/down plate at its lower most posi-

tion, stop the actuator of the remaining paper

detection gear [1] at the position where it

detects the remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105)

[2] and install the gear [3].

3. Conduct in reverse the steps 1 of "C. Removing

the up/down drive."

lt2113030[1]

[2]

[3]

[2]

lt2113031


1-150

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3.2 Removing and reinstallingthe up/down wire

A. Wire length:

• Up/down wire /A: 1450mm (4 wires)

• Assist wire /C: 1240mm

• Assist wire /D: 820mm

B. Removing the wire

Note:




plied.


2. Remove the right side cover, front cover, clutch

replacement cover, and the rear cover.

3. Remove the rear drive.

4. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [1] clockwise as

seen from the rear side to lift the up/down plate

[2] up to its upper most position.

Note:

• When the springs [3] and [4] are removed in

the succeeding steps, the up/down plate [2]

comes down. For this reason, be sure to sup-

port the up/down plate [2] by hands. (This

work requires two persons.)

5. Remove the spring [3] and then remove the

assist wire /C [5] from the guide pulleys [6] and

[7].

6. After releasing the winding of the assist wire /C

[5] around the drive pulley [8], remove the E-ring

[9] and then remove the drive pulley [8].

7. Remove the assist wire /C [5] from the up/down

drive shaft [1].

8. Remove the spring [4] and then remove the

assist wire /D [10] from the guide pulleys [11],

[12] and [13].

9. After releasing the winding of the assist wire /D

[10] around the drive pulley [14], remove the E-

ring [15] and then remove the drive pulley [14].

10. Remove the assist wire /D [10] from the up/

down drive shaft [1].

11. Bring down the up/drive plate [2].

[2]

[3]

[7]

[6]

[12]

[1]

[1]

[5]

[1][8]

[5]

[15]

[14]

[10]

[13]

[9]

[10]

[4][11]

lt2113032


1-151

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY


drive pulley [3] while releasing the winding of the

up/down wire /A [2].

13. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the up/


14. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the guide

pulleys [5], [6] and [7].

Note:

• When removing the up/down wire /A [2]

installed onto the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7],

be sure to pull out the wire from a notch [8]

provided on the side of each pulley to move

the wire cover [9] of each pulley to the loca-

tion where the notch [8] can be avoided.

15. Remove a screw [10] and then remove the up/

down wire protective cover [11].

16. Pull out the up/down wire /A [2] from the upper

surface [12] of the LCT main body to remove it.

[3]

[10][11]

[12]

[6]

[7]

[5]

[2]

[2]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[4]

[1]

[9]

[8][2]

[9][8]

[2]

lt2113034


1-152

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY


drive pulley [3] while releasing the winding of the

up/down wire /A [2].

18. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the up/


19. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the guide

pulleys [5], [6] and [7].

Note:

• When removing the up/down wire /A [2]

installed onto the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7],

be sure to pull out the wire from a notch [8]

provided on the side of each pulley to move

the wire cover [9] of each pulley to the loca-

tion where the notch [8] can be avoided.

20. Remove a screw [10] and then remove the up/

down wire protective cover [11].

21. Pull out the up/down wire /A [2] from the upper

surface [12] of the LCT main body to remove it.

22. In the same manner as Steps 12 to 16, remove

the up/down wire /A [1] on the rear side.

23. In the same manner as Steps 17 to 21, remove


[9][8]

[2]

[10][11]

[12][2]

[9]

[8]

[2]

[6]

[4]

[2][3]

[3]

[1]

[5][2]

[7]

[4]

lt2113035

[1]

[2]

lt2113037


1-153

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

C. Reinstalling the wire

1. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the hole [1]

provided on the upper surface of the LCT main

body.

2. Reinstall the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide

pulleys [3], [4] and [5] in this order.

Note:

• When reinstalling the up/down wire /A [2] onto

the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5], be sure to

insert the wire into the pulley through the

notch [6] provided on the side of each pulley

and then move the wire cover [7] of each pul-

ley to the wire that has been already inserted.

When moving the wire cover [7], move it first

to the position where the notch [6] can be

avoided and then move the wire in the notch

[6] into each pulley.

3. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the wire

installation hole [9] provided inside the up/down

drive shaft [8].

Note:

• The up/down drive shaft [8] is provided with 3

wire installation holes each on the front side

and the rear side. In this step, the inner-most

wire installation hole is used.

4. Insert the drive pulley [10] into the up/down

drive shaft [8] so that the notch [11] of the drive

pulley [10] comes to the position in which the up/

down wire /A [2] is put.

5. Fit the E-ring [12] and fasten the drive pulley

[10].

[2][11]

[10]

[12]

[8]

[9]

[4]

[8]

[10]

[5][2]

[3]

[2]

[1]

lt2113039

[7]

[6][2]

[7][6]

[2]


1-154

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the hole [1]

provided on the upper surface of the LCT main

body.

7. Reinstall the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide

pulleys [3], [4] and [5] in this order.

Note:

• When reinstalling the up/down wire /A [2] onto

the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5], be sure to

insert the wire into the pulley through the

notch [6] provided on the side of each pulley

and then move the wire cover [7] of each pul-

ley to the wire that has been already inserted.

When moving the wire cover [7], move it first

to the position where the notch [6] can be

avoided and then move the wire in the notch

[6] into each pulley.

8. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the wire

installation hole [9] provided at the middle of the

up/down drive shaft [8].

Note:



and the rear side. In this step, the wire instal-

lation hole at the middle is to be used. Since

the inner-most wire installation hole has been

already used, however, only two wire installa-

tion holes can be confirmed for this steps. As

a result, the one near to the drive pulley that

has been already installed is the wire installa-

tion hole [9] at the middle.

9. Insert the drive pulley [10] into the up/down pul-

ley shaft [8] so that the notch [11] of the drive

pulley [10] comes to the position into which the

up/down wire /A [2] is put.

10. Fit the E-ring [12] to fasten the drive pulley [10].

[2]

[1]

[7]

[6][2]

[7][6]

[2]

[10] [11]

[12]

[10]

[4]

[3]

[5][2]

[8]

lt2113040

[2]

[8][9]


1-155

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

11. In the same manner as Steps 1 to 5, reinstall the

up/down wire /A [1] on the rear side.

12. In the same manner as Steps 17 to 21, reinstall


13. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [1] clockwise as

seen from the rear side to lift the up/down plate

[2] up to its upper most position.

Note:

• Be sure to wind up the up/down wire /A form

inside to outside in each drive pulley.

• The up/down plate [2] comes down by its own

weight if the installation of the assist wire /C

[3] and the assist wire /D [4] have not been

completed. For this reason, be sure to sup-

port the up/down plate [2] by hands until the

installation of Step 23 is completed. (This

work requires two persons.)

14. Insert the assist wire /C [3] into the wire installa-

tion hole [5] provided outside the up/down drive

shaft [1].

Note:



and the rear side. However, since the wire

installation holes on the inside and at the mid-

dle have been already used, only the wire

installation hole on the outside can be con-

firmed for this steps.

15. Insert the drive pulley [6] into the up/down drive

shaft [1] so that the notch [7] of the drive pulley

[6] comes to the position into which the assist

wire /C [3] is put.

[1]

[2]

lt2113041

[3] [4]

[9] [17]

[2]

[9]

[7]

[8]

[15]

[1]

[1]

[3]

[1][6]

[7]

[5]

[3]

[18]

[12][11]

[13][4]

[14]

[10]

[4]

[17]

[16]

lt2113043


1-156

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

16. Wind the assist wire /C [3] around the drive pul-

ley [6] one turn counterclockwise as seen from

the front side.

Note:

• Be sure to wind the assist wire /C [3] from

inside to outside in the drive pulley [6].

17. Reinstall the assist wire /C [3] onto the guide

pulleys [7] and [8] in this order and then fasten

them with the springs [9].

Note:


spring [9] when reinstalling it.


19. Insert the assist wire /D [4] into the wire installa-

tion hole [11] provided outside the up/down

drive shaft [1].

20. Insert the drive pulley [12] into the up/down

drive pulley [1] so that the notch [13] of the drive

pulley [12] comes to the position into which the

assist wire /D [4] is put.

21. Wind the assist wire /D [4] around the drive pul-

ley [12] one turn clockwise as seen from the rear

side.

Note:

• Be sure to wind the assist wire /D [4] from

inside to outside in the drive pulley [12].

22. Reinstall the assist wire /D [4] onto the guide

pulleys [14], [15] and [16] in this order and then

fasten them with the spring [17].

Note:


spring [17] when reinstalling it.


[3] [4]

[9] [17]

[2]

[9]

[7]

[8]

[15]

[1]

[1]

[3]

[1][6]

[7]

[5]

[3]

[18]

[12][11]

[13][4]

[14]

[10]

[4]

[17]

[16]

lt2113046

Note:

• The up/down drive shaft [1] is provided

with 3 wire installation holes each on the

front side and the rear side. However, since

the wire installation holes on the inside

and at the middle have been already used,

only the wire installation hole on the out-

side can be confirmed for this steps.


1-157

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

24. Reinstall 4 up/down wire protective covers [2]

with a screw [1] for each.

25. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [3] counterclock-

wise as seen from the rear side to bring down

the up/down plate [4].

26. Reinstall the rear drive.

27. Reinstall the rear cover, clutch replacement

cover, front cover and the right side cover.

[1] [2][1]

[2]

lt2113045

[4]

[3]


1-158

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

Blank page

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-159

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LYFN-9/FN120 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

Caution:




1. EXTERIOR

1.1 Removing and reinstalling ofthe booklet tray (FN-9 only)

A. Procedure

1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the

booklet tray [2].


steps in reverse.

[1]

[2]

fs2153001

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-160

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.2 Removing and reinstalling ofthe top cover /1

A. Procedure


2. Open the finisher door [2] and remove 5 screws

[3]. And then remove the top cover /1 [4].


steps in reverse.

1.3 Removing and reinstalling ofthe top cover /2

Note:

• When an optional PI has been installed, be

sure to remove it.

A. Procedure

1. Remove the top cover /1.

2. Open the finisher door [1].

3. After removing 2 screws [2], pull out the sub-tray

[3] and remove the top cover /2 [4].


steps in reverse.

[3]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

fs2153002

[4][3]

[1]

[2] fs2153003

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-161

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.4 Removing and reinstalling ofthe side cover

A. Procedure

1. Open the finisher door.

2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the side

cover [2].


steps in reverse.

1.5 Removing and reinstalling ofthe finisher door

A. Procedure

1. Open the finisher door [1].

2. Remove 2 screws [3] from the lower hinge [2]

and remove the finisher door [1].


steps in reverse.

[1]

[2] fs2153004

[1]

[3]

[2]

fs2153005

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-162

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.6 Removing and reinstalling ofthe rear cover

A. Procedure

1. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the rear

cover [2].


steps in reverse.

[2]

[1]

fs2153006

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-163

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.7 Removing and reinstalling ofthe main tray

Caution:

• After you have lowered the main tray, be sure

to unplug the power cord of the main body

from the power outlet.

A. Procedure

1. Push up the actuator [1] of the tray upper limit

sensor (PS702) with your finger, and lower the

main tray [2].

2. Turn off the main switch (SW2) of the main body

and unplug the power cord from the power out-

let.


4. With the main tray [2] raised up, unhook the up/

down stay [3] and remove the main tray [2].


steps in reverse.

[1]

[2]

fs2153007

[2]

[3]

[1]

fs2153008

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-164

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.8 Removing and reinstalling ofthe main paper exit openingcover

A. Procedure

1. Remove the following parts:

• Top cover /1, or an optional PI-installed machine

(PI)

• Top cover /2

• Side cover

• Rear cover

• Main tray

2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main

paper exit opening cover [2].


steps in reverse.

1.9 Removing and reinstalling ofthe booklet paper exit open-ing cover (FN-9 only)

A. Procedure

1. Remove the booklet tray.

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the book-

let paper exit opening cover [2].


steps in reverse.

[2]

[1]

fs2153009

[2]

[1]

fs2153010

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-165

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2. CONVEYANCE

2.1 Replacing the paper exitroller /A (sponge roller)

Caution:

• After you have lowered the main tray, be sure

to unplug the power cord of the main body



• Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller): Every

250,000 copies.

Note:

• When replacing the sponge rollers, all of the 5

pairs (10 components) must be replaced.

B. Procedure

1. Push up the actuator [1] of the tray upper limit

sensor (PS702) with your finger, and lower the

main tray [2].

2. Turn off the main switch (SW2) of the main body

and unplug the power cord of the main body


[1]

[2] fs2153011

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-166

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. With a driver inserted into the groove of the

sponge roller [1], prize it open to remove the

sponge roller.

4. With a new sponge roller and the shaft put

together at their respective concave sections [1],

install the sponge roller securely to the shaft by

pressing it down until a click sound is heard.


steps in reverse.

fs2153012

[1]

[1]

[1]

fs2153013

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-167

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2.2 Replacing the intermediateconveyance roller (spongeroller)


• Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller):

Every 250,000 copies.

Note:

• When replacing the intermediate conveyance

rollers, all of the 2 pairs (4 components) must

be replaced.

B. Procedure


2. Remove 2 screws [1] and a bearing [2], and

then remove the intermediate conveyance roller

[3].

3. With a driver inserted into the groove of the

sponge roller [1], prize it open to remove the

sponge roller.

[3]

[1]

[2]

fs2153014

[1]

fs2153015

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-168

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. With a new sponge roller and the shaft put

together at their respective concave sections [1],

install the sponge roller securely to the shaft by

pressing it down until a click sound is heard.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling, be sure to insert the pin at

the rear of the intermediate conveyance roller

securely into the receiving groove.

2.3 Removing and reinstalling ofthe paper exit opening unit

A. Procedure


• Top cover /1, or an optional PI-installed machine

(PI)

• Top cover /2

• Side cover

• Rear cover

• Main tray

• Main paper exit opening cover

2. Remove a screw [3] of the paper exit open/close

link [2] of the paper exit opening unit [1].

[1]

[1]

fs2153016

[2]

[1] [3]

fs2153017

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-169

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. Remove 3 clamp screws [1], a ground screw [2],

the paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) con-

nector [3] and the main tray paper exit sensor

(PS706) connector [4].

4. Remove E-rings [1] and bearings [2], two each,

provided at front and rear, and then remove the

paper exit opening unit [3].


steps in reverse.

[2]

[4]

[3]

[1]

fs2153018

[1]

[1]

[3]

[2]

[2]

fs2153019

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-170

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. MAIN TRAY

3.1 Replacing the tray up/downmotor

Caution:

• When removing the tray up/down motor, be

sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from

falling.


• Tray up/down motor (M703): Every 2,500,000

copies

B. Procedure

1. Remove the rear cover.

2. After removing a connector [1], remove 2 screws

[3] while supporting the main tray [2] with your

hand, and then remove the tray up/down motor

(M703) [4].


steps in reverse.

fs2153020

[3]

[1]

[4]

[2]

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-171

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3.2 Removing and reinstalling ofthe up/down wire

Caution:

• When removing the tray up/down motor, be

sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from

falling.

Note:

• The wire replacement steps shown below

refer to those taken on the rear side. The

shape and the winding of wire on the front

side are symmetrically the same as those on

the rear side.

• The wire brackets of the up/down wire is

stamped with "F" for the front side and "R" for

the rear side. When reinstalling, be careful not

to mix up the front with the rear.

A. Procedure


• Side cover

• Finisher door

• Rear cover

• Tray up/down motor (M703)

• Main tray

2. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the up/

down gear cover [2] and the gear [3].

fs2153021

[3]

[2]

[1]

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-172

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

3. After removing 2 screws [1], remove the wire

bracket [3] of the up/down wire [2] on the rear

side from the up/down stay [4].

4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].

5. Remove an E-ring [1], the gear [2] and the up/

down pulley /L [3], and then remove the up/down

wire [4].

Note:

• When removing the up/down pulley /L, be

careful not to drop the pins [5]. Otherwise,

they may get lost.

fs2153022

[1]

[4][3]

[2]

fs2153023

[2]

[1]

[1] [2]

[4]

[5][3]

fs2153024

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-173

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6. Fasten the wire bracket [1] tentatively to the up/

down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].

Note:

• Be sure to set the up/down wire [4] with the

shorter section [5] up and the longer section

[6] down.

7. With a new up/down wire fastened to the wire

end [2] of the up/down pulley /L [1], wind the

wire a little less than 5 turns from inside toward

outside around the pulley without getting loos-

ened and set the up/down pulley /L [1] to the

shaft so that it is in tune with the pin [3].

8. After putting the up/down wire on the up/down

pulley /U [1], wind it 2 turns from inside toward

outside around the up/down pulley /L [2] without

getting loosened and fasten it to the wire end

[3].

fs2153025[5]

[1]

[3]

[2][6]

[4]

fs2153026

[2]

[1][3]

fs2153027

[1]

[3]

[2]

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-174

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9. Set the pin [1] and the gear [2] to the shaft and

fasten it with the E-ring [3].

10. Using a tension gauge or spring balance, pull

the belt tensioner [1] to the specified force "A"

and tighten it with 2 screws [2].

Specified value: A = 2.5 ± 0.25 kg

11. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on

the front side. Press down the up/down stay [3]

to make it level, and tighten screws [5] of the

wire bracket [4] on the rear side and screws (4

screws in all).

Note:

• Be sure to check if the up/down stay [3] is

level. If it is out of the level, an undesirable

load may be imposed on the tray up/down

motor (M703) or the gear, causing damage to

it.


steps in reverse.

fs2153028

[1][2]

[3]

fs2153029[1]

[2]

fs2153030

[3]

[1]

[2]

[5][4]

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-175

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. STACKER

4.1 Replacing the stackingassist roller


• Stacking assist roller: Every 400,000 copies

B. Procedure


2. Pull out the stacker unit.

3. Open the stacking assist section [1] and lift up

the stacking assist roller [2].

4. Remove the stop ring [3], and then remove the

stacking assist roller [2].


steps in reverse.

4.2 Removing and reinstalling ofthe stacker unit cover

A. Procedure



stacker unit cover [2].


steps in reverse.

[1]

[2][3]

fs2153031

[1]

[2]

fs2153032

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-176

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4.3 Removing and reinstalling ofthe stacker unit

Caution:

• We recommend that at least two people per-

form this service.

• Be careful when you detach the FNS from the

main body. If you pull out the stacker unit, the

FNS may fall. This may cause injury.

A. Procedure


• Booklet tray

• Side cover

• Finisher door

• Rear cover

2. Detach the FNS from the main body.


4. Remove 3 connectors [1] (CN1, CN2, CN3) from

the relay board (RB) [2].

(For FS-115, two connectors (CN1, CN2) are

provided.)

5. Remove each cable from the wiring harness

guide.

[1]

[2]

fs2153033

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-177

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

6. After removing an E-ring [1] and the shaft [2],

detach the connecting arm [3].

7. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [1] and pull out

the stacker unit [2].

Note:

• To prevent the FNS from falling down, be sure

to put a support [3] under the stacker unit.

[1]

[3]

[2]

fs2153034

[3]

[2]

[1]

[1]

fs2153035

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-178

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

8. Remove 2 screws [1] and raise the stacker unit

[2] to remove the guide rail [3].

Caution:

• When removing the guide rail, be careful not

to hurt your hip by taking an appropriate pos-

ture.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• When reinstalling the stacker unit [2] to the

guide rail [3], be sure to check to see if the

hook [4] is set securely into the fitting hole [5].

fs2153036

[2]

[1]

[5]

[4][3]

[1]

[3]

[4]

[5]

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-179

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. STAPLER

5.1 Removing and reinstalling ofthe stapler unit cover

Caution:

• Be careful when you detach the FNS from the

main body. If you pull out the stacker unit, the

FNS may fall. This may cause injury.

A. Procedure


2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].

3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [1] and pull out

the stacker unit [2].

Note:

• To prevent the FNS from falling down, be sure

to put a support [3] under the stacker unit.

fs2153037[1]

[1]

[1]

[3]

[2]

fs2153038

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-180

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the sta-

pler unit cover [2].


steps in reverse.

5.2 Replacing the clincher

Note:

• Do not use hands to move clincher units to

horizontal direction.

Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth skipping

may occur.

• After reinstalling the clincher, be sure to con-

duct the "vertical adjustment of the FNS sta-

pler." (See "ADJUSTMENT.")


• Clincher: Every 200,000 staples

B. Procedure


2. Pull out the stacker unit and remove the stapler

unit cover.

3. Remove a ground screw [1], and then remove

the ground [2] and the clamp [3].

4. After removing 4 screws [4], remove the clincher

/F [5] and then remove the connector [6].

[2]

[1]

fs2153039

[3] [2][1]

[4]

[5]

[6]

fs2153040

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-181

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. Remove 4 screws [2] of the clincher /R [1] and

the ground [3].

6. After removing 2 screws [1] and the ball bearing

spring mounting bracket [2], rotate the clincher /

R [3] to the position in which it can be easily

taken out, and then remove the connector [4].

Note:

• Be careful not to lose the bearing spring [5]

and the ball.


steps in reverse.

fs2153041

[1]

[2]

[3]

[3]

[4]

[1]

[2]

[5]

fs2153042

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-182

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5.3 Replacing the stapler


• Stapler: Every 200,000 staples

Note:

• Do not use hands to move stapler units to

horizontal direction.

Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth skipping

may occur.

• After reinstalling the clincher, be sure to con-

duct the "vertical adjustment of the FNS sta-

pler." (See "ADJUSTMENT.")

B. Procedure



3. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.

4. After removing 4 screws [2] of the stapler /F [1]

and a ground screw [3], take out the stapler /F

[1] and remove the connector [4].

[2]

[1]

[2]

[4][3] fs2153043

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-183

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. After removing 2 screws [3] of the sensor cover

[2] of the stapler /F [1] and 3 clamps [4], remove

a ground screw [5] and the connector [6].

Note:

• When reinstalling the sensor cover [2], be

careful that the wiring harness does not inter-

fere with the stapler rotation HP sensor

(PS713) [7] or get caught by the gear.

6. After removing 4 screws [1], take out the stapler

/R [2] and remove the connector [3].

Note:

• When taking out the stapler /R [2], be careful

not to damage PS713 [4].


steps in reverse.

fs2153044

[1]

[2][4]

[3] [5] [7]

[6]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[4]

[1]

fs2153045

FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-184

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

Blank page

PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PUNCH SECTION

1-185

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LYPK-5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

Caution:




1. PUNCH SECTION

Note:

• The following screws should not be removed.

If you do, punching cannot be done as

designed.

1.1 Replacing the Punch unitA. Procedure

1. Remove cap on the top cover.

Punch unit

Screws that should not be removed

Punch scraps box

PUNCH SECTION PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-186

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2. Remove the punch drive board cover by remov-

ing one screw.

3. Disconnect two connectors (CN65, 68) and one

relay connector (CN531) from the punch drive

board (PKDB).

Screw

punch drive board cover

Connector (CN68)

Punch drive board (PKDB)

Relay connector (CN531)

Connector (CN65)

PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PUNCH SECTION

1-187

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Remove three screws to remove the punch unit

cover.

5. Disconnect two connectors (CN158, 505).

6. Remove the punch unit from FNS by removing

four screws.


steps in reverse

Screws

punch unit cover

21 1

16 5

3

1. Screws2. Punch unit3. Connector (CN505)4. Connector (CN158)5. Punch shift motor (M802)6. Punch shift HP PS (PS803)

PUNCH SECTION PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-188

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

1.2 Cleaning the Punch Edgesand Punch Scraps Full PS(PS802)

A. Procedure

1. Remove the punch unit.

2. Use a blower brush to remove paper dust and

punch scraps from the punch edges and punch

scraps full PS (PS802).


steps in reverse

Punch edges

Punch scraps full PS (PS802)

Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 External Section

1-189

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LYCover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

Caution:




1. External Section

1.1 Removing / Re-installing theExternal covers

A. Procedure

1. Remove cap on the top cover.

2. Remove four screws to detach the top cover.

3. Remove one screw to detach the connector

cover.

4. Remove three screws to detach the lower cover.

Top cover

Screws

Cap

Lower cover

Connecting coverScrew

Screws

External Section Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-190

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

5. Remove two screws, disconnect the relay con-

nector (CN232), and detach the operation panel

cover.


steps in reverse.

Screw

Operation panel cover

ScrewRelay connector (CN232)

Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Paper feed unit

1-191

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

2. Paper feed unit

2.1 Replacing the Paper feedroller and Feed roller

A. Procedure

1. When replacing the paper feed roller and feed

roller for the upper tray, detach the top cover.

2. Remove the two stop rings, then shift the left

and right bearings outside, and remove the feed

roller unit.

3. Remove actuator, three stop rings, three bear-

ings of the feed roller unit, then slide the roller

shaft in the direction of the allow to remove each

roller.

Paper feed roller unit

Stopring

Bearing Stop ring

Bearing

Feed roller

Feed roller

Stop ring

Stoprings

Bearing

Bearing

Rubber

Rubber

Paint mark

Feed drive belt

Actuator

Paper feed unit Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-192

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. When replacing the paper feed roller and feed

roller for the lower tray, open the upper tray and

perform the steps 2 and 3.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Ensure that the mounting direction of each

roller and rubber is correct.

2.2 Replacing the Double feedprevent roller and Torquelimiter

A. Procedure

1. When replacing the double feed prevent roller

and the torque limiter for the upper tray, detach

the top cover.

2. Detach the paper feed roller unit.

3. Release the hooks on both sides, remove the

double feed prevention roller assembly by lifting

up, then pull out the shaft, and remove the dou-

ble-feed-prevention roller together with the feed-

reverse gear.

4. Separate the double feed prevention roller and

the torque limiter from the double feed preven-

tion roller assembly.

5. When replacing the double feed prevention

roller and the torque limiter for the lower tray,

open the upper unit and perform the steps 2 and

3.


steps in reverse.

Note:

• Ensure that the mounting direction of each

roller and rubber is correct.

Top coverRelease lever

Double-feed prevention roller

Hooks

Double feed prevention rollerStop rings

Torque limiter

Notch

TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRIMMER

1-193

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LYTMG-3 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

Caution:




• Trimming knives (upper and lower) are used

in this machine. Be extremely careful in han-

dling these knives to avoid injuries.

1. TRIMMER

1.1 Replacing the trimmer knife /U and trimmer knife /L


• Trimmer knife /U: Every 4,000,000 copies (Every


• Trimmer knife /L: Every 4,000,000 copies (Every


B. Procedure

1. Open the front door [1] and conveyance door [2].

2. Untighten 4 fixing screws [3] and remove the top

plate [4].

3. Untighten 1 nylon clamp screw fixing the power

cord and remove the power plug.

[4]

[2][1]

[3]

tu1093001

TRIMMER TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-194

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

4. Untighten 4 fixing screws [1] and 3 fixing screws

[2] and remove the rear cover [3].

5. Untighten 3 fixing screws [1] and remove the

roller cover [2].

6. Disconnect 1 relay connector [3] and remove the

wiring harness [5] from the cable clamp [4].

7. Untighten 2 front and rear fixing screws [6]

respectively and remove the entrance convey-

ance roller unit [7].

8. Remove 1 front and rear E-ring [1] and bearing

[2] respectively and remove the trimmer

entrance driven roller [3].

[2]

[3][1] tu1093002

[3] [4]

[5]

[6]

[2]

[7][1][6] tu1093003

[3]

[1] [2]tu1093004

TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TRIMMER

1-195

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

9. Remove 4 hexagon socket head bolts [1] and

remove the trimmer knife /U [3] holding the

replacing handle [2] at 2 positions.

Note:

• When removing the trimmer knife /U [3], be

sure to hold the replacing handle [2]. Never

touch the knife blade.

• Be careful not to drop the trimmer knife /U or

hit it against some object; its edge may be

nicked.

10. After pulling down the conveyance guide plate

[1], insert a screw (M4 x 16 or more) or the like

[2] into the stopper hole [3] to avoid the convey-

ance guide plate [1] from returning to the origi-

nal position.

Note:

• Do not remove 2 screws [4] and 1 screw [5]

that should not be removed.

[1]

[2]

[3] tu1093005

tu1093006[3]

[1]

[2]

[4]

[5]

TRIMMER TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

1-196

I D

IS./

AS

SE

MB

LY

11. Remove 4 hexagon socket head bolts [1] and

remove the trimmer knife /L [2] holding the front

fixture [3] and inner corner [4].

Note:

• Never touch the blade of the trimmer knife /L

[2].

• Be careful not to drop the trimmer knife /L or

hit it against some hard object; its edge may

be nicked.

• When installing, align the bottom of the trim-

mer knife /L [2] with the hexagon socket head

bolt [5] and insert into the guide pin [6].


steps in reverse.

[5]

[3]

[6]

[1]

[2] [4]

tu1093007

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION

2-1

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

II ADJUSTMENT

1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION

1.1 Composition

This part "Adjustment" describes items to be

adjusted and their method of adjustment that are

required by this machine and gives detailed expla-

nations.

A. Checking before starting work

When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary

to check in advance the following:

1. Are the power source and voltage secured in

accordance with the specifications?

2. Is the power source properly grounded?

3. Is any equipment that consumes repeatedly a

lot of electricity connected to the same power

source? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as

elevator and air conditioner)

4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the

machine?

• High temperature and high humidity, direct sun-light, ventilation, etc.

• Levelness of the location on which the machineis installed.

5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original

itself?

6. Is density selected properly?

7. Is the original glass stained?

8. Is proper paper used for copy?

9. Are copy materials replaced with new ones at

their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning blade,

etc.)

10. Is toner filled?

B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site ser-

vice

Due attention should be paid to the following when

repairing the machine.

1. In this machine, when the reset switch (SW1) is

turned off, only one side of the AC line is shut

off. So, be sure to unplug the power cord from

the power outlet. Also, when operating the

machine with the power supplied, be careful of

the scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to

get caught by the gear.

2. The fixing section may be very hot. Be careful

not to get burnt when handling it.

3. The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be

careful not to bring a watch and instrument near

to the unit.

4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.

5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare

hands.

2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS

Adjustments and setting are required when there

occurs a claim for poor image quality. However,

these adjustments (including checking) and setting

are also required when a part is replaced with a new

one.

[How to use the tables]

Each item represents the following:

1. Mode

Shows which mode is used for adjustments.

"25": 25 mode

"36": 36 mode

"47": 47 mode

2. A circle " " in the table

, ................. : Shows that the order of

priority has been speci-

fied for adjustments

(including checking) and

setting.

(Empty circle) : Shows that adjustments

(including checking) and

setting can be done

independently.

LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

2-2

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

• This table shows the list of adjustment itemswhen replacing a part. Items are numbered in" " by the priority if there is any.

*1 After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first performedthe L detection adjustment.

*2 When replacing memory board (MB), be sure to replace the developer, 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K,and fixing cleaning unit.

*3 When adjust the belt line speed adjustment, be sure to adjust the fixing line speed adjustment.

Adjustment items

Replacement parts

Mod

e

Dru

m c

artr

idge

(dr

um)

/Y, M

, C, K

PM countPM counter resetting

25

PM cycle set

Parts counter Count of special parts

1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, KFixing cleaning unitDeveloper /Y, M, C, KDecurler roller

ISWBoard change mode

Process adjust-ment Drum peculiarity adjustment

Blade setting mode

36

LD bias adjustmentAutomatic gamma adjustment (0) 4Automatic developer chargeL detection initial auto. adjustmentInitial drum rotation 1

Image adjustment

Magnification adjustment

Printer vertical mag. adjustmentPrinter horizontal mag. adjustmentBelt line speed adjustmentFixing line speed adjustment

Timing adjustment

Printer lead edge timing adj.Writing unit skew initial adj.Auto. color registration adj. 2Color registration manual adjustment 3

Image quality adjustment

Scanner gamma adjustment

Printer gamma adjustmentPrinter gamma offset adj.Printer gamma sensor adj.Printer screen gradation adj.

Sharpness adjustment

Image judge adjustmentDot detect adjustmentColor text adjustment

ACS adjustmentOther adjustment FNS stapler position adjustment

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

2-3

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

• When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, the memory board(MB) that was installed on the damaged OACB should be used on the new OACB. Contact the servicesection of the authorized distributor if it is considered that the MB is also damaged. Never perform the 47mode - 92 (output).

Dev

elop

er *

1

Tran

sfer

bel

t

Bel

t cle

anin

g bl

ade

1st t

rans

fer

rolle

r /Y

, M, C

, K

Imag

e co

rrec

tion

unit

Cha

rgin

g co

rona

/Y, M

, C, K

Fix

ing

rolle

r /U

, L

Fix

ing

clea

ning

uni

t

Dec

urle

r ro

ller

Writ

e un

it /K

Writ

e un

it /Y

, M, C

Dus

t-pr

oof g

lass

/Y, M

, C, K

CC

D u

nit

Eac

h sc

anne

r m

irror

Exp

osur

e la

mp

(L1)

Orig

inal

gla

ss

Ove

rall

cont

rol b

oard

(O

AC

B)

Pri

nter

con

trol

boa

rd (

PR

CB

)

Imag

e pr

oces

sing

boa

rd (

IPB

)

Ope

ratio

n bo

ard

/1 (

OB

1)

Mem

ory

boar

d (M

B)

*2

Reg

istr

atio

n ro

ller

RA

DF

con

trol

boa

rd (

DF

CB

)

FN

S c

ontr

ol b

oard

(F

NS

CB

)

Sta

pler

uni

t

1

1 1 12 2 2 1

11 2

3 6 2 3 7 7 4 3 1 112

12 1

2*3 3*3 3*3

3 4 4

14 1 5 5 2 1 25 2 6 6 3 2 3

7 6 4 46 5 3 3

4 5 4 2 2

MODE CHANGE MENU CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

2-4

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

4. MODE CHANGE MENU

4.1 Setting method

From this screen, the following modes can be

selected without turning off/on the power.

"1 Basic screen"

"2 36 mode"

"3 25 mode"

"4 Key operator mode"

"5 47 mode"

A. Procedure

1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main

switch (SW2).

2. Press the P button and wait until "Enter 4-digit

password to change mode" appears.

3. Input 9272 as the password and press the

START button. (The password is fixed and can-

not be changed.) "Mode changing menu

screen" is displayed.

4. Press any desired key.

5. To return to the "Mode changing menu

screen," press the P button and wait until the

"Mode changing menu screen" appears.

6. After completion of adjustment, press the [Exit]

key to return to the basic screen.

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MODE CHANGE MENU

2-5

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

4.2 Display transition of 36 modes

36 mode 1/2

1 Process adjustment2 Image adjustment 3 Image quality adjustment4 Running test mode 5 Test pattern output mode6 Test pattern density setting 7 Finisher adjustment8 List output mode

3-6 Modus / Adjustment mode

1 High voltage adjustment2 Drum peculiarity adjustment 3 Sensor output check4 Exclusive paper setting 5 Recall standard data

Process adjustment mode menu

High voltage adjustment mode menu

1 1st transfer manual adjustment2 2nd transfer manual adjustment3 HV adjustment (Separation-AC)4 HV adjustment (Separation-DC) 5 Pre-transfer guide HV check

Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu

1 Blade setting mode2 Automatic drum potential adjustment x3 Automatic gamma adjustment4 LD bias adjustment5 Automatic developer charge 6 L detect initial automatic adjustment 7 Initial drun rotation

1 Magnification adjustment2 Timing adjustment 3 EDH adjustment4 Centering adjustment5 Non-image area erase check 6 Recall standerd data

Image adjustment mode menu

Magnification adjustment mode menu

Timing adjustment mode menu

1 Printer restart timing adjustment2 Printer resist loop adjustment3 Printer pre-resist adjustment4 Printer lead edge timing adjustment5 Scanner restart timing adjustment6 EDH restart timing adjustment7 EDH resist loop adjustment

1 EDH density adjustment2 EDH original size adjustment3 EDH Incline offset adjustment

EDH adjustment mode menu

1 Printer centring adjustment2 Scanner centring adjustment3 EDH centring adjustment

Centering adjustment mode menu

x : Factory exclusive use. Service is not used.

1 Printer drum clock adjustment2 Printer horizontal adjustment3 Scanner drum clock adjustment 4 EDH drum clock adjustment

1 Surface potential sensor output2 MAX. density sensor output3 Gamma sensor output

Sensor output check mode menu


2-6

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

36 mode 2/2

1 Process adjustment2 Image adjustment 3 Image quality adjustment4 Running test mode 5 Test pattern output mode6 Test pattern density setting 7 Finisher adjustment8 List output mode

3-6 Modus / Adjustment mode

1 Intermittent copy mode2 Paperless running mode3 Paperless mode4 Paperless endless mode 5 Running mode

Running test mode menu

Finisher adjustment mode menu

1 Stitch & Fold stopper adjustment2 Fold stopper adjustment3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment4 Trimming stopper adjustment5 Punch adjustment6 Three Folding position adjustment 7 2 Positions staple pitch adjustm.

1 Machine management list 12 Adjustment data list3 Page fill data list 4 Machine management list 2 5 Parameter list 6 Memory dump list 7 Font pattern

List output mode menu

1 Punch vertical position adjustment2 Punch horizontal position adjustment3 Punch resist loop adjustment

Punch adjustment mode menu

Image quality adjustment mode menu

1 Scanner gamma adjustment2 Printer gamma adjustment3 Sharpness adjustment4 Contrast adjustment5 Image judge adjustment6 ACS adjustment 7 Density adjustment 8 Tone adjustment9 Recall standard data

1 Printer gamma offset adjustment2 Printer gamma sensor adjustment3 Printer screen gradation adjustment

Printer gamma adjustment mode menu

1 Dot detect adjustment2 Color text adjustment 3 Dot/Text area adjustment

Image judge adjustment mode menu

1 AE adjustment2 Copy density adjustment 3 Background adjustment

Density adjustment mode menu

1 Red adjustment2 Green adjustment 3 Blue adjustment

Tone adjustment mode menu


2-7

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

4.3 Display transition of 25 modes

2-5 Modus /Memory setting mode

10 RD mode setting11 ISW 12 Setting date input 13 Board change mode

1 Software SW setting2 Paper size setting3 PM count4 Data collection5 Parts counter6 Password setting7 Telephone number setting8 M/C serial number setting9 Indication of ROM version

1 Total count of each setting2 Copy count of each paper size3 Print count of each paper size4 RADF count5 Page fill of each section6 JAM date of time series 7 JAM count8 Count of each copy mode9 SC count

Collecting data mode menu

1 Count of special parts 2 Count of each parts

Copy count mode menu

10 JAM count of each section11 SC count of each section

1 Count reset 2 Change setting

PM count mode menu

1 Key operator password2 E.K.C. master key cord *1 3 Weekly timer password

Password setting mode menu

1 Main body2 Option tray3 RADF4 Finisher

M/C serial number setting menu

*1 Name of systemE.K.C : Except USA areaE.C.M : USA area only


2-8

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

4.4 Display transition of Key Operation modes

Key Operation mode

Key operator mode menu

10 Control panel adjustment11 Tray auto select setting12 Power save setting13 Memory switch setting 14 Machine management list print15 * Not use Minolta!16 Finisher adjustment17 Front & Back Density setting18 Scanner transmission setting19 Non-image area erase setting20 AES adjustment 21 Execute adjust operation 22 Magnification adjustment23 Timing adjustment 24 Centring adjustment 25 Printer gamma sensor adj.

1 System initial setting2 Copier initial setting 3 User setting mode4 E.K.C function setting *15 Lock / delete program memory6 Paper type / Special size set7 Panel contrast / Key sound adj. 8 Key operator data setting9 Weekly timer

1 Date & Time setting2 Language select setting3 IP address setting / Tandem4 E-mail transmission setting

System initial setting menu

Finisher adjustment mode menu

1 Stitch & Fold stopper adjustment2 Fold stopper adjustment3 Trim stopper adjustment4 Punch adjustment5 Z-Fold position adjustment6 2-Positions staple pitch adjustment 7 Finisher output limit

1 Weekly timer ON/OFF setting2 Timer setting3 Timer action ON/OFF setting4 Lunch hour off setting5 Timer interrupt password set

Weekly timer setting menu

1 Job memory list2 User management list3 E.K.C. management list4 Font pattern list

Management list print mode menu

1 Printer vertical mag. adj.2 Printer horizontal mag. adj. 3 Scanner vertical mag. adj.

Magnification mode menu

1 Printer lead edge timing adj.2 Printer registration loop adj.3 Printer pre-registration adj.4 Printer erasure amount adj.5 Scanner re-start timing adj.6 RADF registration loop adj.

Timing adjustment mode menu

1 Printer centring adjustment 2 Scanner centring adjustment 3 RADF centring adjustment

Centring adjustment mode menu

> Next page



2-9

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

Key Operation mode

No.13 Memory Switch Setting

10 Platen APS11 RADF APS12 Platen AMS13 RADF AMS14 Select tray when APS cancel15 Platen original size detect16 RADF original size detect17 Platen original size detect (SMALL)18 Rotation19 Staple mode reset function20 Job offset operating21 Continuation print22 Key click sound23 1 Shot indication time24 Power save screen25 Start Key latch function26 Stop Key function27 Auto select of booklet copy28 E.K.C. Password *129 Arrow key change [Image shift]30 An interruption suspended way

1 Auto reset timer2 Auto reset key function3 RADF-Original effect4 Job memory auto recall -30-5 Finisher mode by Full-Auto6 Initial by Key Counter insert7 Erasure outside area of original8 RADF frame erasure selection9 Automatic tray switching

No15 - Memory switch menu

31 E.K.C. password input timing *132 Sound (No paper, toner/ JAM)33 Reserve copy function34 Change page no. Pos. (booklet)35 Trimmer (STD./ Non STD size)36 Timer which prohibits print37 Bookmark function38 Delete of overlay image39 Orig. direction/ Binding mode40 Screen (Line Screen)41 Screen (Dot Screen)42 Side 2 drum clock adjust mode 43 Screen (Full Colour-Text/ Photo) 44 Screen (Full Colour-Photo) 45 Screen (Monochrome-Text/ Photo) 46 Screen (Monochrome-Photo) 47 Screen (Mono Colour-Text/ Photo) 48 Screen (Mono Colour-Photo) 49 Colour gamut


CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

2-10

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

5.CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION

The P function is a function that allows you to con-

firm the following various numeric values by using

the P button.

[1] Total counter

[2] Full color counter

[3] Mono color counter

[4] Monochrome counter

[5] Copier counter

[6] Printer counter

5.1 Checking method of theP function

A. Procedure

1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main

switch (SW2).

2. Press the P button.

3. "Counter list screen" appears.

4. Press the ! button in "Counter list screen," and

the PM counter is displayed.

5. To output the counter value list, press the

[Counter list output] key.

6. Pressing the [Exit] key, or the stop or clear but-

ton returns to the basic screen.

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 25 MODE

2-11

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6. 25 MODE

6.1 List of adjustment items for25 mode

Adjustment item menu Remarks

1. Software SW setting See the "List of software DIPSW".

2. Paper size setting LCT paper size setting

3. PM count 1. Count reset

2. Change setting

4. Data collection 1. Total count of each paper setting

2. Copy count of each paper size

3. Print count of each paper size

4. RADF count

5. Page fill of each section

6. JAM data of time series

7. JAM count

8. Count of each copy mode

9. SC count

10. JAM count of each section

11. SC count of each section

5.Parts counter1. Count of special parts

2. Count of each parts

6. Password setting 1. Key operator password 4 digits

2. E.K.C. master key code 8 digits

3. Weekly timer password 4 digits

7.Telephone number setting1. Service centre Telephone number 16 digits

2. Service centre FAX number 16 digits

8. M/C serial number setting 1. Main body

2. Option tray

3. RADF

4. Finisher

9. Indication of ROM version

10. RD mode setting

11. ISW

12. Setting date input

13. Board change mode

25 MODE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

2-12

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6.2 Setting method

This machine is provided with the 25 mode as an

adjustment method. This mode is used when the

memory board (MB) is rewritten or various settings

are made.

A. Procedure

6.3 Setting software DIPSW

A. Setting method

The software DIPSW is set on "Software SW setting

screen."

Note:

• Please note that DIPSW bits are written into

the memory board (MB) each time a change is

made.

B. Meaning of the values displayed on the

screen

C. Procedure

• For each function of the DIPSW, see "List of soft-ware DIPSW."

1. Turn OFF the main switch (SW2) with the reset

switch (SW1) left ON.

2. While pressing the numeric keys 2 and 5 at the

same time, turn on the SW2. the "25 mode

menu screen" appears.

At this point, the machine enters the 25 mode

with normal copy operations unavailable.

3. Press the item keys on the liquid crystal dis-

play (LCD). A setting screen corresponding to

each item appears.

4. Confirm the input data on the setting screen of

each item.

5. Turn off the SW2 to release the 25 mode.

6. New data will be effective after restarting.

[1] DIPSW number

[2] Bit number (0 to 7)

[3] Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF

[4] 8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadeci-mals from 00 to FF.

1. Enter the 25 mode.

2. "25 mode menu screen"

Press the [1. Software SW setting] key.

3. "Software SW setting screen"

Select a DIPSW number by using the arrow

key on the left.

4. Select a bit number of the DIPSW by using the

arrow key on the right.

5. Select the ON (1) or OFF (0) of the DIPSW by

using the [ON] or [OFF] key.

6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return

to the "25 mode menu screen".

8050fs1026e[2][1] [3] [4]


2-13

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

List of software DIPSW

Note:

• Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.

DIPSW

No.

Bit Functions 0 1 Default values

Japan Inch Metric

DIPSW1 0 — — — 1 1 1

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 Print stop method after toner sup-ply or waste toner full display

*1 *1 1 1 1

3 *1 *1 0 0 0

4 Prohibition of printing when the PM count is reached

Not prohibited Prohibited 0 0 0

5 Print number setting until printing is prohibited after PM is displayed

*2 *2 0 0 0

6 *2 *2 0 0 0

7 *2 *2 0 0 0

DIPSW2 0 Hard disk connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 Control of the LT paper feed assist fan

*3 *3 0 0 0

5 *3 *3 0 0 0

6 Switchover of the rotational speed of the polygon motor

*4 *4 1 1 1

7 *4 *4 0 0 0

DIPSW3 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 SC latch (SC34/35/36) Unlatched Latched 0 0 0

2 Password request for 25, 36, 47 mode (password: 9272)

Not requested Requested 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 47 mode 15-01, 02 counter clear Disabled Enabled 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW4 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 1 0

3 — — — 0 0 1

4 Recovery from removal of the key counter

Disabled Enabled 0 1 0

5 APS when change magnification Enabled Disabled 0 1 0

6 Change of fixed magnifications set-ting in key operator mode

Enabled Disabled 1 0 0

7 Large size paper counting method (Other than PM counter)

Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0


2-14

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

DIPSW5 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 Change of the size of the large size paper

B4, 8.5 x 14 or

larger

A3, 11 x 17 or

larger

0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW6 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW7 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW8 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 Large size paper PM counting method

Count as 1 Count as 2 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW9 0 Operation when the key counter is removed (copier)

Same as

the stop button

Immediate stop

jam

0 0 0

1 Operation when the key counter is removed (IP)

Ignored Same as

DIPSW9-0

0 0 0

2 Message switchover *5 *5 0 0 0

3 *5 *5 0 0 0

4 Copy quantity limit selection *6 *6 0 0 0

5 *6 *6 0 0 0

6 *6 *6 0 0 0

7 *6 *6 0 0 0

DIPSW

No.


Japan Inch Metric


2-15

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

DIPSW10 0 Page memory reservation at power on

No reservation 94MB (177MB when Expan-sion memory is installed)

0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW11 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 Filter for jagged edges on slanting lines


5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 Jam code display Disabled Enabled 0 0 0

DIPSW12 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 Adjustment of the image quality in the key operator mode


2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 Black text screen with overlay func-tion

*7 Screen *7 Nonscreen 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW13 0 Size detection switchover 1 A5, A4R 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5x11R 0 1 0

1 Size detection switchover 2 A6R Post card 1 0 0

2 Size detection switchover 3 8.5 x 14 F4 0 0 1

3 Size detection switchover 4 *8 *8 0 0 0

4 *8 *8 0 1 0

5 F4 size setting *9 *9 0 0 0

6 *9 *9 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW

No.


Japan Inch Metric


2-16

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

DIPSW14 0 Size detection switchover 5 (main body)

B4, 11 x 17 / B5,

8.5 x 11 / B5R

8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 Size detection switchover 5 (by-pass)

B4, 11 x 17 / B5,

8.5 x 11 / B5R

8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0

4 Size detection switchover 5 (platen)

B4, 11 x 17 / B5,

8.5 x 11/B5R

8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0

5 Size detection switchover 5 (ADF) B4, 11 x 17 / B5,

8.5 x 11 / B5R

8K/16K / 16KR 0 0 0

6 Size detection switchover 5 (PI) B4, 11 x 17 / B5,

8.5 x 11 / B5R

8K / 16K / 16KR 0 0 0

7 0 0 0

DIPSW15 0 Selection of the RD mode type Telephone line E-mail 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 FNS alarm stop method *10 *10 0 0 0

4 *10 *10 0 0 0

5 RD mode connection Disconnected Connected 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW16 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 Recognizing the copy reservation function/coin vendor

Copy reservation

function enabled

Coin vendor disabled

Copy reservation

function prohibited

Coin vendor enabled

0 0 0

2 Coin vendor type Parallel

communication

Serial

communication

0 0 0

3 Counting of the key counter in the printer mode (IP)

Not counted Counted 0 0 0

4 Display of the total count start date (P function)

Displayed Not displayed 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 NIC selection for E-Mail RD-mode IP NIC Copier NIC 0 0 0

DIPSW17 0 Summer time setting *11 *11 0 0 0

1 *11 *11 1 1 1

2 *11 *11 1 1 1

3 *11 *11 0 0 0

4 Density selection at scanning the tabed paper

*12 *12 0 0 0

5 *12 *12 0 0 0

6 *12 *12 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW

No.


Japan Inch Metric


2-17

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

DIPSW18 0 Tray 1 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0

1 Tray 2 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0

2 Tray 3 faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0

3 Tray 4 (LCT) faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 Folding, stitch & folding, tri-fold, trimmer faulty part isolation

Normal Unavailable 0 0 0

6 PI faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0

7 HDD faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0

DIPSW19 0 — — — 0 0 1

1 Fixing temperature selection *13 *13 1 1 1

2 *13 *13 1 1 1

3 *13 *13 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 PK faulty part isolation Normal Unavailable 0 0 0

6 Default resolution of the IP scanner *14 *14 0 0 0

7 *14 *14 0 0 0

DIPSW20 0 Group stapling mode Disabled Enabled 0 0 0

1 Image scanning area with shift function

*15 Normal * 15 Original priority 0 0 0

2 Selection of the stamped page number

Based on

original

Based on

transfer paper

0 0 0

3 Keyboard layout ABC layout QWERTY layout 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW21 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 LCT size setting in the key operator mode


2 Display of the original count Displayed Not displayed 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 Selection of the index paper with APS


7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW

No.


Japan Inch Metric


2-18

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

DIPSW22 0 IP address setting Disabled Enabled 1 1 1

1 Number of punch holes *16 *16 0 1 0

2 *16 *16 0 0 1

3 Image reference position for the non-standard size original

Based on user

selection

Based on APS at

ADF

0 0 0

4 Function of the power save button Enabled Disabled 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 Operation when FNS runs out of staple

Staple supply

request

Selecting between staple supply or staple release

0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW23 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 Output when EKC (ECM) user ID is unmatched (IP)

Enabled (counted as the other user)

Disabled (regis-tered in JOB list)

0 0 0

2 Precision of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction)

*17 Normal *17 Fine 0 0 0

3 Control of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction)

*18 Enabled *18 Disabled 0 0 0

4 Main scan correction of the color registration automatic correction (periodic correction)

*19 Enabled *19 Disabled 0 0 0

5 IP gamma correction *20 Enabled *20 Disabled 0 0 0

6 Job memory registration of the special paper setting on the by-pass tray


7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW24 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 Vs/Vp switch control *21 Disabled *21 Enabled 0 0 0

2 Image stabilization control timing *22 *22 0 0 0

3 *22 *22 1 1 1

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW25 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 Color registration correction control *23 *23 0 0 0

4 *23 *23 0 0 0

5 Color registration fine correction Yes No 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 De-humid heater ON OFF 0 0 0

DIPSW

No.


Japan Inch Metric


2-19

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

DIPSW26 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW27 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW28 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 Toner refresh mode (at job end) *24 Disabled *24 Enabled 0 0 0

3 Toner refresh mode (periodical) *24 Disabled *24 Enabled 0 0 0

4 Printer gamma offset adjustment *25 Only high

light

*25 Whole area 0 0 0

5 PK punch mode restriction Enabled Disabled 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 Toner refresh mode switchover(Key operator mode)

*26 Y,M,C,K *26 M,C 1 1 1

DIPSW29 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 Include of proof copy to the set copy quantity

Not included Included 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW30 0 — — — 0 0 0

1 Restriction of the display of the 25 mode data correction

Restricted Not restricted 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 1 1 1

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW

No.


Japan Inch Metric


2-20

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

*1 Print stop method after toner supply or wastetoner full display

*2 Print number setting until printing is prohibitedafter PM is displayed

*3 Control of the LT paper feed assist fan

*4 Switchover of the rotational speed of the poly-gon motor

5 Message switchover

*6 Copy quantity limit selection

DIPSW31 0 — — — 1 1 1

1 — — — 0 0 0

2 — — — 0 0 0

3 — — — 0 0 0

4 — — — 0 0 0

5 — — — 0 0 0

6 — — — 0 0 0

7 — — — 0 0 0

DIPSW

No.


Japan Inch Metric

Mode 1-3 1-2

Stops after ejecting paper in the machine

0 0

Stops at a break between copy set

0 1

Stops at the end of the current job

1 0

Does not stop 1 1

Mode 1-7 1-6 1-5

1,000 prints 0 0 0

2,000 prints 0 0 1

3,000 prints 0 1 0

4,000 prints 1 1 0

5,000 prints 0 0 1

1,000 prints 1 0 1

1,000 prints 0 1 1

1,000 prints 1 1 1

Mode 2-5 2-4

ON for coated paper only 0 0

ON for all types of paper 0 1

ON for all types of paper 1 0

OFF at all times 1 1

Mode 2-7 2-6

1/1 speed 0 0

1/1 speed 0 1

2/3 speed 1 0

1/2 speed 1 1

Mode 9-3 9-2

Please insert key counter 0 0

Please insert copy card 0 1

Please insert coin 1 0

Please insert key counter 1 1

Mode 9-7 9-6 9-5 9-4

No limit 0 0 0 0

1 sheet 0 0 0 1

3 sheets 0 0 1 0

5 sheets 0 0 1 1

9 sheets 0 1 0 0

10 sheets 0 1 0 1

20 sheets 0 1 1 0

30 sheets 0 1 1 1

50 sheets 1 0 0 0

99 sheets 1 0 0 1

No limit 1 0 1 0

No limit 1 0 1 1

No limit 1 1 0 0

No limit 1 1 1 0

No limit 1 1 1 1


2-21

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

*7 Black text screen with overlay functionWhen using the overlay of the applied func-tion, the image creation method of black char-acters is switched between the error diffusionand the screen.

*8 Size detection switchover 4

*9 F4 size setting

*10 FNS alarm stop method

This setting is used to determine when to stop

if a FNS full alarm is detected.

Functions detected are;

Lower limit of the FNS tray, the number of the

FNS trays, FNS booklet tray, PK punch

scraps, TU scraps and TU stacker

*11 Summer time setting

*12 Density selection when scanning the tabed

paper

Mode 12-6

Screen 0

Error diffusion 1

Mode 13-4 13-3

A5R 0 0

B6R 0 1

5.5 x 8.5R 1 0

— 1 1

Mode 13-6 13-5

8 x 13 0 0

8.25 x 13 0 1

8.125 x 13.25 1 0

8.5 x 13 1 1

Mode 15-4 15-3

Stops immediately after detection

0 0

Stops at a break between copy set after detection

0 1

Does not stop while in printing

1 0

Does not stop while in printing

1 1

Mode 17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0

0 minute 0 0 0 0

10 minutes 0 0 0 1

20 minutes 0 0 1 0

30 minutes 0 0 1 1

40 minutes 0 1 0 0

50 minutes 0 1 0 1

60 minutes 0 1 1 0

70 minutes 0 1 1 1

80 minutes 1 0 0 0

90 minutes 1 0 0 1

100 minutes 1 0 1 0

110 minutes 1 0 1 1

120 minutes 1 1 0 0

130 minutes 1 1 0 1

140 minutes 1 1 1 0

150 minutes 1 1 1 1

Mode 17-6 17-5 17-4

80 0 0 0

40 (most lighter) 0 0 1

60 0 1 0

100 0 1 1

120 1 0 0

160 1 0 1

200 1 1 0

255 (most darker) 1 1 1


2-22

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

*13 Fixing temperature selection

Temperature up: Decrease a insufficient

fixing or fixing winding

jam

Temperature down: Decrease paper exit curl-

ing or waving

*14 Default resolution of the IP scanner

*15 Image scanning area with shift functionNormal: Compare the original size and the

transfer paper size and the smaller

one is to be the image area.

Original priority:

Original size is to be the image

area.

*16 Number of punch holes

*17 Precision of the color registration automaticcorrection (periodical correction)"Fine" is used when the precision of the colorregistration correction that is periodically con-ducted is increased with the amount of errorreduced. However, it takes about 2 minuteslonger for correction.

*18 Color registration auto correction control (peri-odical correction)Down time while in the continuous printing isreduced with the color registration correctionomitted that is periodically performed (colorregistration correction at power ON is notomitted).

*19 Main scan correction of the color registrationauto correction (periodical correction)The color registration corrections, in the mainscanning direction that are periodically per-formed can be omitted. This is used temporar-ily when there is a registration error along themain scan as a result of a trouble around thetransfer belt unit, or when separating faultypoints.

*20 IP gamma correctionIn order to separate defective items whenthere is poor images sent from IP. The gammacorrection can be omitted. The gamma correc-tion table is stored in the IP.

Mode 19-3 19-2 19-1

Upper roller, lower roller: -30°C

0 0 0


0 0 1


0 1 0

Standard 0 1 1

Upper roller, lower roller: +10°C

1 0 0

Upper roller: +10°CLower roller: +20°C

1 0 1

Standard 0 1 1

— 1 1 1

Mode 19-7 19-6

400dpi 0 0

600 dpi 0 1

200 dpi 1 0

300 dpi 1 1

Mode 20-1

Normal 0

Original priority 1

Mode 22-2 22-1

2 holes (for Japan) 0 0

3 holes (for inch area) 0 1

4 holes (for metric area) 1 0

— 1 1

Mode 23-2

Normal 0

Fine 1

Mode 23-3

Enabled 0

Disabled 1

Mode 23-4

Enabled 0

Disabled 1

Mode 23-5

Enabled 0

Disabled 1


2-23

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

*21 Vs/Vp switch controlThis Vs/Vp switch control is used when thereis an image erasure around a solid image inthe half-tone section in early stage after thechange of developer.

*22 Image stabilization control timingCorrection made:

Correction is performed by sus-

pending print at specified print.

No correction made:

Correction is omitted temporarily to

reduce down time when the

machine cannot be used with SC

due to the malfunction of the drum

potential sensor or gamma sensor.

No correction while in printing:

Correction that is performed by

suspending print at every specified

print is performed after the print job

to reduce down time.

*23 Color registration correction controlCorrection made:

Correction is performed by sus-

pending print at specified print.

No correction made:

Correction is omitted temporarily to

reduce down time when the

machine cannot be used with SC

due to malfunctions around the

color registration sensor.

No correction while in printing:

Correction that is performed by sus-

pending print at every specified

print is performed after the print job

to reduce down time.

Mode 24-1

Disabled 0

Enabled 1

Mode 24-3 24-2

Correction made 0 0

Correction not made 0 1

No correction while in printing

1 0

— 1 1

Mode 25-4 25-3

Correction made 0 0

Correction not made 0 1

No correction while in printing

1 0

— 1 1


2-24

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

*24 Toner refresh mode (at Job end)Toner refresh mode (periodical)When printing coverage is low (5% or less ofeach color), rough image, white spot or tonerspillage tend to occur due to toner deteriora-tion. The effective measure against these are asfollows.•Toner refresh mode in key operator mode

It is performed by a user's decision when aproblem occurs. Amount of toner equivalent of 8-sheet A3solid is developed for all Y, M, C, K. (It needs to change setting by DIPSW 28-7)

•DIPSW 28-2For the colors of which print coverage ofthe previous job is 5% or less (convert intoA4), solid toner of the difference amountfrom the 5% is developed to consumetoner.

•PIPSW 28-3Check the average print coverage for eachcolor at prescribed distance of developingsleeve drive developes the toner amountequivalent of 8-sheet A3 solid for the colorof which the average print coverage is 5%or less (convert into A4).

*25 Printer gamma offset adjustmentChange the area in which the printer gammaoffset of the 36 mode can be adjusted.0: High light area only

1: Possible in whole area

*26 Toner refresh mode switchover Switch over the toner refresh mode function inthe key operator mode.0: Amount of toner equivalent of 8 sheets A3

solid is developed for all Y, M, C and K to

consume toner.

•This setting is effective for rough image,white spot and toner spillage.

•This setting is not so effective for whiteline (paper feeding direction).

1: Amount of toner equivalent of 10 sheets

A3 half-tone is developed for M and C to

consume toner.

•This setting is effective for white line(paper feeding direction).

•This setting is effective for rough image,white spot and toner spillage formagenta and cyan only. (It has noeffect for yellow and black.)

Mode 28-2

Disabled 0

Enabled 1

Mode 28-3

Disabled 0

Enabled 1

Mode 28-4

High light area only 0

Possible in whole area 1

Mode 28-7

Y,M,C,K 0

M,C 1


2-25

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6.4 Paper size setting

Conduct this setting when changing the paper size

of the LCT.

The paper size is available in the standard size,

non-standard size and wide paper.

6.4.1 Standard size setting

A. Procedure

6.4.2 Non-standard size setting

A. Procedure

6.4.3 Wide paper setting

A. Procedure1. Enter the 25 mode.


Press the [2. Paper size setting] key.

3. "Paper size setting screen"

Press the [Standard size] key.

4. Press the arrow key to select the paper size.

5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu

screen."

To invalidate the setting that you have

changed, press the [Cancel] key and return to

"25 mode menu screen."





Press the [Non-standard size] key.

4. Press the main scan direction key and enter

the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric

keys.

5. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the

paper size using the arrow keys or numeric

keys.


screen."


changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return

to "25 mode menu screen."





Press the [Wide paper] key.

4. Press the arrow keys and select the standard

size of the wide paper.

5. Press the [Enter size] key.

6. Press the main scan direction key and enter

the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric

keys.

7. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the

paper size using the arrow keys or numeric

keys.


screen."





2-26

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6.5 PM count setting

Reset the PM count after implementation of the PM

and set and/or change the PM cycle.

The selection of the PM cycle is available in the

total count and the distance in operation of the

developing unit /K. In default, the total count is set.

6.5.1 Count reset

A. Procedure

6.5.2 Change setting

A. Procedure



Press the [3. PM count] key.

3. "PM count/cycle screen"

Press the [Count reset] key.

4. "PM count reset confirmation screen"

Press the [YES] key when resetting the PM

count. The PM count is reset and the starting

date of the PM count is automatically entered.

When the [NO] key is pressed, the PM count is

not reset and return to "PM count/cycle

screen."



Press the [3. PM count] key.

3. "PM count/cycle screen"

Press the [Page] or [Distance] key.

4. Enter a cycle value through the numeric keys.

Only the upper three digits can be entered.


screen."





2-27

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6.6 Data collection

It is possible to confirm various data held in the

machine. It is also possible to confirm collected data

by the list output and the mail remote notification

system.

A. Data that can be confirmed

1. Total count of each paper size

2. Copy count of each paper size

3. Print count of each paper size

4. RADF count

5. Page fill of each section

6. JAM data of time series

7. JAM count

8. Count of each copy mode

•Count of each copy mode (1)•Count of each copy mode (2)

9. SC count

10. JAM count of each section

11. SC count of each section

Note:

• When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, 6 to 11 can be

confirmed.

B. Data collection confirmation method

(1) Procedure

Note:

• The [Count reset] key is shown in the individ-

ual data confirmation screen of the [10. JAM

count of each section] and the [11. SC count

of each section].

When pressing the [COUNT RESET] key,

"Count reset confirmation screen" is shown,

and when pressing the [YES] key, the section

data is reset.

Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Individual

data confirmation screen" with the interval

data not reset.

Reset these data while in the PM implementa-

tion to confirm the jam or SC occurrence

count after it was visited last time.



Press the [4. Data collection] key.

3. "Data collection menu screen"

Press the key of a data collection item that you

want to confirm.

To select any succeeding key to the key 11,

press the arrow key.

4. "Individual data confirmation screen"

Press the arrow key to scroll the screen.




2-28

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

C. Details of the data collection

(1) Data collection No. 1 to 3: Total, copy and

printer counts of each paper size

• Maximum count: 99,999,999• 1 count is made for paper of All types regardless

of the paper size.• All sheets of paper that do not come under the

size of No. 1 to No. 9 are counted as special.However, SEL and LEF are counted as the samesize.

• The non-standard and the wide paper arecounted as special.

NO For Remark

Japan Inch Metric

1 A2 17 x 22 A2 Not used

2 A3 11 x 17 A3

3 B4 8.5 x 14 B4 (8K)

4 A4 8.5 x 11 A4

5 B5 5.5 x 8.5 B5 (16K)

6 A5 — A5

7 B6 — F4

8 8.5 x 14 — —

9 8.5 x 11 A4 —

10 Special Special Special


2-29

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(2) Data collection No. 4: RADF count

• Maximum count: 99,999,999

(3) Data collection No. 5: Page fill of each sec-

tion

It is possible to confirm the average pixel ratio of

5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of

Y, M, C and K.

This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the

dot area of pixels and the transfer paper area, and

is different from the print ratio when actually printed.

(4) Data collection No. 6: JAM date of time

series

With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible

to confirm originating jam code, total count, date of

occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size

and magnification.

NO Item Remark

1 No. of originals fed in ADF mode

2 No. of originals fed in RADF mode

3 No. of originals fed in RDH mode

Not used

4 No. of originals fed in RRDH mode

5 No. of originals fed in LDH mode

6 No. of originals fed in CFF mode

7 No. of 1 sided SDF original fed

8 No. of mix originals fed in ADF mode

9 No. of mix originals fed in RADF mode

10 No. of originals fed in 2 in 1 mode Not used

11 No. of 1 sided z-folded original fed

12 No. of 2 sided z-folded original fed

13 No. of 2 sided SDF original fed Not used

14 —


2-30

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(5) Data collection No. 7: Jam count / No. 10.

JAM count of each section

NO Jam code is shown on the LCD display when

DIPSW11-7 is set to 1

Section

1 J10-01

By-pass2 J10-02

3 J10-03

4 J11-01 Tray 1

5 J12-01 Tray 2

6 J13-01 Tray 3

7 J14-01 LCT

8 J17-01

Paper feed

9 J17-02

10 J17-03

11 J17-04

12 J17-05

13 J17-06

14 J17-07

15 J17-08

16 J17-09

17 J31-02

Reversed paper exit

18 J32-08

19 J32-04

20 J32-01

21 J32-05

22 J32-07

23 J32-02

24 J32-03

25 J92-01

ADU26 J93-01

27 J94-02

28 J19-01 Vertical conveyance

29 J19-02 LCT

30 J51-01 Main body

31 J71-01 FNS

32 J71-02 TU

33 J72-16

FNS

34 J72-17

35 J72-18

36 J72-19

37 J72-20

38 J72-21

39 J72-22

40 J72-23

41 J72-24

42 J72-25

43 J72-26

44 J72-28

45 J72-29

46 J72-30

47 J72-32

TU48 J72-33

49 J72-34

50 J72-35 PI

51 J72-38

Not used

52 J72-39

53 J72-40

54 J72-41

55 J72-42

56 J72-43 PK

57 J72-44

Not used58 J72-45

59 J72-46

60 J72-47

61 J72-48 FNS

62 J72-49

PI63 J72-50

64 J72-51

65 J72-60

Not used

66 J72-61

67 J72-62

68 J72-63

69 J72-64

70 J72-80 PK

71 J72-81

FNS72 J72-82

73 J72-83

74 J72-90



Section


2-31

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


75 J61-01

DF

76 J61-02

77 J61-03

78 J62-01

79 J62-02

80 J62-03

81 J62-04

82 J62-05

83 J62-06

84 J62-07

85 J17-10 LCT

86 —

Not used

87

88

89

90



Section


2-32

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(6) Data collection No. 8-1: Count of each copy mode (1)

NO Item Count conditions

1 1-1 mode

2 1-2 mode

3 2-1 mode

4 2-2 mode

5 ADF 1-1 mode

6 ADF 1-2 mode

7 Mixed original mode

8 Tab original mode

9 Z-folded original mode

10 LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Reg.)

11 LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Reg.)

12 LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Rev.)

13 LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Rev.)

14 Enhance Mode: text/photo

15 Enhance Mode: Text

16 Enhance Mode: Photo

17 Enhance Mode: Map

18 Non STD size

19 1 oblique staple(Upper left)

20 1 oblique staple(Upper right)

21 2 parallel staples(Left binding)

22 2 parallel staples(Upper binding)

23 Left binding

24 Right binding

25 Upper binding

26 Three-Folding

27 Stapling & Folding

28 Folding

29 Main tray: Group

30 Main tray: Sort

31 Main tray: Non sort

32 Subtray: Group (FACE DOWN)

33 Subtray: Group (FACE UP)

34 Subtray: Sort (FACE DOWN)

35 Subtray: Sort (FACE UP)

36 Subtray: Non sort (FACE DOWN)

37 Subtray: Non sort (FACE UP)

38 Cover sheet

39 Trimmer

40 Real size copy

41 Preset magnification E4




45 Preset magnification R4


2-33

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T




49 User lens mode 1

50 User lens mode 2

51 User lens mode 3

52 Zoom

53 Vertical/Horizontal zoom

54 Maximum zoom

55 Minimum zoom

56 APS

57 AMS

58 AE (AES)

59 User density level 1 (Not used)

60 User density level 2 (Not used)

61 Interrupted copy

62 Auto image rotation cancellation

63 Sheet insertion

64 Chapter control

65 Combination

66 Booklet copy

67 OHP interleave (copy) (Not used)

68 OHP interleave (blank) (Not used)

69 Image insert

70 Book copy

71 Program job

72 Non-image area erase

73 Reverse image

74 Auto repeat

75 Manual repeat

76 STD size repeat

77 Frame erasure

78 Fold erasure

79 Auto layout

80 All-image area (Not used)

81 Image Shift

82 Reduction shift

83 Overlay

84 Water mark

85 Stamp

86 Date/Time

87 Page

88 Numbering

89 Set quantity 1

90 Set quantity 2-5

91 Set quantity 6-10



2-34

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

92 Set quantity 11 or more

93 Time while power remote 1 is ON Accumulation of time during which the overall control board is powered

94 Time while power remote 2 is ON Accumulation of time during which the remote power 1 is on (in minutes)

95 Time while power remote 3 is ON Accumulation of time during which the remote power 2 is on (in minutes)

96 Time while power remote 4 is ON Accumulation of time during which the built-in controller operates (in minutes)

97 Time during Low Power mode Accumulation of time in the low power mode (1 count for each minute)

98 Time during warm up time Accumulation of warm-up time (in minutes)

99 Time during front door open Accumulation of time during which the front door is open (in minutes)

100 Ope. Time in 1side straight exit Accumulation of time from the start of print to the end of print (in minutes)Down time due to jam omitted101 Ope. Time in 1side reverse exit

102 Operation time in 2 side print

103 Operation time in ADF mode Accumulation of time during which ADF oper-ates (in minutes)

104 Morning Correction count (Not used)

105 Time during APS sensor ON Accumulation of time during which the APS sen-sor is on (in minutes)

106 N of main tray used jobs

107 N of subtray used jobs

108 N of stapling & folding used jobs

109 N of folding used jobs

110 N of ADF NF occurred

111 N of ADF special error1 occurred Wrong detection of original size

112 N of ADF special error2 occurred Next original information error

113 N of ADF special error3 occurred Error in size for which mixed paper is not allowed

114 N of scanner scanned No. of scans in platen mode

115 N of electrode cleaned (Not used)

116 N of memory overflow

117 N of fixing alarm occurred (Not used)

118 N of no toner stop occurred (Not used)

119 N of AGC retry (Not used)

120 N of sub scan beam correct error (Not used)

121 N of mis-centering correct error (Not used)

122 N of distortion adjust error (Not used)

123 N of ADF distortion data error (Not used)

124 Compression memory overflow

125 Page memory overflow (scan)

126 Page memory overflow (print)

127 FNS alarm (tray/trimming)

128 FNS alarm (staple)

129 —

130 N of ADF special error4 occurred (Not used)

131 Store for HDD (Sync. With Copying) (Not used)



2-35

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


132 Store for HDD (SRVmode Scan → HDD) (Not used)

133 Store for PC (SRVmode Scan → PC) (Not used)

134 Store for PC (SRVmode HDD → PC) (Not used)

135 Recall from HDD (SRVmode HDD) (Not used)

136 Recall from PC (SRVmode PC) (Not used)

137 Image edit count by SRV

138 Wide paper count (A3W) or (11 x 17R)

139 Wide paper count (A4W) or (8.5 x 11W)

140 Wide paper count (A4WR) or (8.5 x 11RW)

141 Wide paper count (A5W) or (5.5 x 8.5W)

142 Wide paper count (Others)

143 Punch

144 Z-Folding (Not used)

145 ADF original-thick

146 MixPlex (1 side)

147 MixPlex (2 side)

148 ADF original-thin

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160



2-36

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(7) Data collection No. 8-2: Count of each copy mode (2)


1 ACS

2 Full color

3 Monochrome

4 Mono color (Y)

5 Mono color (M)

6 Mono color (C)

7 Mono color (R)

8 Mono color (G)

9 Mono color (B)

10 DF thick paper

11 DF thin paper

12 Original type: Printed paper

13 Original type: Photo paper

14 Original type: Copied paper

15 Original type: Inkjet paper

16 Original type: Pencil

17 Original type: Newspaper

18 Screen : Line screen/Smooth tone

19 Screen : Line screen/High resolution

20 Screen : Dot screen/Smooth tone

21 Screen : Dot screen/High resolution

22 Screen : High compression

23 Gloss mode

24 Density shift

25 Background adjustment

26 Red adjust

27 Green adjust

28 Blue adjust

29 Hue adjustment

30 Saturation adjustment

31 Brightness adjustment

32 Color balance adjustment

33 Sharpness adjustment

34 Contrast adjustment

35 Image judge adjustment

36 Paper Type: Normal paper

37 Paper Type: Recycle paper

38 Paper Type: Color paper

39 Paper Type: High quality paper

40 Paper Type: Coated paper

41 Paper Type: Tab paper

42 Paper Type: Color specific paper

43 Paper Type: Exclusive paper A

44 Paper Type: Exclusive paper B

45 Paper Type: Exclusive paper C


2-37

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


46 Paper Type: Exclusive paper D

47 Paper Weight: 1

48 Paper Weight: 2

49 Paper Weight: 3

50 Paper Weight: 4

51 Paper Weight: 5

52 Paper Weight: 6

53 Multi page enlargement

54 Main Tray: Face up

55 N of no toner stop occurred (Y)

56 N of no toner stop occurred (M)

57 N of no toner stop occurred (C)

58 N of no toner stop occurred (K)

59 N of toner recovery box is full

60 N of color regist. auto. adj. Counts 1 per every correction operation

61 N of auto stability control Counts 1 per every correction operation

62 —

63 —

64 —

65 OFF mode time Sum of the OFF mode time (unit: minute)

66 ON time of heater (Main body) Sum of the time the heater is on (unit: minute)

67 ON time of heater (tray 4) Sum of the time the LCT heater is on (unit: minute)

68 Polygon motor operation time Sum of the time the polygon motor is on (unit: minute)

69 Develop motor ope. time (color) Sum of the time the developing motor (color) operates (unit: minute)

70 Develop motor ope. time (black) Sum of the time the developing motor (black) operates (unit: minute)

71 ON time of PCL (color) Sum of the time the PCL (color) is on (unit: minute)

72 ON time of PCL (black) Sum of the time the PCL (black) is on (unit: minute)

73 Operation time in Scanner motor Sum of the time the scanner motor operates (unit: minute)

74 Time while power (ADF) Sum of the time the 24V is applied to the ADF (unit: minute)

75

76

77

78

79

80



2-38

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(8) Data collection No. 9: SC occurrence count/

No. 11: Sectional SC occurrence count

NO SC code Section

1 SC10-10 Communication abnormality

2 SC13-01 Paper feed motor abnormality

3 SC13-02

4 SC18-01 Paper feed tray abnormality

5 SC18-02

6 SC18-03

7 SC18-04

8 SC18-50 LT abnormality

9 SC18-51

10 SC18-60

11 SC18-61

12 SC18-70

13 SC18-71


15 SC20-11

16 SC20-12

17 SC21-01 PCL abnormality

18 SC21-02

19 SC21-03

20 SC21-04

21 SC23-01 Developing motor abnormality

22 SC23-02

23 SC23-03

24 SC23-04

25 SC23-05 Drum motor abnormality26 SC23-06

27 SC23-07

28 SC23-08

29 SC23-09 Transfer belt section abnormality30 SC23-10

31 SC23-11 Toner supply abnormality

32 SC27-01 L-detection abnormality

33 SC27-02 L-detection abnormality

34 SC27-03

35 SC27-04

36 SC28-01 High voltage abnormality

37 SC28-02

38 SC28-03

39 SC28-04

40 SC29-01

41 SC29-02

42 SC29-03

43 SC29-04

44 SC29-06 Process abnormality

45 SC29-07

46 SC29-08

47 SC29-09

48 SC29-10

49 SC29-11

50 SC29-12

51 SC29-13

52 SC29-14

53 SC29-15

54 SC29-16

55 SC29-17

56 SC29-18

57 SC29-19

58 SC29-20

59 SC29-21

60 SC29-22

61 SC29-23

62 SC30-01

63 SC30-02


65 SC32-01 Fan abnormality

66 SC32-02

67 SC32-03

68 SC32-04

69 SC32-05

70 SC32-06

71 SC33-01 Motor abnormality72 SC33-02

73 SC33-03

74 SC33-04

75 SC34-01 High fixing temperature abnor-mality76 SC34-02

77 SC34-03

78 SC34-04

79 SC34-05

80 SC34-06

81 SC34-07

82 SC34-08

83 SC35-01 Low fixing temperature abnor-mality84 SC35-02

85 SC35-03

86 SC35-04

87 SC35-05

88 SC35-06

NO SC code Section


2-39

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

89 SC36-02 Fixing sensor abnormality

90 SC36-04

91 SC36-05

92 SC36-06

93 SC36-07

94 SC36-08

95 SC36-09

96 SC36-10

97 SC36-11

98 SC36-12

99 SC38-02

100 SC38-03

101 SC39-01

102 SC41-01 Scanner abnormality

103 SC41-02 Write abnormality104 SC41-03

105 SC41-04

106 SC41-05

107 SC41-06 Scanner abnormality

108 SC41-07 Write abnormality109 SC41-08

110 SC41-09

111 SC41-10

112 SC41-11


114 SC42-02

NO SC code Section

115 SC45-01 Color registration abnormality

116 SC45-03

117 SC45-07

118 SC45-08

119 SC45-09

120 SC45-10

121 SC45-11

122 SC45-12

123 SC45-20

124 SC46-01 Image processing abnormality125 SC46-02

126 SC46-03

127 SC46-05

128 SC46-06

129 SC46-07

130 SC46-08

131 SC46-09

132 SC46-11

133 SC46-12

134 SC46-13

135 SC46-14

136 SC46-15

137 SC46-16

138 SC46-17

139 SC46-18

140 SC46-19

141 SC46-21

142 SC46-23

143 SC46-24

144 SC46-25

145 SC46-26

146 SC46-31

147 SC46-32

148 SC46-35

149 SC46-40

150 SC46-41

151 SC46-42

152 SC46-43

153 SC46-58

154 SC46-59

155 SC46-62

156 SC46-63

157 SC46-64

158 SC46-66

NO SC code Section


2-40

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

159 SC46-80 Image processing abnormality160 SC46-81

161 SC46-82

162 SC46-83

163 SC46-90

164 SC46-91

165 SC46-98

166 SC46-99


168 SC49-01

169 SC49-02

170 SC50-01

171 SC50-02

172 SC50-03

173 SC50-04

174 SC50-05

175 SC50-10

176 SC50-11


178 SC52-02

179 SC52-03

180 SC56-02 Operation board abnormality

181 SC56-11

182 SC56-12

183 SC56-13

184 SC60-01 DF abnormality

185 SC61-01

186 SC61-02

187 SC61-03

188 SC61-04

189 SC61-05

190 SC61-06

191 SC61-07

192 SC61-08

193 SC61-09

194 SC61-10

195 SC70-01

196 SC77-01

NO SC code Section

197 SC77-02 FNS abnormality

198 SC77-03

199 SC77-04

200 SC77-05

201 SC77-06

202 SC77-07

203 SC77-08

204 SC77-11

205 SC77-12

206 SC77-13

207 SC77-14

208 SC77-21

209 SC77-22

210 SC77-25

211 SC77-26

212 SC77-31 TU abnormality

213 SC77-32

214 SC77-33

215 SC77-34

216 SC77-35

217 SC77-36

218 SC37-37

219 SC77-41 PI abnormality

220 SC77-42

221 SC77-43

222 SC77-44 PK abnormality

223 SC77-45 Not used

224 SC77-46



227 SC77-53



230 SC77-56

231 SC77-57

232 SC77-81 FNS abnormality

233 SC77-91

234 SC77-92

235 SC77-98

236 SC77-99


238 SC80-02

239 SC80-03

240 SC80-11 ISW abnormality

241 SC80-21

242 SC80-30

NO SC code Section


2-41

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


243 SC80-31

244 SC80-32

245 SC80-40 Main body abnormality

246 SC89-01

247 SC89-02

248 SC89-03

249 SC89-04

250 —

251 —

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

262

263

264

265

266

267

268

269

270

NO SC code Section


2-42

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6.7 Parts counter

The following are conducted with respect to each

replacement part: display of copy count used, reset-

ting of count, setting of limit value, and new registra-

tion of replacement parts.

The copy count by parts that need to be replaced

includes the following:

• Count of special parts• Count of each parts

6.7.1 Count of special parts

When a periodically replaced part is replaced, reset

the counter of the part that has been replaced.

Display the name, part number and the copy count

of a replacement part that has been registered, and

reset the count.

A. Procedure



Press the [5. Parts counter] key.

3. "Parts counter menu screen"

Press the [1. Count of special parts] key.

4. "Parts counter (fixed) screen"

Press the arrow key to select a part that you

want to reset.

5. Press the [Count reset] key.

6. "Parts count reset screen"

Press the [YES] key when resetting the part

count. The part count is reset.

Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Parts counter

menu screen" with the part count not reset.


2-43

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

B. Count of special parts list

NO Parts name Count conditions

1 Toner collection box *1

2 Ozone filter /1 (Right side)

3 Deodorant filter (Rear side)

4 Dust-proof filter /1 (Right side)

5 Dust-proof filter /2 (Rear side)

6 Charging dust proof filter

7 Drum cartridge /Y *2

8 Drum /Y

9 Drum cleaning blade /Y

10 Lubricant applying unit /Y

11 —

12 Drum cartridge /M

13 Drum /M

14 Drum cleaning blade /M

15 Lubricant applying unit /M

16 —

17 Drum cartridge /C *2

18 Drum /C

19 Drum cleaning blade /C

20 Lubricant applying unit /C

21 —

22 Drum cartridge /K *1

23 Drum /K

24 Drum cleaning blade /K

25 Lubricant applying unit /K

26 —

27 Charging corona /Y *2

28 Charging wire assy /Y

29 Charging grid plate /Y

30 Charging corona /M

31 Charging wire assy /M

32 Charging grid plate /M

33 Charging corona /C

34 Charging wire assy /C

35 Charging grid plate /C

36 Charging corona /K *1

37 Charging wire assy /K

38 Charging grid plate /K

39 Transfer belt unit

40 Transfer belt

41 1st transfer roller /Y *2

42 1st transfer roller /M

43 1st transfer roller /C


2-44

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

44 1st transfer roller /K *1

45 2nd transfer roller /U

46 Transfer belt separation claw

47 Transfer belt cleaning unit

48 Belt cleaning brush unit

49 Toner collection sheet /1

50 Belt cleaning blade

51 2nd transfer roller /L

52 Separation discharging unit

53 Fixing cleaning unit

54 Fixing roller /U

55 Fixing roller /L

56 Developer /Y (Page) *2

57 Developer /Y (Page)

58 Developer /C (Page)

59 Developer /K (Page) *1

60 Developing unit /Y *2

61 Developing unit /M

62 Developing unit /C

63 Developing unit /K *1

64 Developer /Y (Distance) Displays developing sleeve travel distance (in meters)

65 Developer /M (Distance)

66 Developer /C (Distance)

67 Developer /K (Distance)

68 — —

69 FNS tray up/down motor 1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit1 count for each 1 paper exit in staple mode

70 FNS stapler /F 1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2-staple and the stitch-and-fold modes

71 FNS stapler /R 1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2-staple and the stitch-and-fold modes

72 FNS shift motor 1 count for each paper exit at even number of copies in the sort mode

73 FNS exit opening motor 1 count for starting the job of "large size" (A4R/8.5 x 11R or larger) in the staple mode, and 1 count for each paper exit1 count for starting each of the stitch-and-fold and folding jobs

74 FNS folding knife motor 1 count for each copy exit in each of the stitch-and-fold and folding and the three-folding modes

75 By-pass gate solenoid 1 count for each A4 / B5 / 8.5 x 11 / 16K copy exit in the staple mode

76 Tri-folding gate SD 1 count for each copy exit in the three-folding mode

77 Pl conveyance clutch /U 1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand

78 Pl feed roller /A /U

79 Pl feed roller /B /U

80 Pl reverse roller /U 1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand

81 Pl torque limiter /U



2-45

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

82 Pl conveyance clutch /L 1 count for each paper feed in PI lower stand

83 Pl feed roller /A /L

84 Pl feed roller /B /L

85 Pl reverse roller /L

86 Pl torque limiter /L

87 Trimmer blade 1 count for each cutter operation

88 PK punching unit (2 hole) 1 count for each punch operation

89 PK punching unit (3 hole)

90 PK punching unit (4 hole)

91 — —

92 ADF paper feed roller Original passage count in all modes

93 ADF feed roller

94 —

95 ADF feed prevention roller Original passage count in all modes

96 ADF exit solenoid 1 count for each original passage in the double side copy mode and the mixing original mode

97 ADF Dfeed clutch Single side copy mode: 1 count for each originalDouble side copy mode: 3 counts for each original

98 ADF reversal solenoid 1 count for each original passage in the double side copy mode and the mixing original mode

99 — —

100 Exposure ON time Accumulation of on-time (in : minute

101 Sub power switch 1 count each time the main switch turns off the power

102 Door SW 1 count each time the front door is opened

103 Toner supply door switch 1 count each time the toner supply door is opened

104 Main power SW 1 count each time the reset switch turns off the power

105 Pl regist clutch 1 count each time PI feeds a sheet

106 Punch motor 1 count for each punch operation

107 — —

108 Paper exit roller /A 1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit

109 Intermediate conveyance roller 1 count for each sheet in each of the FNS flat stapling, stitch-and-fold, folding and three-folding modes110 Stacking assist roller

111 — —

112 Fixing torque limiter *1

113 Registration cleaning sheet 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode2 counts in the double side copy mode

114 Ball bearing /U *1

115 Heat insulating sleeve /U

116 Intermediate convery. clutch /1 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode1 counts in the double side copy mode117 Intermediate convery. clutch /2

118 Intermediate convery. clutch /3

119 Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-1) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1



122 Feed/Dfeed rubber (By-pass) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-pass tray



2-46

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


*1 Count in all color modes25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exitin the single side copy mode, and 2 counts inthe double side copy mode= 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit inthe single side copy mode, and 4 counts in thedouble side copy mode

*2 Count only in full color or single color mode25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exitin the single side copy mode, and 2 counts inthe double side copy mode= 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit inthe single side copy mode, and 4 counts in thedouble side copy mode

123 Registration roller 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode2 counts in the double side copy mode124 Separation claw solenoid

125 Fixing upper lamp /1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1

126 Fixing upper lamp /2 *1

127 Fixing lower lamp

128 Fixing temp. sensor /3

129 Fixing temp. sensor /4

130 Paper feed roller (Tray-1) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1

131 Paper feed roller (Tray-2) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2

132 Paper feed roller ((Tray-3) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3

133 Paper feed roller (By-pass) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-pass tray

134 ADU conveyance clutch /1 1 count for each paper exit in the double side copy mode (no count is made in the single side copy mode)135 ADU conveyance clutch /2

136 ADU pre-registration clutch

137 Ball bearing /L *1

138 Heat insulating sleeve /L

139 Fixing drive gear

140 Decurler roller 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode2 counts in the double side copy mode

141 LCT paper feed roller 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the LCT

142 LCT feed/Dfeed roller

143 LCT feed clutch

144 LCT pre-registration clutch

145 Paper feed clutch (Tray-1) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1

146 Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-1)





151 Paper feed clutch (By-pass) 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the by-pass tray

152 Transfer earth plate unit 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode2 counts in the double side copy mode

153 Center fixing temp. sensor/U *1

154 Center fixing temp. sensor/L



2-47

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6.7.2 Count of each parts

This is used when you want to control the part

counter.

Set the part name, part number and the limit value,

and display and reset the copy count.

Up to 30 data from No. 01 to No. 30 can be set. A

count is taken for each passage of paper, regard-

less of the paper size.

Reference:

• When the copy count is in excess of a limit

value, an asterisk [*] is shown to the left of No.

A. Setting of each replacement part and dis-

play of the copy count

(1) Procedure

B. Resetting of each replacement part

(1) Procedure





Press the [2. Count of each parts] key.

4. "Copy count of each part screen"

Press the arrow key to select a number you

want to set or change.

5. Press one of the [Parts name setting], [P/N

setting] and [Limit setting] key.

6. Press an item you want to set or change out of

the [Parts name setting], [P/N setting] and

[Limit setting] key, and enter it with the alpha-

numeric keys.

• [Part name setting]: Enter a part name (8 digitsin alphanumeric)

• [P/N setting]: Enter a part number (9 digits inalphanumeric)

• [Limit setting]: Limit value (8 digits in numeric)

7. Press the [OK] key to update the data.


changed, press the [CANCEL] key.





Press the [2. Count of each parts] key.

4. "Count of each part screen"

Press the arrow key to select a number you

want to set or change.

5. Press the [COUNT RESET] key.

6. "Parts count reset screen"

Press the [YES] key when resetting a part

count. This resets the part counter.

Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Count of

each part" with the part count not reset.


2-48

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6.8 Password setting

Set the following passwords.

• Key operator password (4 digits): Password usedto enter the key operator mode.

• EKC master key code (8 digits): Passwordrequired when entering various EKC settingmodes.

• Weekly timer password (4 digits): Passwordrequired when entering various weekly timer set-ting modes.Note:

•A password can be set only when the setting

for use of the weekly timer is set to "Use" in

the key operator mode.

A. Procedure

Note:

• Setting "0000" for the key operator password

and the weekly timer password allows you to

use each mode with no password.

6.9 Telephone number setting

Set the customer support center telephone and

FAX numbers that are used in an emergency for a

service call and shown on the basic screen for help.

A. Procedure

Note:

• When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure

to use hyphens to fill up the blanks.



Press the [6. Password setting] key.

3. "Password setting mode screen"

Press the key of an item you want to set.

• Key operator password (4 digits)• EKC master key code (8 digits)• Weekly timer password (4 digits)

4. Enter a new password through the numeric

keys.






Press the [7. Telephone number setting] key.

3. "Customer support TEL/FAX setting screen"

Press either of the [Service centre Telephone

number (16 digits)] and [Service centre FAX

number (16)] keys that you want to set.

4. Enter a TEL or FAX number through the

numeric keys.





2-49

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6.10 M/C serial number setting

Display and set the serial numbers of the main body

and options.

A. Procedure

Note:

• The serial number of the main body cannot be

changed.

6.11 Indication of ROM version

Display the ROM version of the main body and

options.

A. Procedure

6.12 ISW

See chapter "Service tools."



Press the [8. M/C serial number setting] key.

3. "Serial number setting mode screen"

Press the key of an item you want to set and

enter a serial number through the alphanu-

meric keys.


5. To invalidate the setting that you have




Press the [9. Indication of ROM version] key.

3. "Indication of ROM version screen"

Each ROM version is displayed.




2-50

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6.13 Setting date input

Set the starting date of the total counter that is dis-

played on the LCD in the P function.

A. Procedure

6.14 Board change mode

When changing any of the following four types of

boards, be sure to set the serial number of the main

body in this setting.

• OPERATION (operation board /1)• OVERALL CB (overall control board)• NVRAM (memory board)• PRINTER (printer control board)

Note:

• The number of boards that can be replaced at

the same time is restricted only to two boards.

A. Procedure



Press the [12.Setting date input] key.

3. "Setting date input screen"

Enter an installation date through the numeric

keys.


5. To invalidate the setting that you have




Press the [13. Board change mode] key.

3. "Board change mode screen"

Select a key of the board that you have

replaced a part.

4. "Serial number input screen"

Enter the serial number of the main body

through the alphanumeric keys.





2-51

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7. 36 MODE

7.1 Setting method

This machine is provided with the 36 mode to make

various adjustment in this mode.

A. Procedure

7.2 Process adjustment

Make various adjustments around the process.

A. Procedure

1. With the reset switch (SW1) left ON, turn OFF

the main switch (SW2).

2. Turn ON the SW2 while pressing the numeric

buttons 3 and 6 at the same time. The "36

mode menu screen" is shown.

At this point, the machine enters the 36 mode

with the normal copy operation unavailable.

3. Press the item key on the liquid crystal display

(LCD) to show a setting screen of each item.

4. Confirm the details of input in the setting

screen of each item.

5. Turn OFF the SW2 to release the 36 mode.

6. New data will be effective after restarting.



Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.

3. "Process adjustment mode menu screen"

For the process adjustment, there are the fol-

lowing items provided:

[1. High voltage adjustment]

[2. Drum peculiarity adjustment]

[3. Sensor output adjustment]

[4. Exclusive paper setting]

[5. Recall standard data]

4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.


from each of the adjustment screen to the

"Process adjustment menu screen."


2-52

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.2.1 High voltage adjustment

For the high voltage adjustment, the following items

are provided. However, be sure not to conduct a

high voltage adjustment in the field.

[1. 1st transfer manual adj.]

[2. 2nd transfer manual adj.]

[3. HV adjustment (Separation AC)]

[4. HV adjustment (Separation DC)]

[5. Pre-transfer guide HV check]

7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment

Conduct the blade setting, charging potential cor-

rection, gamma, developer charge, L-detection

adjustment and the initial drum rotation.

A. Procedure

(1) Blade setting mode

Perform this adjustment when changing the belt

cleaning blade or the transfer belt. In this mode,

apply toner onto the transfer belt then clean with the

belt cleaning blade. This prevents the damages of

the transfer belt and the belt cleaning blade.

a. Procedure




3. "Process adjustment menu screen"

Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key.

4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen"

For the drum peculiarity adjustment, the follow-

ing items are provided:

[1. Blade setting mode]

[2. Automatic drum potential adj.]

[3. Automatic gamma adjustment]

[4. LD bias adjustment]

[5. Automatic developer charge]

[6. L-detect initial auto. adj.]

[7. Initial drum rotation]



from each of the adjustment screens to the

"Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen.







Press [1. Blade setting mode] key.

5. "Blade setting mode screen"

Press the [Start] key. This process completes

in about 15 seconds and complete message is

shown on the screen.


to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu

screen."


2-53

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(2) Automatic drum potential adjustment

Measure the charging potential of each drum of Y,

M, C and K to adjust automatically the developing

bias value and the charging voltage.

This adjustment is not necessary because of the

automatic gamma adjustment contain this adjust-

ment.

a. Procedure

(3) Automatic gamma adjustment

The gamma adjustment is performed automatically.

This adjustment can be shown in the key operator

mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1.

a. Procedure







Press [2. Automatic drum potential adjustment]

key.

5. "Automatic drum potential adjustment screen"


in about 20 seconds and the charging potential

is displayed for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/2

speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M,

C and K) on the screen, with an exit message

shown.



screen."







Press the [3. Automatic gamma adjustment]

key.

5. "Automatic gamma adjustment 0 screen"

There are 8 kinds of the gamma adjustment (0

to 7). However, conduct "Gamma auto adjust-

ment 0" in the field.

"Automatic gamma adjustment 0": Perform the

Dmax density adjustment, dot diameter adjust-

ment, automatic drum potential adjustment,

and the gamma adjustment. The developing

bias value is shown for each line speed (1/1

speed, 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each

color (Y, M, C and K) with a complete mes-

sage.


in about 2.5 minutes and the developing bias

value is displayed for each line speed (1/1

speed, 1/ 2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each

color (Y, M, C and K) on the screen with a com-

plete message.



screen."


2-54

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(4) LD bias adjustment

Perform this adjustment when replacing the write

unit.

Note:

• Do not perform this adjustment except when

replacing the write unit.

a. Procedure

1. Read the numeric value on the bar code

labeled [1] on the replacing write unit.







Press the [4. LD bias adjustment] key.

8050fs1025[1]

6. "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1) screen"

For the LD bias adjustment, the following items

are provided. Press the arrow key to select the

color of the write unit you just replaced.

• "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1)"• "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/2)"• "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/3)"• "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/1)"• "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/2)"• "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/3)"• "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/1)"• "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/2)"• "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/3)"• "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/1)"• "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/2)"• "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/3)"

7. Enter the numeric value on the bar code

labeled on the replacing write unit through the

numeric keys and press the [SET] key.

Note:

• Be sure to enter the same numeric value in

LS 1/1, LS 1/2, and LS 1/3.



screen."


2-55

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(5) Automatic developer charge

In this mode, after discharging developer from the

developing unit manually, a new developer is auto-

matically charged.

Note:

• Do not open the upper cover of the develop-

ing unit. Otherwise, dust gets in the unit caus-

ing image failure.

a. Procedure

1. Open the toner supply section.


developer charging plate [3] provided inside

the toner supply section [2]. Remove 2 screws

[4] and then remove the developer charging

funnel /L [5].

[2]

[3] [5]

[4][1]

8050fs1002

3. Set the developer charging plate /L [2] to the

shoulder screws [1] provided above the devel-

oping unit of a color the developer of which is

changed.

[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]

8050fs1003


2-56

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

4. Set the developer charging funnel /L [2] to the

developer charging plate [1].

Note:

• Be sure to attach the tip of the developer

charging funnel /L [2] securely to the toner

supply opening [3].

5. Set the developer charging funnel /U [2] pack-

aged together with developer to the developer

charging funnel /L [1].

Note:

• The developer charge funnel /U [2] is pack-

aged together with each developer. So, be

sure to avoid its reuse.


[1]

[3] [2] 8050fs1004

[1] [2] 8050fs1005






Press the [5. Automatic developer charge] key.

10. "Automatic developer charge Y screen"

Press the arrow key to select the color of

developer you want to charge.

For the automatic developer charge, the follow-


• Automatic developer charge Y• Automatic developer charge M• Automatic developer charge C• Automatic developer charge K

11. Press the [Start] key to introduce a new devel-

oper into the developer charging funnel /U.

12. Make sure that the developer has been

charged successfully before pressing the

[CANCEL] key.

13. When charging another developer, repeat

steps 3 to 11.



screen."

15. Return the installed parts back to their original

positions.

Note:

• After completion of this adjustment, be sure

to perform the L-detect initial auto. adjust-

ment. If printing is started without perform-

ing the L-detect initial auto. adjustment, a

proper image density cannot be obtained,

thus resulting in the change of developer

again.


2-57

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(6) L-detect initial automatic adjustment

Be sure to conduct this adjustment after a new

developer is charged.

Note:

• Do not print without conducting the L-detect

initial auto. adjustment. Otherwise, a proper

image density cannot be obtained, thus

resulting in the change of developer again.

a. Procedure

(7) Initial drum rotation

When remove the drum cartridge, be sure to con-

duct this operation to securely set the drum cou-

pling.

a. Procedure







Press the [6. L-detect initial auto. adjustment]

key.

5. "L-detect initial auto. adj. ALL screen"

Press the arrow key to select the color of a

developer that has been newly charged, and

then press the [Start] key.

For the L-detect initial auto. adj., the following

items are provided:

• L-detect initial auto. adj. All: Conduct all colorsof Y, M,C and K.

• L-detect initial auto. adj. YMC: Conduct Y, Mand C only.

• L-detect initial auto. adj. K: Conduct K only.• L-detect initial auto. adj. Y: Conduct Y only.• L-detect initial auto. adj. M: Conduct M only.• L-detect initial auto. adj. C: Conduct C only.

6. A message "Completed" is displayed.



screen."







Press the [7. Initial drum rotation] key.

5. "Initial drum rotation screen"


in about 10 seconds and complete message is

shown on the screen.



screen."


2-58

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.2.3 Sensor output check

For the sensor output check, the following items are

provided; however, do not conduct them in the field:

[1. Surface potential sensor output]

[2. Max. density sensor output]

[3. Gamma sensor output]

7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting

This setting is used when the user cannot obtain the

satisfactory results of transfer, separation or fixing

with the standard setting due to a special paper

being used.

This setting is applicable when [Exclusive paper A

to D] is selected in the key operator mode [Paper

type/ Special paper size set].

In default, the following paper data is entered for

each destination area.

• For Japan: 80 g/m2 color specified paper• For inch area: 105 g/m2 color specified paper• For metric area: 90 g/m2 color specified paper

Note:

• When setting data, be sure to follow the

instructions given by Minolta Technology

Support Center.

A. Procedure





Press the [4. Exclusive paper setting] key.

4. "User paper setting menu screen"

For the user paper setting menu, the following

items are provided which correspond to the

setting key of the same name in the key opera-

tor mode.

[1. Exclusive paper A setting]

[2. Exclusive paper B setting]

[3. Exclusive paper C setting]

[4. Exclusive paper D setting]

5. For setting, press the key of an item you want

to set. Set the following 12 types of setting for

each exclusive paper A to D.

• 2nd transfer offset Side 1• 2nd transfer offset Side 2• 2nd separation AC offset Side 1• 2nd separation AC offset Side 2• 2nd separation DC offset Side 1• 2nd separation DC offset Side 2• Fixing (U) roller temp (idle)• Fixing (U) roller temp (print)• Fixing (L) roller temp (idle)• Fixing (L) roller temp (print)• Fixing (U and L) roller temp. difference• Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width

<261mm• Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width

>=261mm• Line speed


to the "User paper setting menu screen."


2-59

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.2.5 Recall standard data

Reset the adjusted set values of process adjust-

ment to the standard data. (factory default data)

Note:

• Data for automatic drum potential, automatic

gamma, L-detect initial auto. and exclusive

paper setting adjustment cannot be reset to

the standard data.

A. Procedure





Press the [5. Recall standard data] key.

4. "Recall standard data: Process adjustment

screen"

Press the [YES] key when recalling the stan-

dard data. Pressing the [NO] key or the [PRE-

VIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Process

adjustment menu screen" without recalling the

standard data.


2-60

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.3 Image adjustment

Conduct various image adjustments.

A. Procedure

7.3.1 Magnification adjustment

Adjust various magnifications.

A. Procedure



Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.

3. "Image adjustment menu screen"

For the image adjustment, the following items

are provided:

[1. Magnification adjustment]

[2. Timing adjustment]

[3. RADF adjustment]

[4. Centring adjustment]

[5. Non-image area erase check]





"Image adjustment menu screen."





Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.

4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen"

For the magnification adjustment, the following

items are provided:

[1. Printer vertical mag.adj.]

[2. Printer horizontal mag.adj.]

[3. Scanner vertical mag.adj.]

[4. Belt line speed adjustment]

[5. Fixing line speed adjustment]




"Magnification adjustment menu screen."


2-61

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment

Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer sys-

tem.

This adjustment changes the line speed of the reg-

istration roller, drum, transfer belt and the fixing.


mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1.

Note:

• For the printer vertical magnification adjust-

ment, the following two methods are available.

Be sure to take care when an adjustment is

made.


Used when the vertical magnification has

been changed due to the wear of the regis-

tration roller or the heat shrinkage of

paper.

(2) Belt line speed adjustment


been changed due to causes other than

the above.

• In default, the printer vertical magnification

adjustment on side 2 is not reflected to the

image. When adjusting the vertical magnifica-

tion on side 2, use the memory switch in the

key operator mode to turn ON side 2 drum

clock adjustment mode. However, since the

line speed is switched for each image creation

process on side 1 and side 2, the print speed

is reduced to about 1/4.

a. Procedure







Press the [1. Printer vertical mag. adj.] key.

5. "Printer vertical mag. adjustment screen"

Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.

6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the

START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).

7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale.

• Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)Within ± 1mm against 205.7 mm

8. When the value is not within the standard,

press the C button while pressing the P button.

9. "Printer vertical magnification adjustment

screen"

For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the

following items are provided. Press the [NEXT

ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT]

key to select an item you want to adjust.

• "Printer vertical mag. adjustment": Side 1 andside 2 are adjusted at the same time.

Setting range: -300 to +300, 1 step = 0.01%

• "Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustmentSetting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%



• "By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2adjustment


• "Back tray 4 offset": LCT side 2 adjustmentSetting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%

10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric

keys and press the [SET] key.

11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value

can be obtained.


to the "Magnification adjustment menu

screen."

205.7 1

8050fs1006


2-62

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(2) Printer horizontal magnification adjustment

Adjust the horizontal magnification of the printer

system.

This adjustment changes the horizontal magnifica-

tion in image processing prior to the laser exposure.



a. Procedure







Press the [2. Printer horizontal magnification

adjustment] key.

5. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment

screen"




7. Measure the horizontal magnification with a

scale.

• Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)Within ± 1 mm against 190 mm



190 8050fs1007

9. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment

screen"

For the printer horizontal magnification adjust-

ment, the following items are provided. Press

the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS

ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want

to adjust.

• "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment":Side 1 and side 2 are adjusted at the sametime.





• "By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2adjustment


• "Tray 4 offset (ADU)": LCT side 2 adjustmentSetting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%




can be obtained.



screen."


2-63

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(3) Scanner vertical magnification adjustment

Adjust the vertical magnification of the scanner sys-

tem.

This adjustment changes the scan speed.



a. Procedure







Press the [3. Scanner vertical mag. adj.] key.

5. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen"



START button with a test chart set to the origi-

nal glass.

7. Measure the vertical magnification with a

scale.

• Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)Within ± 1 mm against 200 mm

200 8050fs1008

8. When the value is not within to the standard,


9. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen"

Enter a numeric value through the numeric


• Setting range: -40 to +40, 1 step = 0.05%


can be obtained.



screen."


2-64

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer sys-

tem.

This adjustment charges line speed of the transfer

belt.

Note:

• For the printer vertical magnification adjust-

ment, the following two methods are available.

Be sure to take care when an adjustment is

made.



been changed due to the wear of the regis-

tration roller or the heat shrinkage of

paper.



been changed due to causes other than

the above.

a. Procedure







Press the [4. Belt line speed adjustment] key.

5. "Belt line speed adjustment screen"




7. Measure the vertical magnification with a

scale.

• Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size)Within ± 1 mm against 205.7 mm

8. If the specification is not satisfied, press the C

button while pressing the P button.

9. "Belt line speed adjustment screen"



• Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01%


can be obtained.



screen."

205.7 1

8050fs1006


2-65

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(5) Fixing line speed adjustment

When replacing the fixing roller/U, /L and transfer

belt, use this adjustment method to adjust the fixing

roller line speed.

When the fixing line speed is faster than the transfer

belt, this results in an increased vertical magnifica-

tion or transfer jittering. And when the fixing line

speed is slower than the transfer belt, this results in

the trailing edge of the image will be soiled.

Note:

• When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper

for fixing speed adjustment" (P/N 65AA-991*).

Otherwise, the fixing line speed cannot be

accurately adjusted.

a. Procedure







Press the [5. Fixing line speed adjustment] key.

5. "Set the cyan density screen"

Press the [DENSITY] key.

6. With the fixing adjustment paper set to the by-

pass tray, press the START button to output a

test pattern.

Based on a cyan half-tone, a test pattern is

output.

Note:

• When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper

for fixing speed adjustment." Otherwise, it

cannot be accurately adjusted.

7. Compare the fixing adjustment density patches

(upper and lower limit samples of density that

are packed with the "paper for fixing speed

adjustment") with the cyan density of the out-

putted paper, and check to see if the cyan den-

sity of the output paper is within the limit of the

fixing density standard patches.

8. When it is not within the limit, press the C but-

ton while pressing the P button.




• Setting range: 0 to 255

10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the density ges inside

the limit.


Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.

12. "Push [Sample] and print 8 sheets screen"

Press the [8 SAMPLES] key.

13. With 8 sheets of the fixing adjustment paper

set to the by-pass tray, press the START button

to output a test pattern.

Note:

• Be sure to conduct this operation with the

copy count set to 1.

14. With the image formation line speed variable

automatically at intervals of about 25 seconds,

8 sheets of test patterns based on cyan half-

tone are output.

15. With a pen, write serial numbers from 1 to 8 on

the output sheets in order of the paper exit

(bottom to top).


2-66

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.3.2 Timing adjustment

Adjust various timings.

A. Procedure

16. Comparing the output image on the first sheet

with the remaining 7 output sheets, find out an

output sheet in which the distance between the

magenta line at the lead edge and the first

black line at the trail edge (10 lines at intervals

of 1 mm) gets 1 mm stretched.

Note:

• The image does not stretch gradually for

each output sheet. It suddenly stretches at a

certain sheet. Therefore, be sure to measure

each sheet in order of output.

17. Press the C button while pressing the P button.


Enter the number of the output sheet that

stretches 1 mm through the numeric keys and

press the [SET] key.



screen."

8050fs1009





Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.

4. "Timing adjustment menu screen"

For the timing adjustment, the following items

are provided:

[1. Printer lead edge timing adj.]

[2. Printer registration loop adj.]

[3. Printer pre-registration adj.]

[4. Printer erasure amount adj.]

[5. Scanner re-start timing adj.]

[6. RADF registration loop adj.]

[7. Writing unit skew initial adj.]

[8. Auto. color registration adj.]

[9. Color registration manual adj.]




"Timing adjustment menu screen."


2-67

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(1) Printer lead edge timing adjustment

Adjust the lead edge timing.

This adjustment changes the paper restart timing

from the registration roller.


mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1.

Note:

• Be sure the printer vertical magnification has

been adjusted.

a. Procedure






4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen"

Press the [1. Printer lead edge timing adj.] key.

5. "Lead edge timing (Tray 1) screen"

For the printer lead edge timing adjustment,

the following items are provided. Press the

[NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS

ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want

to adjust.

• "Lead edge timing (Tray 1)"• "Lead edge timing (Tray 2)"• "Lead edge timing (Tray 3)"• "Lead edge timing (Bypass)"• "Lead edge timing (Tray 4)"• "Lead edge timing (ADU)"• "Tray large size normal paper offset"• "Tray large size thick paper offset"• "Tray small size normal paper offset"• "Tray small size thick paper offset"• "Bypass large size normal paper offset"• "Bypass large size thick paper offset"• "Bypass small size normal paper offset"• "Bypass small size thick paper offset"• "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)"• "Large size thick paper offset (ADU)"• "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)"• "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)"

Note:

• Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the

paper feed direction

• Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the


• Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more



7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.

8. Set the copy setting according to the item

adjusted and press the START button to output

a test pattern (No. 16).

9. Measure the lead edge timing with a scale.

• Standard value: 20 mm ± 0.5 mm



11. "Printer lead edge timing screen"



• Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.1 mm

12. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is

obtained.


to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."

20

8050fs1010


2-68

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(2) Printer registration loop adjustment

Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration

roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or

paper jamming in the registration section.



a. Procedure







Press the [2. Printer registration loop adj.] key.

5. "Printer registration loop adjustment screen

(Tray 1)"

For the printer registration loop adjustment, the


ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-

MENT] key to select an item you want to

adjust.

• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 2 L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 2 S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 3 L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 3 S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment

(Bypass L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment

(Bypass S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 4 L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 4 S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU L)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU S)"• "Printer registration loop adjustment (Thick)"

Note:

• Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the


• Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the


• Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more




8. Set the copy according to the item that has

been adjusted and press the START button to

output a test pattern (No. 16).

9. If the printer registration loop amount is not

appropriate, press the C button while pressing

the P button.

10. "Printer registration loop adj. screen"





obtained.




2-69

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(3) Printer pre-registration adjustment

Adjust the paper loop amount in each tray and the

ADU pre-registration roller section to remove paper

skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the pre-reg-

istration section.



a. Procedure(4) Printer erasure amount adjustment

Conduct an erasure amount adjustment.



a. Procedure







Press the [3. Printer pre-registration adj.] key.

5. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen (Tray 1)"

For the printer pre-registration adjustment, the




adjust.

• "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 1)"• "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 2)"• "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 3)"• "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 4)"• "Printer pre-registration adj. (ADU)"






9. When the printer pre-registration amount is not


the P button.

10. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen"





obtained.









Press the [4. Printer erasure amount adj.] key.

5. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen"




nal glass.

7. Check the printer erasure amount.

• Standard value: 3mm or less



9. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen"





obtained.




2-70

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(5) Scanner re-start timing adjustment

Adjust re-start timing of original scanning.

In this adjustment, the starting position for reading

while in the original scanning mode is adjusted.



Note:

• Make sure that the printer timing adjustment

has been completed.

a. Procedure

(6) RADF registration loop adjustment

Adjust the original loop amount in the RADF regis-

tration roller section to remove paper skew and

wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration sec-

tion.



a. Procedure







Press the [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.] key.

5. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen"




nal glass.

7. Check the scanner re-start timing.

• Standard value: 3mm or less



9. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen"



• Setting range: -10 to +20, 1 step = 0.1mm


obtained.









Press the [6. RADF registration loop adj.] key.

5. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen"


6. Select the A3 paper and press the START but-

ton with a test chart set to the original glass.

7. If the RADF registration loop amount is not


the P button.

8. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen"





obtained.




2-71

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(7) Writing unit skew initial adjustment

Store a skew correction position data along the

main scan of a new write unit (Y, M and C only) in

the memory board (MB).

The data is updated automatically by the auto. color

registration adjustment.

Note:

• When any of the write units Y, M and C is

replaced, be sure to start the main body in the

36 mode for this adjustment.

a. Procedure

(8) Auto. color registration adjustment

Make this adjustment when there is a color registra-

tion error. The main scan, sub-scan, horizontal

magnification and the skew of color registration

error are automatically adjusted.



Note:

• This auto. color registration adjustment has a

larger correction area than that of the color

registration auto correction in the user mode.

So, be sure to perform this adjustment when a

SC45-20 occurs.

a. Procedure




3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen"



Press the [7. Writing unit skew initial adj.] key.

5. "Writing unit skew int. adj. screen"

Press the [Start] key.

6. Adjustment starts for all the write units Y, M

and C at the same time, and a message "Com-

plete" is shown in about a minute.









Press the [8. Auto. color registration adj.] key.

5. "Color registration adj. screen"


6. The color registration adjustment starts and a

message "Complete" is shown in about 2 min-

utes.

When the error message appears, perform an

error correction referring to the below.

• Error 1: It does not converge within the stan-dard value. The patch density may be too light.Check around the drum unit and per-form the gamma automatic adjustment(0). Then perform this adjustment.

• Error 2: The difference of the color registrationis too much.

• Error 3: The other errorSC other than the color registrationautomatic adjustment may occur.Restart the main body in the normalmode to check for SC code.

7. "Color registration adj. screen"

When pressing the [LIST] key, the main scan,

sub-scan, horizontal magnification and the

skew of Y, M and C compared based on K after

adjustment are shown.




2-72

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(9) Color registration manual adjustment (par-

tial horizontal adjustment)

With respect to the main scan, entire horizontal

magnification, partial horizontal magnification, sub-

scan, inclination and the scan inclination, the regis-

tration error amount of Y, M and C compared based

on K is shown on the operation panel. The partial

horizontal magnification that cannot be corrected

automatically is manually adjusted.

Note:

• Be sure that the printer vertical and horizontal

magnifications have been complete.

• Make sure that the auto. color registration

adjustment has been completed.

a. Procedure







Press the [9. Color registration manual adj.]

key.

5. "Color registration manual adj. screen"



START button to output a test pattern.

Place the test pattern [1] outputted securely

against the original positioning plate /L [2] and

the original positioning plate /R [3] to set it to

the original glass, and close the DF or platen

cover.

Note:

• When setting the test pattern to the original

glass, be sure to take check of the setting

direction and position.

• Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C,

K) in the [Test pattern density setting] of 36

mode is set to 255. If not, it results in an

error.


8. "Color registration manual adj. screen"

Press the [SCAN] key to scan the test pattern.

9. The amount of error of the "MainScan" (main

scan), "Mag(ALL)" (entire horizontal magnifica-

tion), "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnifi-

cation), "SubScan" (sub-scan), "Incline"

(inclination) and the "ScanBend" (scan incline)

of Y, M and C are compared based on K and

result are shown at "Rest" section on the oper-

ation panel (unit is pixel).

8050fs1011[1]

[3]

[2]


2-73

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed for all the

items.

When any item is not within the standard, an

error code is displayed for each cause together

with an NG. Make an error correction referring

to the below:

When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan",

"Mag(ALL)", "SubScan" or "Incline," perform

the auto. color registration adjustment again.

• Error 1: A chart pattern cannot be detected.Improper positioning of the chart.

• Error 2: The setting direction of a chart isupside down.Improper positioning of the chart.

• Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected.A different type of chart.

• Error 4: Adjustment is impossible.Software bugged.

• Error 5: Not within the standard value.Re-adjust it.

• Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality.Check the installation of memoryboard.

• Error 7: Memory other than those specified isaccessed.Software bugged.

• Error 8: Memory related error.Software bugged.

• Error 9: Program error.Software bugged.

• Error 10: The chart is skew.Improper positioning of the chart.

• Error 11: Image header information read error.Software bugged.

• Error 12: An argument set error.Software bugged.

• Error 13: A measurement error.Improper positioning of the chart, or adefective chart.

11. When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan",

"Mag(ALL)" or "Mag(PART)," open the toner

supply section and loosen 2 screws [1] pro-

vided near the developing unit of a color from

which an "NG" is displayed. Then, slide the

adjustment plate [2] up and down to adjust the

partial horizontal magnification. Moving the

adjustment plate [2] upward reduces the partial

horizontal magnification data (minus) and mov-

ing the plate downward increases it (plus).

• Adjustment targetMove the adjustment plate [2] by referring to the"Rest" of "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal mag-nification) (unit: pixel) displayed at the operationpanel. The scale of the adjustment plate [2]changes about 0.5 pixel per notch.


to the "Timing adjustment menu screen."

13. Conduct the color registration adjustment

referring to (8) Auto. color registration adjust-

ment.

14. Repeat steps 4 to 13 until "OK" is displayed.



[1]

[2]

8050fs1012


2-74

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.3.3 RADF adjustment

Conduct the original size adjustment, original stop

position adjustment and the sensor adjustment of

the RADF.

A. Procedure

(1) RADF original size adjustment

Conduct this adjustment when the RADF original

size is not properly detected.

a. Procedure





Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key.

4. "RADF adjustment menu screen"

For the RADF adjustment, the following items

are provided:

[1. RADF original size adjustment]

[2. RADF orig. stop position adj.]

[3. RADF sensor adjustment]




"RADF adjustment menu screen."







Press the [1. RADF original size adjustment]

key.

5. "RADF original size adjustment (A4) or (8.5 x

11) screen"

With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11

(for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,

press the [Start] key.

6. After confirmation of a message "Complete,"

press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.

7. "RADF original size adjustment (A5R) or (5.5 x

8.5R) screen"

With the A5R (for metric machine) or 5.5 x

8.5R (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,



press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key.

9. "RADF original size adjustment (A4R) or (8.5 x

11R) screen"

With the A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R

(for inch machine) paper set to the RADF,



press the [COPY SCREEN] key.

11. Make sure that the RADF original size is prop-

erly detected.

12. Press the C button while pressing P button.


to the "RADF adjustment menu screen."


2-75

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(2) RADF original stop position adjustment

Conduct the original stop position leading edge tim-

ing (leading edge timing) adjustment of the RADF.

Note:

• Make sure that the printer lead edge timing

adjustment and the scanner re-start timing

adjustment have been completed.

a. Procedure

(3) RADF sensor adjustment

Conduct this adjustment when malfunction occurs

in the reflective type sensors.

a. Procedure







Press the [2. RADF orig. stop position] key.

5. "Front plain paper/thick paper screen"

For the RADF orig. stop position adj., the fol-

lowing items are provided. Press the [NEXT

ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUST-MENT] key to select an item you want to

adjust.

[Normal & Thick paper (Front side)]

[Thin paper (Front side)]

[Normal & Thick paper (Back side)][Thin paper (Back side)]


7. With the original setting set to the copy mode

according to an item you want to adjust, set the

test chart to the RADF. And select the A3

paper and press the START button.

8. Check the RADF leading edge timing.

• Standard value: 3 mm or less







can be obtained.


to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."







Press the [3. RADF sensor adjustment] key.

5. "RADF sensor adjustment screen"

Close the RADF and press the [Start] key.

The sensitivity of the RADF sensors are auto-

matically adjusted.


to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."


2-76

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.3.4 Centring adjustment

Adjust the mis-centering of images vertical to the

paper feed direction.

A. Procedure

(1) Printer centring adjustment

This adjustment changes the laser writing start tim-

ing.



Note:

• Be sure that the printer horizontal magnifica-

tion has been completed.

a. Procedure





Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key.

4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen"

For the centering adjustment, the following

items are provided:

[1. Printer centring adjustment]

[2. Scanner centring adjustment]

[3. RADF centring adjustment]




"Centring adjustment mode menu screen."







Press the [1. Printer centring adjustment] key.

5. "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1) screen"

For the printer centering adjustment, the fol-

lowing items are provided. Press the [NEXT



adjust.

• "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1)"• "Printer centring adj. (Tray 2)"• "Printer centring adj. (Tray 3)"• "Printer centring adj. (Bypass)"• "Printer centring adj. (Tray 4)"• "Printer centring adj. (ADU)"• "Large size offset (Tray 1)"• "Small size offset (Tray 1)"• "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 1)"• "Large size offset (Tray 2)"• "Small size offset (Tray 2)"• "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 2)"• "Large size offset (Tray 3)"• "Small size offset (Tray 3)"• "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 3)"• "Large size offset (Bypass)"• "Small size offset (Bypass)"• "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Bypass)"• "Large size offset (Tray 4)"• "Small size offset (Tray 4)"• "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)"• "Large size thick paper offset (ADU)"• "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)"• "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)"• "8.5 x 5.5 normal paper offset (ADU)"• "8.5 x 5.5 thick paper offset (ADU)"

Note:

• Large size: 300mm or more in length in the


• Small size: 300mm or less in length in the


• Thick Paper: 106g/m2 or more


7. Select the paper size and the type of paper

according to an item you want to adjust, and

press the START button to output a test pattern

(No. 16).


2-77

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(2) Scanner centring adjustment

Adjust the centring when scanning the platen origi-

nal.

This adjustment changes the reading timing of the

CCD.



Note:

• Make sure that the printer centering adjust-

ment has been completed.

a. Procedure

8. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed

direction and check the amount of error of the

lines on both sides.

• Standard value: Within ± 2mm







can be obtained.


to the "Centring adjustment mode menu

screen."







Press the [2. Scanner centring adjustment]

key.

5. "Scanner (platen) centring adjustment screen"




nal glass.











obtained.



screen."


2-78

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(3) RADF centring adjustment

Adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF origi-

nal.

This adjustment changes the reading timing of the

CCD.



Note:

• Make sure that the printer centering and scan-

ner centring adjustment has been completed.

a. Procedure






4. "Centring adjustment menu screen"

Press the [3. RADF centring adjustment] key.

5. "RADF centring adjustment (Front) screen"

For the RADF centering adjustment, the follow-

ing items are provided. Press the [NEXT



adjust.

• "RADF centring adjustment (Front)"• "RADF centring adjustment (Back)"




nal glass.











obtained.



screen."


2-79

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.3.5 Non-image area erase check

When installing the copier or moving its installation

location, check to see if the "non-image area erase"

function of the copy application functions works sat-

isfactorily.

Preparations made in advance:

• Open fully the RADF or platen cover.• There should not be anything on the original

glass.• Clean the original glass.

A. Procedure

B. Error message and Handling

If the error is detected while perform the "non-image

area erase check" mode, following error message

will be displayed on the operation panel.

(1) Error message 1

Adjust for Moderate Brightness.

The Non-image area erase function may not oper-

ate correctly with dark (density) originals.

Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns

of Service manual.

Handling 1

When the "non-image area erase" function is not

used very frequently, or when copy originals that

have a dark background are not copied very fre-

quently in the "non-image area erase," the copier

can be used in the current installation location.

However, when copy originals that have a dark

background are frequently copied, install the copier

in a location or in a direction where less external

light get in (darker) than the present installation

location, and check the "non-image area erase

check mode" again.

(2) Error message 2

Adjust for Extreme Brightness.

In many case, the non-image area erase function

will not operate correctly.

Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns

of Service manual.

Handling 2

When the "non-image area erase" function is not

used very frequently, the copier can be used in the

current installation location. However, the outside-

original erasure function is frequently used, install

the copier in a location or in a direction where less

external light get in (darker) than the present instal-

lation location, and check the "non-image area

erase check mode" again. At this time, when there

is a bright light source such as a fluorescent light

installed directly above the copier, reconsider the

installation location or direction, or take some mea-

sures to shield the light source and check the "non-

image area erase check mode" again.





Press the [5. Non-image area erase check]

key.

4. "Non-image area erase check screen"


5. Make sure that a message "Normal adjustment

selected ..." is shown on the operation panel.

When a message "Does not function satisfac-

torily ..." is shown, refer to "B. Error message

and Handling," to conduct the non-image area

erase check again.


to the "Image adjustment menu screen."


2-80

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


Reset the adjustment values of image adjustment to

the standard data. (factory default data)

Note:

• Data for the printer vertical magnification,

RADF registration loop, auto. color registra-

tion, color registration manual, RADF original

size, RADF original stop position and RADF

sensor adjustment cannot be reset to stan-

dard data.

A. Procedure






4. "Recall standard data (image adjustment data)

screen"


dard data. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVI-

OUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Image

adjustment menu screen" without recalling the

standard data.


2-81

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.4 Image quality adjustment

Conduct various image quality adjustments.

A. Procedure

7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment

Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner.

When color reproduction is in a poor condition, usu-

ally conduct the printer gamma correction.

When changing the CCD unit, exposure lamp (L1),

original glass or each scanner mirror, conduct this

adjustment.

Note:

• Scanner gamma has been adjusted for each

machine. Please be noted that the scanner

gamma data is rewritten to the mean value if

the [Adj. data reset] key in the "Scanner

gamma adjustment screen" is pressed.

A. Procedure



Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.

3. "Image quality mode menu screen"

For the image quality adjustment, the following

items are provided:

[1. Scanner gamma adjustment]

[2. Printer gamma adjustment]

[3. Sharpness adjustment]

[4. Contrast adjustment]

[5. Image judge adjustment]

[6. ACS adjustment]

[7. Density adjustment]

[8. Tone adjustment]





"Image quality mode menu screen."

1. After replacing a part, place a test chart on the

original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and

press the START button.

2. Check for the foggy background or color bal-

ance.

3. If there is abnormality, enter the 36 mode.




Press the [1. Scanner gamma adjustment] key.

6. "Scanner gamma adjustment screen"

Press the [Adj. data reset] key.

Press the [YES] key when rewriting the scan-

ner gamma mean value. Press the [NO] to

return to the "Scanner gamma adjustment

screen" without rewriting.


to the "Image quality mode menu screen."


2-82

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment

When the color reproduction is in poor condition,

conduct this adjustment to correct gradation.

A. Procedure

(1) Printer gamma offset adjustment

Conduct this adjustment when the color reproduc-

tion varies with copy modes to correct the gradation

in a high light density section and adjust the density

in the background.

Note:

• For the printer gamma offset adjustment,

adjustment methods of 0 to 5 are available for

each screen type. It is possible to divide the

gradation in 256 into 6 parts of 0 to 5 and

adjust the entire ranges from "0: Low density

section" to "5: High density section."

• In default, adjustment is limited only to "0 (low

density section)." When setting DIPSW 28-4 to

1, adjustment can be made on the entire

ranges of 0 to 5.

a. Procedure





Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key.

4. For the printer gamma adjustment, the follow-


[1. Printer gamma offset adj.]

[2. Printer gamma sensor adj.]

[3. Printer screen gradation adj.]



from each of adjustment screen to the "Printer

gamma adjustment menu screen."






4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen"

Press the [1. Printer gamma offset adj.] key.


2-83

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

5. "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0) screen"

For the printer gamma offset adjustment, the




adjust.

• "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0 to 5)"• "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS150) (0 to 5)"• "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS200) (0 to 5)"• "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS150) (0 to 5)"• "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-8) (0 to 5)"• "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-2) (0 to 5)"

The following shows the copy mode to which

each adjustment is reflected.

(LS200): Line screen/High resolution

(LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone

(DS200): Dot screen/High resolution

(DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone

(ED-8):Text section to be used together with

the screens above.

(ED-2): High compression


7. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray

and press the START button to print a test pat-

tern.

8. Check the test pattern that has been outputted.

• Make sure that the high light density startingsection of C and K is uniform, and evenbetween the gray reference lines [1].

9. When they are not even, press the C button

while pressing the P button.

8050fs1015

YM

[1]

CK

10. "Printer gamma offset adjustment screen"

Press the key of a color (C or K) you want to

adjust, enter a numeric value through the

numeric keys and press the [SET] key.

• Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker)

Note:

• There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3]

provided for each line speed. Be sure to use

the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered

by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into

keys [1/2] and [1/3].


obtained.

12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1]

created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray

balance at the square marks line [2] and [3] is

the same.

8050fs1016

YM

[1]

[6]

[3][2][4][5]

CK


2-84

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(2) Printer gamma sensor adjustment

When a poor color reproduction results even after

the automatic gamma adjustment, conduct this

adjustment to correct gradation.

The printer gamma correction that is carried out

automatically and periodically uses a gamma sen-

sor to read patterns on the transfer belt. So, there is

a possibility of the gamma sensor not being accu-

rately adjusted due to the change in characteristic

of the gamma sensor. This adjustment use the

scanner to correct the gamma sensor for accurate

printer gamma adjustment.



a. Procedure

13. When the gray balance is not the same, press

the key of a color (Y or M) you want to adjust,

enter a numeric value through the numeric



Note:

• There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3]

provided for each line speed. Be sure to use

the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered

by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into

keys [1/2] and [1/3].

• How to match the gray balanceTake notice of the gray patches [4] made up of49 colors of C, M and Y. In the 49 patches, Mgets darker as going right to left. And Y getsdarker as going down from up. However, C isfixed. The patch [5] at the center is the samecolor as the gray [2]. The patches [6] positionedat the four corners of the patch [5] is the samecolor as the gray [3]. Out of the 49 patches,select a gray of the same gray balance as thegray [6]. e.g.) When a patch on the lower right side ismore suitable than the patch [5] at the center:Adjust M and Y in the positive direction.When a patch on the upper left side is moresuitable than the patch [5] at the center: AdjustM and Y in the negative direction.


15. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray

and press the START button to print a test pat-

tern.

16. Repeat steps 13 to 15 until you can get a satis-

factory result.


to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu

screen."







Press the [2. Printer gamma sensor adj.] key.


2-85

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

5. "Printer gamma sensor adj. (LS200) screen"

For the printer gamma sensor adjustment, the




adjust.

• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS200)"• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS150)"• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS200)"• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS150)"• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment

(CONTONE)"• "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (ED)"

The following shows the copy mode to whicheach adjustment is reflected:(LS200): Line screen/High resolution(LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone(DS200): Dot screen/High resolution(DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone(CONTONE): Text section to be used together

with the screens above.

(ED): High compression

Note:

• A screen in which the screen selection is

turned off by the key operator mode-memory

switch is not displayed.


7. With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11

(for inch machine) paper set in the by-pass

tray, press the START button to output a test

pattern.

8. "Please load output paper ... screen"

After completion of the test pattern output, the

display returns automatically to the adjustment

scren.

The outputted test pattern [1] pressed securely

against the original positioning plate /L [3] and

the original positioning plate /R [4], set it to the

original glass.

Note:

Put the green triangular mark [2] on the left

side.

9. With 10 sheets of copy paper (white) placed on

the test chart, close the RADF or platen cover.

Note:

• Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise,

the printer gradation cannot be corrected

properly.

10. Press the [Start] key.

Note:

• Start cannot be made when paper is not set

in the by-pass tray.

11. When the chart is scanned with no problem

found, the gamma sensor is adjusted, the

printer gamma correction is made and a mes-

sage "Complete" is displayed.

8050fs1017

[3]

[2]

[4]

[1]


2-86

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(3) Printer screen gradation adjustment

Adjust a tone jump (in which gradation is not contin-

uous).

a. Procedure

12. If any trouble should be found, an error code is

displayed for each cause. Repair the error

referring to the below.

• Error 1: Improper positioning of the chart.• Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is

upside down.Improper positioning of the chart.

• Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected.A different type of chart.

• Error 4: Adjustment is impossible.Software bugged.

• Error 5: Not within the standard value.Re-adjust it.

• Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality.Check the installation of memoryboard.

• Error 7: Memory other than those specified isaccessed.Software bugged.

• Error 8: Memory related error.Software bugged.

• Error 9: Program error—Software bugged.• Error 10: The chart is skew.

Improper positioning of the chart.• Error 11: Image header information read error.

Software bugged.• Error 12: RGB data abnormality.

Chart is wrong, or software is bugged.• Error 13: Argument set error.

Software bugged.• Error 31: Sensor value abnormality - Re-adjust

it.• Error 51: Regression calculation abnormality -

Re-adjust it.• Error 52: Array number overflow - Software

bugged.• Error 53: Regression order abnormality - Soft-

ware bugged.• Error 54: Selected screen information abnor-

mality - Software bugged.• Error 55: Color information abnormality - Soft-

ware bugged.

13. "Printer gamma sensor adj. screen"

Press the [Adj. data reset] key if you want to

return to the factory default data.

Press the [YES] key to reset the adjusted

printer gamma sensor data and return to the

factory default data.

Press the [NO] key to return to the "Printer

gamma sensor adj. screen" without data reset.



screen."




3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen"



Press the [3. Printer screen gradation adj.] key.

5. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y) screen"

For the printer screen gradation adjustment,

the following items are provided.

"Printer screen gradation adj. (Y)"

"Printer screen gradation adj. (M)"

"Printer screen gradation adj. (C)"

"Printer screen gradation adj. (K)"


7. Set the A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray

and press the START button to output a test

pattern.

8. Five sheets of test pattern are automatically

outputted. Check them to see if there is a tone

jump found in them.

9. When a tone jump is found in them, press the

C button while pressing the P button.

10. "Printer screen gradation adj."

Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PRE-

VIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a color in

which a tone jump has occurred.


2-87

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment

Conduct the sharpness adjustment or, this is car-

ried out when moire reproduced.

Use this adjustment for changing the center value

for the sharpness adjustment in the user mode.

A. Procedure

11. Enter one less numeric value than the current

and press the [SET] key.

• Setting range: -3 to +1

12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the tone jump disap-

pears.



screen."1. Enter the 36 mode.




Press the [3. Sharpness adjustment] key.

4. "Sharpness adjustment menu screen"




nal glass.



keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key.

• Setting range: -5 (soft/less moire) to +5 (sharp/more moire)

8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable.




2-88

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.4.4 Contrast adjustment

Adjust the contrast.


for the contrast adjustment in the user mode.

A. Procedure

7.4.5 Image judge adjustment

Adjust the threshold value of the original image

judgement.

A. Procedure

(1) Dot detect adjustment

Adjust the dot discrimination threshold value of the

original image.

a. Procedure





Press the [4. Contrast adjustment] key.

4. "Contrast adjustment menu screen"




nal glass.




• Setting range: -5 (contrast increased) to +5(contrast reduced)








Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.

4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen"

For the image judge adjustment, the following

items are provided:

[1. Dot detect adjustment]

[2. Color text adjustment]

[3. Dot/Text area adjustment]




"Image judge adjustment mode menu screen."






4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen"

Press the [1. Dot detect adjustment] key.

5. "Dot detect adjustment R screen"



2-89

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(2) Color text adjustment

Adjust the color text discrimination threshold value

of the original image.


for the color text adjustment in the user mode.

a. Procedure



nal glass.

7. A dot detection pattern is outputted.

This output pattern shows how the original

image is discriminated as an image.

• Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot.• White section: Discriminated as a picture.• Black section: Discriminated as a black text.• Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text.


9. "Dot detect adjustment R screen"

For the dot detection adjustment, the following

items are provided:

[Dot detect adjustment R]

[Dot detect adjustment G]

[Dot detect adjustment B]

10. Select a color you want to adjust as necessary,


keys, and press the [SET] key.

• Setting range: -5 (dot area reduced) to +5 (dotarea increased)



to the "Image judge adjustment mode menu

screen."






4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen"

Press the [2. Color text adjustment] key.

5. "Color text screen"




nal glass.

7. A color text detection pattern is outputted.



• Black section: Discriminated as a black text.• Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text.


9. "Color text screen"



• Setting range: -5 (color text area reduced) to +5(color text area increased)



to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."


2-90

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(3) Dot/Text area adjustment

Adjust the dot discrimination and text discrimination

threshold values of the original image.


for the letter adjustment in the user mode.

a. Procedure

7.4.6 ACS adjustment

Conduct this adjustment when the ACS (Auto color

selection) does not function properly.

A. Procedure






4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen"

Press the [3. Dot/Text adjustment] key.

5. "Dot/Text adjustment screen"


6. Select the A3 paper and press the START but-

ton with a test chart set to the original glass.

7. A dot and text detection pattern is outputted.



• Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot.• White section: Discriminated as a picture.• Black section: Discriminated as a black text.• Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text.


9. "Dot/Text area adjustment screen"



• Setting range: -5 (dot area and text areaincreased) to +5 (dot area increased and textarea reduced)



to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."




3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen"

Press the [6. ACS adjustment] key.

4. "Set the chart and push [SCAN] screen"

With an original in which the ACS does not

function properly set to the original glass,

press the [SCAN] key.

5. In the "JUDGE," the result of the ACS is shown

as "COLOR" or "MONOCHROME."



• Setting range: -5 (MONOCHROME) to +5(COLOR)





2-91

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.4.7 Density adjustment

Adjust the AE (AES) density, copy density and the

background density.

A. Procedure

(1) AE (AES) adjustment

Conduct this adjustment when you want to change

the center value selected by the AE (Auto density

selection) in the user mode.

a. Procedure

(2) Copy density adjustment

Adjust the copy density.


for the density shift function in the user mode.

a. Procedure





Press the [7. Density adjustment] key.

4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen"

For the density adjustment, the following items

are provided:

[1. AE (AES) adjustment]

[2. Copy density adjustment]

[3. Background adjustment]




"Density adjustment mode menu screen."







Press the [1. AE (AES) adjustment] key.

5. With a chart in which you want to change the

AE density set to the original glass, press the

[SCAN] key.

6. A numeric value is shown in the "RESULT."

7. When the adjustment result is other than 0,


keys and press the [SET] key (e.g.: if the

adjustment result is 2, input -2).

• Setting range: -5 to +5

8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the adjustment result

becomes 0.


to the "Density adjustment mode menu

screen."







Press the [2. Copy density adjustment] key.

5. "Copy density adjustment screen"

For the copy density adjustment, the following

items are provided. Press the arrow key to

select an item you want to adjust.

• "Text/Photo (Full color)"• "Photo (Full color)"• "Text (Full color)"• "Map (Full color)"• "Text/Photo (Mono color)"• "Photo (Mono color)"• "Text (Mono color)"• "Map (Mono color)"• "Text/Photo (Monochrome)"• "Photo (Monochrome)"• "Text (Monochrome)"• "Map (Monochrome)"


2-92

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(3) Background adjustment

Adjust the copy background density.

The background adjustment in the user mode only

supports the batch adjustment. It is not possible to

adjust the background for each color mode or origi-

nal mode.

a. Procedure6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.

7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then

select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test

chart set to the original glass, press the START

button.








screen."







Press the [3. Background adjustment] key.

5. "Background adjustment screen"

For the background adjustment, the following

items are provided. Press the arrow key to

select an item you want to adjust.

• "Text/Photo (Full color)"• "Photo (Full color)"• "Text (Full color)"• "Map (Full color)"• "Text/Photo (Mono color)"• "Photo (Mono color)"• "Text (Mono color)"• "Map (Mono color)"• "Text/Photo (Monochrome)"• "Photo (Monochrome)"• "Text (Monochrome)"• "Map (Monochrome)"


7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then

select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test

chart set to the original glass, press the START

button.








screen."


2-93

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.4.8 Tone adjustment

Conduct the tone adjustment of red, green or blue.


for the tone adjustment in the user mode.

A. Procedure

(1) Red adjustment

Adjust the density of red.

This adjustment is not reflected to the IP.

a. Procedure

(2) Green adjustment

Adjust the density of green.

a. Procedure





Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key.

4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen"

For the tone adjustment, the following items

are provided:

[1. Red adjustment]

[2. Green adjustment]

[3. Blue adjustment]




"Image quality mode menu screen."







Press the [1. Red adjustment] key.




nal glass.







to the "Image quality adjustment menu

screen."







Press the [2. Green adjustment] key.




nal glass.









2-94

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(3) Blue adjustment

Adjust the density of blue.

a. Procedure


Reset the adjustment values of image quality

adjustment to the standard data. (factory default

data)

Note:

• Data for the scanner gamma adjustment and

the printer gamma sensor adjustment cannot

be reset to standard data.

A. Procedure







Press the [3. Blue adjustment] key.




nal glass.













4. "Recall standard data: Image quality adj.

screen"


dard date. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVI-

OUS SCREEN] key returns to the [Image

quality mode menu screen] without recalling

the standard data.


2-95

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.5 Running test mode

Conduct a test while in the continuous copy opera-

tion.

Select [4. Running test mode] in the 36 mode menu

screen to show the running mode menu screen.

For this adjustment, the following items can be

selected:

A. Intermittent copy mode

After completion of the copy operation for the set

copy count, the copier changes into the copy ready

state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resuming the

same operation.

B. Paperless running mode

Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation

is made nearly at the same timing as the normal

copy operation. In the same manner as the intermit-

tent copy mode, after completion of the copy opera-

tion for the set copy count, the copier changes into

the copy ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before

resuming the same operation.

C. Paperless mode

Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation

is made nearly at the same timing as the normal

copy operation.

D. Paperless endless mode

The copier operates with the copy count infinitely

set automatically. In the same manner as the paper-

less mode, without detecting paper or jam, the copy

operation is made nearly at the same timing as the

normal copy operation.

E. Running mode

The copy operation is made in the paperless end-

less mode plus the scanner each-time scan and the

auto paper feed tray switching.

7.5.1 Setting method

A. Procedure



Press the [4. Running test mode] key.

3. "Running test mode menu screen"

Press the mode key of one of the modes 1 to 5.

4. "Basic screen"


5. After confirmation of the copy operation, press

the STOP button and turn OFF the main switch

(SW2).


2-96

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.6 Test pattern output mode

Output various test patterns to separate abnormali-

ties. Select [5. Test pattern output mode] in the 36

mode screen to show "Test pattern output mode

screen."

Note:

• As for modes specifically not given in the

SHB, be sure not to output test patterns.

A. Procedure



Press the [5. Test pattern output mode] key.

3. "Test pattern output mode screen"

After entering an output pattern number

through the numeric keys, press the [SET] key.


5. "Basic screen"

Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the

START button to output a test pattern.

6. When outputting another test pattern, repeat

steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with

the P button being pressed at the same time.

7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to

the "36 mode menu screen."


2-97

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

No.1 Overall halftone

[Check Items]• When the density is set to 70 (halftone)

When there are image stripes or uneven density found, check the printer system for any abnormality.[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit and transfer belt unit.

• When the density is set to 0 (white)When there is image foggy back ground, check the printer system for any abnormality.[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, and high voltage contact.

• When the density is set at 255 (Y, M, C, K)When the density is light, check the printer system for any abnormality.[Recommended check point]: Write unit

* For information about setting the density, see "7.7 Test pattern density setting."

Test Pattern

When the density is set to 70 When the density is set to 0 When the density is set to 255

8050fs1019


2-98

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

No.11 Beam check

[Check Items 1]• For development and analysis of the write unit

[Check Items 2]• Check the solid black pattern [1] to see if there is uneven density found in the main scanning and sub-

scanning directions.[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, transfer belt unit, and 2nd transfer unit

[Check Items 3]• Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern [2] at the leading/trailing edge of the

test pattern in the feed direction.[Recommended checkpoint]: Transfer/separation corona unit

Test Pattern

[1] Solid black pattern [2] Gradation pattern

[2]

[1]

8050fs1020


2-99

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern

[Check Items]

Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal.Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, skew, and leading edge timing, etc. of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.

Test Pattern

[1] Edge of paper

30mm 237mm

190mm

20m

m190m

m190m

m

280m

m

280mm

205.7

mm

[1]

[1]

8050fs1021


2-100

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.7 Test pattern density setting

Set the density of the test pattern.

A. Procedure

7.8 Finisher adjustment

Adjusting the FNS, PI, PK, TU.

A. Procedure



Press the [6. Test pattern density setting] key.

3. "Test pattern density setting-Y screen"

Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PRE-

VIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select one of

the colors: "Y, M, C and K" that you want to

adjust.



• Setting range: 0 (lighter) to 255 (darker)


6. "Basic screen"

Select the paper size and press the START

button to output a test pattern.

7. When outputting another test pattern, repeat

steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with

the P button being pressed at the same time.

8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to

the "36 mode menu screen."


2. "36 menu screen"

Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.

3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen"

[1. Stitch & Fold stopper adj.]

[2. Fold stopper adjustment]

[3. Cover sheet tray size adj.]

[4. Trimming stopper adjustment]

[5. Punch adjustment]

[6. Three-Fold position adj.]

[7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.]



from each of the adjustment screen to the "Fin-

isher adjustment mode menu screen."


2-101

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FN-9

only)

Adjusting the stapling position when stitch and fold

mode.

A. Procedure

7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only)

Adjusting the fold position when stitch and fold or

folding mode.

A. Procedure





Press the [1. Stitch and Fold stopper adj.] key.

4. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. (A3) screen"


5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF,

and press the START button.

6. Check the paper center and stapling position.

• Standard value: ± 1mm



8. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. screen"

Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVI-

OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired

paper size.





obtained.


to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu

screen."





Press the [2. Fold stopper adjustment] key.

4. "Fold stopper adjustment (A3) screen"




6. Check the paper center and folding position.

• Standard value: ± 1mm



8. "Fold stopper adjustment screen"



paper size.





obtained.



screen."


2-102

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (Cover

Inserter D only)

This adjustment should be performed when the

cover sheet tray size cannot be detected properly

and when centring adjustment for cover sheet tray

is performed.

A. Procedure

7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TMG-3 only)

Adjusting the trimming amount.

A. Procedure





Press the [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.] key.

4. Set a A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R

(for inch machine) paper on the cover sheet

tray (upper/lower) [1] and press the [Start] key.

A complete message appears on the screen.


to the "Finisher adjustment menu screen."

8050fs1022

[1]





Press the [4. Trimming stopper adjustment]

key.

4. "Trimming stopper adjustment (A3) screen"


5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF


6. Check the trimming amount.

• Standard value: 2.5 to 4.5 mmNote:

•Setting a trimming amount of 2.5mm or

less may cause a trimming error.



8. "Trimming stopper adjustment screen"



paper size.





obtained.


to the "Finisher adjustment menu mode

screen."


2-103

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-5 only)

This adjusts the punch vertical positions, punch hor-

izontal positions, and punch registration loop

amount.

A. Procedure

(1) Punch kit vertical position adjustment (PK-5

only)

Adjusting the punch vertical position.

a. Procedure



Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key.

3. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen"

Punch adjustment includes the following items:

[1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.]

[2. Punch kit horizontal pos. adj.]

[5. Punch registration loop adj.]



each adjustment screen to the "Finisher

adjustment mode menu screen."







Press the [1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.] key.

5. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. (A3) screen"




7. Check the punch vertical position.

8. When the value is not appropriate, press the C

button while pressing down the P button.

9. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. screen"



paper size.




11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the value is appro-

priate.


to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."


2-104

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

(2) Punch kit horizontal position adjustment

(PK-5 only)

Adjusting the punch horizontal position.

a. Procedure

(3) Punch registration loop adjustment

Adjusting the registration loop amount for the

reversed paper exit, the ADU paper exit (straight

exit) and cover sheet upper/lower.

a. Procedure1. Enter the 36 mode.






Press the [2. Punch kit Horizontal pos. adj.]

key.

5. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen"




7. Check the position of punch holes.

• Specification (Length between the edge ofpaper and the center of punch hole): 10.5mm(2 holes/4 holes/swedish 4 holes), 9.5mm (3holes/inch 2 holes)



9. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen"



paper size.




11. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the value is obtained.


to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."







Press the [5. Punch registration loop adj.] key.

5. Press [1. Punch registration loop adj. (main

body)] key. or [2. Punch registration loop adj.

(PI)] key.

6. "Punch registration loop adj. menu screen"


OUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select the item to

be adjusted.

The screen changes as follows; reverse →ADU or upper tray → lower tray.


8. Press the START button to make a copy.

9. Check the punch registration loop amount.

10. When the value is not appropriate, press the C


11. "Punch registration loop adj. screen"




12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the value is appro-

priate.


to the "Punch registration loop adj. menu

screen."


2-105

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FN-9 only)

Adjusting the folding positions during the three-

folded copy.

a. Procedure





Press the [6. Three-fold position adj.] key.

4. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"




6. Check the three-folded position "a."



8050fs1023

a

b

c

Folded

positions

Standard value Specification

A4R 8.5 x 11R

a 95 mm 89.4 mm ± 2 mm

b 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm

c 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm

8. "Three-Fold adjustment screen"



paper size.





obtained.

Note:

• See "9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS" to adjust

the folded positions "b" and "c."



screen."


2-106

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment

Adjusting the pitch of the 2 positions staple.

A. Procedure

7.9 List output mode

Output a variety of data.

A. Procedure





Press the [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.] key.

4. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen"




6. Check the pitch of the 2 positions staple.

7. When changing the dimension A, press the C


8. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen"

Enter a value with numeric keys and press the

[SET] key.

• Setting range: 120 to 160, 1 step: 1mm

9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the dimension A is

appropriate.



screen."

A

8050fs1024



Press the [8. List output mode] key.

3. "List output mode menu screen"

List output mode items are as follows:

[1. Machine management list 1]

[2. Adjustment data list]

[3. Page fill data list]

[4. Machine management list 2]

[5. Parameter list]

[6. Memory dump list]

[7. Font pattern]

Note:

• Setting DPSW 30-1 to 1, [4. Machine manage-

ment list 2] and later appear.

4. Press the key of an item you want to output.

5. Select A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper and press the

START button.



to the "36 mode menu screen."


2-107

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

8. 47 MODE

8.1 47 mode/multi mode settingmethod

A. 47 Mode

This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/

output check function) to check and adjust the vari-

ous signals and loads.

B. Operation method for 47 mode

(1) Starting 47 mode

a. Turn off the main switch (SW2).

b. Turn on the SW2 while holding down 4 and 7

of the numeric keys.

c. The 47 mode is activated if the moment "I/O

check mode" is displayed in the message

display area at the center of the screen.

"47 mode menu screen"

(2) Input check method

Follow the following procedure.

a. Procedure

(3) Output check method

Follow the following procedure.

a. Procedure

(4) Exiting from the 47 mode

Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.

[1] Input/Output check code

[2] Multi code

[3] Input check

[4] Output check



Enter the input check code with the numeric

keys. *1

3. Press the P button when using the multi mode.

4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys. *1

8050fs1001[1][2]

[3] [4]

5. Input check result will appear in the input

check result display area.

6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to perform the other signal

input check.

*1 See "8.5 Input check list".



Enter the output check code with the numeric

keys. *2

3. Press the P button when using the multi mode.

4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.* 2

5. Press the [Start] key to perform the output

check.

6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output

check.

7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to check other signal out-

put check.

*2 See "8.6 Output check list".


2-108

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

8.2 Adjustment data display

Lists the adjustment values of the machine (factory-

set values and current values).

No adjustment value can be changed in this mode.

A. Procedure

Note:

• Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.

8.3 Hard disk check

Perform this operation if you want to check the HDD

total capacity, the HDD remaining capacity, and the

error code related to HDD.

A. Procedure

Note:

• The operation can not be canceled during the

HDD bad sectors check and recovery (the

[STOP] button or the [Change Mode] key are

disabled).

• The hard disk is vulnerable to vibrations and

physical shocks. Be sure to remove the hard

disk when you move the main body.



Press "94" with the numeric keys. Check that

"94-00" appears in the message display area.


4. Press the [STOP] key at the lower right corner

of the screen.

5. Turn off the main switch (SW2) to exit from the

47 mode.



Press "99" with the numeric keys. Check that

"99-00" appears in the message display area.

3. Press the P button.

4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric

keys. Check that "99-xx" (xx represents the

input number) appears in the message display

area.

01: HDD total capacity check

02: HDD remaining capacity check

03: HDD bad sectors check and recovery


At checking the total capacity: the total capac-

ity is displayed

At checking the remaining capacity: the

remaining capacity is displayed

At checking and recovering the bad sectors:

During the operation-"NOW" appears

The operation succeeded-"OK" appears

The operation failed-"NG" appears

Press the [Start] key to perform the HDD bad

sectors check and recovery again when "NG"

appears.

6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output

check.

7. Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.


2-109

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

8.4 Input check list

Classification Symbol Code Multi

code

Name Display and signal source

001 000

High voltage, analog signal

TEMP/

HUM

00 0 Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside humidity)

0 to 255

TEMP/

HUM

1 Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside temperature)

— 2 — — —

TDB 3 Temp detection board 0 to 255

TLD Y 01 4 Remaining toner detection sensor /Y Toner No toner

TLD M 5 Remaining toner detection sensor /M

TLD C 6 Remaining toner detection sensor /C

TLD K 7 Remaining toner detection sensor /K

PS53 8 Waste toner door sensor Box No box

PS52 9 Waste toner full sensor FULL EMPTY

HV1 02 0 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) Abnormal Normal

1 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M)

2 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C)

3 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K)

4 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y)

5 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M)

6 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C)

7 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K)

HV2 03 0 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y) Abnormal Normal

1 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M)

2 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C)

3 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K)

4 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) One or more color is

abnormal

Normal

5 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K)

6 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K)

7 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) Abnormal Normal

8 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y)

9 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M)

10 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C)



HV2 04 0 High voltage unit/2 (separation) Abnormal Normal

1 High voltage unit/2 (separation)

PS11 05 2 Gamma sensor 0 to 255

6 Gamma sensor

DRPS Y 06 0 Drum potential sensor /Y

DRPS M 1 Drum potential sensor /M

DRPS C 2 Drum potential sensor /C

DRPS K 3 Drum potential sensor /K


2-110

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


HV2 07 4 High voltage unit /2 (guide plate) Abnormal Normal

5

6

7

HV2 08 0 High voltage unit/2 (2nd transfer) Abnormal Normal

1

2

3

4

HV1 09 0 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) Abnormal Normal

1 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M)

2 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C)

3 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K)

Paper feed, conveyance

PS31 11 0 No paper sensor /1 Paper No paper

PS37 1 No paper sensor /2

PS43 2 No paper sensor /3

PS47 3 No paper sensor /BP

PS108 4 No paper sensor (C-208)

PS32 12 0 Remaining paper sensor /1 Paper No paper

PS38 1 Remaining paper sensor /2

PS44 2 Remaining paper sensor /3

PS102 to

105

3 Remaining paper sensor /1 to /4 (C-208) 0 to 7

PS33 13 0 Paper size /S1 Paper No paper

PS34 1 Paper size /L1

PS39 2 Paper size /S2


PS45 4 Paper size /S3


PS48 6 Paper size /SBP

PS49 7 Paper size /LBP

VR1 14 0 Paper sizeVR /1 0 to 255

VR2 1 Paper sizeVR /2

VR3 2 Paper sizeVR /3

VR4 3 Paper sizeVR /BP

PS30 16 0 Tray upper limit sensor /1 Upper limit Not at upper limitPS36 1 Tray upper limit sensor /2

PS42 2 Tray upper limit sensor /3

PS25 3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP

PS109 4 Upper limit sensor (C-208) Upper:1, lower:2, middle:0

— 17 0 Tray set detection /1 Yes No

— 1 Tray set detection /2

— 2 Tray set detection /3


code


001 000


2-111

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


PS29 19 0 Pre-registration sensor /1 Paper No paper

PS35 1 Pre-registration sensor /2

PS41 2 Pre-registration sensor /3

PS26 3 By-pass conveyance sensor

PS106 4 Feed sensor (C-208)

PS107 20 0 Paper feed sensor (C-208) Paper No paper

PS23 1 ADU pre-registration sensor

PS20 2 ADU conveyance sensor

PS27 3 Intermediate conveyance sensor /1

PS28 4 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2

— 5 — — —

PS22 6 Registration sensor Paper No paper

PS50 7 Vertical conveyance sensor

PS13 8 Paper exit sensor

PS19 9 Reverse paper exit sensor

PS21 10 ADU paper reverse sensor

PS12 11 Paper exit full sensor Full Other than full

PS30 23 0 Tray upper limit sensor /1 Upper limit Other than upper limit



PS25 3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP

4

PS101,

PS109

5 Lower limit sensor (C-208)Upper limit sensor (C-208)

Upper limit:1, lower limit:2, middle:06

PS24 24 0 2nd transfer HP sensor Home position

Other than home posi-

tion1

2

PS18 25 0 Front door open/close sensor Open Close

PS51 1 Vertical conveyance door open/close sen-sor

PS54 2 Toner supply door open/close sensor

PS14 3 Toner supply unit open/close sensor

— 4 Fixing unit set detection Installed Not installed

PS100 5 Top cover open/close sensor1 (C-208) Open Close

PS115 6 Front door open/close sensor (C-208)

SW100 7 Tray down switch (C-208) ON OFF

M41 28 0 Paper feed motor Abnormal Normal


code


001 000


2-112

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

Light PS1 30 0 Scanner HP sensor Home position


tion

PS3 1 APS detection sensor /S Paper No paper

PS4 2 APS detection sensor /L

PS2 3 APS timing sensor OPEN CLOSE

M3 32 0 Polygon motor /Y (abnormal rotation detection)

Abnormal Normal

M4 1 Polygon motor /M (abnormal rotation detection)

M5 2 Polygon motor /C (abnormal rotation detection)

M6 3 Polygon motor /K (abnormal rotation detection)

M3, M4,

M5, M6

4 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (abnormal rotation detection)

One or more colors are abnormal

Normal

M3 5 Polygon motor /Y (abnormal temperature detection)

Abnormal Normal

M4 6 Polygon motor /M(abnormal temperature detection)

M5 7 Polygon motor /C (abnormal temperature detection)

M6 8 Polygon motor /K (abnormal temperature detection)

M3, M4,

M5, M6

9 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (abnormal temperature detection)

One or more colors are abnormal

Normal

INDX SB

Y

33 0 Index sensor /Y Abnormal Normal

INDX SB

M

1 Index sensor /M

INDX SB

C

2 Index sensor /C

INDX SB

B

3 Index sensor /K

INDX SB

Y, M, C,

K

4 Index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K One or more colors are abnormal

Normal

5

PS5,

PS6,

PS7

35 0 Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C Edge detected

from one or more color

Edge undetected

PS5 1 Laser correction HP sensor /Y Edge detected

Edge undetectedPS6 2 Laser correction HP sensor /M

PS7 3 Laser correction HP sensor /C


code


001 000


2-113

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

Light PS5,

PS6,

PS7

35 4 Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C Edge detected


Edge undetected




PS5,

PS6,

PS7

8 Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C Edge detected


Edge undetected




PS8 36 3 Color registration sensor /F 0 to 255

PS9 4 Color registration sensor /R

LDB Y 37 1 Laser drive board /Y 0 to 255

LDB M 2 Laser drive board /M

LDB C 3 Laser drive board /C

LDB K 4 Laser drive board /K

PS1 38 5 Scanner HP sensor Home position


tion

Main body PS60,

PS61

41 0 Encoder sensor /Y1, /Y2 Abnormal Normal

1

2

PS62,

PS63

3 Encoder sensor /M1, /M2

4

5

PS64,

PS65

6 Encoder sensor /C1, /C2

7

8

PS66,

PS67

9 Encoder sensor /K1, /K2

10

11

PS69,

PS68

12 Encoder sensor /belt 1, /belt 2

13

14

PS15 15 1st transfer HP sensor Home position


tion16

17

18


code


001 000


2-114

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

Main body M2 42 0 Scanner cooling fan Abnormal Normal

M42 2 DCPS cooling fan

M10 3 Fixing cooling fan /1

M48 4 Charger intake fan

M47 5 Drum unit fan

M43,

M44,

M45,

M46

6 Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan /1, /2

M24 7 IP cooling fan

M28,

M27,

M26

8 Paper exit fan /F, /M, /R

M12,

M13

9 Drum cooling fan /1, /2

M11 10 Transfer belt cooling fan

M25 11 ICP cooling fan

DCPS1 43 0 DC power supply unit /1 (12VDC) Abnormal Normal

DCPS2 1 DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC)

2 DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC)



C (T) 5 Total counter Yes No

C (K) 6 Checking to see if the key counter-equipped machine is provided with a key counter or not.

Yes No

TH1 45 0 Fixing temperature sensor /1 0 to 255

TH3 1 Fixing temperature sensor /3






— 7 TH1 correction temperature



M29 47 0 Fixing motor Abnormal Normal

1

2

PS16 3 Fixing pressure release sensor Home position


tion4

5

M29 9 Fixing motor Abnormal Normal

10

11


code


001 000


2-115

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

Main body PS15 48 0 1st transfer HP sensor Home position


tion1

2

3

PRCB 49 Printer control board (drum motor control) Displays abnormal code

Intrinsic functions

M20 50 0 Developing motor /Y Abnormal Normal

1

2

M21 3 Developing motor /M

4

5

M22 6 Developing motor /C

7

8

M23 9 Developing motor /K

10

11

TDS Y 12 Toner density sensor /Y 0 to 255

TDS M 13 Toner density sensor /M

TDS C 14 Toner density sensor /C

TDS K 15 Toner density sensor /K

PCL Y 51 4 Pre-charging lamp /Y Abnormal Normal

PCL M 5 Pre-charging lamp /M

PCL C 6 Pre-charging lamp /C

PCL K 7 Pre-charging lamp /K

TDS Y 54 0 Toner density sensor /Y 0 to 255

1

2


4

5


7

8


10

11

— 57 0 FN-120, FN-9 Connected Uncon-nected— 1 C-208

— 2 AFR-20

TDS Y 58 0 Toner density sensor /Y 0 to 255





code


001 000


2-116

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

Intrinsic functions

PS17 59 3 Fixing paper exit sensor Paper No paper

AFR-20 PS304 60 1 No paper sensor Paper No paper

PS301 2 Registration sensor

PS302 3 Timing sensor

PS305 4 Reverse sensor

PS306 5 Paper exit sensor

PS303 6 Paper feed cover sensor Open Close

PS308 7 Paper feed tray sensor

PS307 8 Paper exit cover sensor

RS1 9 AFR-20 open/close sensor

FN-120, PS701 76 0 Sub-tray paper exit sensor Paper No paper

FN-9 PS702 1 Tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Other than upper limit

PS703 2 Tray lower limit sensor Lower limit Other than lower limit

PS704 3 FNS entrance sensor No paper Paper

PS705 4 Stacker entrance sensor Paper No paper

PS706 5 Main tray paper exit sensor

PS707 6 Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor Other than standby position

Standby position

PS708 7 Alignment HP sensor /U Home position


tion

PS709 8 Paper exit belt HP sensor Other than home posi-

tion

Home position

PS713 9 Stapler rotation HP sensor Home position


tionPS711 10 Stapler movement HP sensor

PS712 11 Paper exit opening HP sensor Other than close posi-

tion

Close position

PS714 12 Clincher rotation HP sensor Home position


tion

PS715 13 Counter reset sensor Paper No paper

PS718 14 Shift HP sensor Other than home posi-

tion

Home position

PS720 15 Stacker no paper sensor Paper No paper

SW702 16 Staple switch /R No staple Staple

PS730 17 Stapler HP sensor /R Other than home posi-

tion

Home position

SW701 18 Cartridge switch /R No cartridge Cartridge


code


001 000


2-117

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

FN-120, FN-9

M710 76 19 Clincher motor /R Other than start

Start

— 20 — — —

PS732 21 Clincher HP sensor /R Other than home posi-

tion

Home position

PS719 22 Sub-tray full sensor Full Other than full

MS701 23 FNS interlock switch Front door opened

Front door closed

SW704 24 Staple switch /F No staple Staple

PS731 25 Stapler HP sensor /F Other than home posi-

tion

Home position

SW703 26 Cartridge switch /F No cartridge Cartridge

M715 27 Clincher motor /F Other than start

Start

— 28 — — —

PS733 29 Clincher HP sensor /F Other than home posi-

tion

Home position

M707 30 Paper exit roller motor lock detection Other than control speed

Control speed

— 31 FNS connection detection Connected Uncon-nected

PS722 32 Folding knife HP sensor Home position


tionPS723 33 Stopper HP sensor

PS724 34 Alignment HP sensor /L Other than home posi-

tion

Home position

PS725 35 Folding exit sensor Paper No paper

PS726 36 Folding passage sensor

PS729 37 Folding full sensor Full Other than full

— 38 — — —

M720 39 Folding conveyance motor Other than control speed

Control speed

— 40 — — —

— 41 — — —

— 42 — — —

— 43 — — —


code


001 000


2-118

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

Cover Inserter D

M203 76 44 PI conveyance motor Other than control speed

Control speed

— 45 DIPSW0 Other than single oper-

ation

Single oper-ation

— 46 — — —

— 47 — — —

— 48 — — —

— 49 — — —

— 50 — — —

— 51 — — —

PS201 52 PI passage sensor /U Paper No paper

PS206 53 PI passage sensor /L

— 54 — — —

— 55 — — —

— 56 — — —

— 57 — — —

— 58 — — —

FN-120, FN-9

— 59 Folding connection detection Uncon-nected

Connected

— 60 — — —

PS716 61 Gate HP sensor

Cover Inserter D

— 62 — — —

— 63 — — —

PS202 64 No sheet sensor /U No paper Paper

PS203 65 Sheet set sensor /U

PS205 66 Tray lower limit sensor /U Lower limit Other than lower limit

PS204 67 Tray upper limit sensor /U Upper limit Other than upper limit

— 68 Sheet feeder manual start/clear switch Switch OFF Switch ON

— 69 Sheet feeder manual punch button switch

— 70 Sheet feeder manual function selection but-ton switch

MS201 71 PI interlock switch Open Close

PS207 72 No sheet sensor /L No paper Paper

PS208 73 Sheet set sensor /L

PS210 74 Tray lower limit sensor /L Lower limit Other than lower limit

PS209 75 Tray upper limit sensor /L Upper limit Other than upper limit

— 76 — — —

PS212 77 Sheet size sensor /L

— 78 — — —


code


001 000


2-119

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

Cover Inserter D

— 76 79 PI connection detection Uncon-nected

Connected

— 80 — — —

— 81 — — —

— 82 — — —

PK-5 PS801 83 Punch HP sensor Other than home posi-

tion

Home position

— 84 — — —

— 85 — — —

PS802 86 Punch scraps full sensor Other than full

Full

PS804 87 Punch scraps box set sensor Set Other than set

— 88 PK rocking End face detection 1 No paper Paper

89 PK rocking End face detection 2




PS803 93 PK rocking Punch movement home posi-tion

Home position


tion

— 94 PK connection detection Uncon-nected

Connected

— 95 — — —


code


001 000


2-120

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

TMG-3 PS101 77 0 Cutting entrance detection Paper No paper

PS102 1 Cutting conveyance detection

PS103 2 Cutting end stopper HP detection Home position


tionPS104 3 Cutting clear HP detection

PS105 4 Cutting press HP detectin Other than home posi-

tion

Home position

PS106 5 Cutting knife upper limit HP detection Home position


tion

PS108 6 Cutting booklet discharge Paper No paper

PS110 7 Holder board of upper limit detection Other than upper limit

Upper limit

PS111 8 Holder board of lower limit detection Lower limit Other than lower limit

PS112 9 Pusher HP Home position


tion

PS114 10 Cutting stacker cover detection 24 V Open Close

MS2 11 Cutting front door detection 24 V

— 12 Cutting conveyance M lock signal under operation

Locked Unlocked

— 13 — — —

— 14 — — —

— 15 — — —

PS107 16 Cutting end scraps box set detection Not set Other than set

PS109 17 Cutting end scraps box full detection Other than full

Full

PS113 18 Cutting stucker full detection No paper Paper

— 19 TU connection detection Uncon-nected

Connected

— 20 — — —

— 21 — — —

— 22 — — —

— 23 — — —


code


001 000


2-121

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

8.5 Output check list

Note:

• Do not output items which cannot be set or

changed in the field and codes which are not

described in the output check list."

• Do not output items with "x" in the "Cannot be

set or change in the field" column. These

items are only for the developping/manufuct-

ing process.

Outputs of them may damage the machine.


code

Name Cannot be set or

changed in the field


L1 00 0 Exposure lamp

M53,

MC14

01 0 Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /Y

1 Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /Y

2 Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bot-tle clutch /Y

M53,

MC15

3 Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /M

4 Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /M

5 Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bot-tle clutch /M

M53,

MC16

6 Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /C

7 Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /C

8 Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bot-tle clutch /C

M53,

MC17

9 Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /K

10 Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /K

11 Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bot-tle clutch /K

HV1 02 0 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) x

1 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) x

2 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) x

3 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) x

4 High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y: for current measurement)

x

5 High voltage unit /1 (charging /M: for current measurement)

x

6 High voltage unit /1 (charging /C: for current measurement)

x

7 High voltage unit /1 (charging /K: for current measurement)

x


2-122

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


HV2 03 0 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y) x

1 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M) x

2 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C) x

3 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) x

4 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y, /M, /C, /K) x

5

6

7 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) x

8 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y: for current measurement)

x

9 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M: for current measurement)

x

L1 10 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C: for current measurement)

x

11 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current measurement at color mode)

x

12 High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current measurement at color mode)

x

HV2 04 0 High voltage unit/2 (separation) x

1 High voltage unit /2 (separation, measurement) x

PS11 06 2 Gamma sensor

6 Gamma sensor (for individual check) x

DRPS Y 0 Drum potential sensor /Y

DRPS M 1 Drum potential sensor /M

DRPS C 2 Drum potential sensor /C

DRPS K 3 Drum potential sensor /K

HV2 07 4 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output) x

5 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output) x

6 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output: for individual check)

x

7 High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output: for individual check)

x

08 0 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1) x

1 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2) x

2 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1: for current measurement)

x

3 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2: for current measurement)

x

4 High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output3: for cleaning consideration)*

x

5 High voltage unit /2 (guide plate) x

HV1 09 0 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) x

1 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M) x

2 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C) x

3 High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K) x

— 15 1 Counter reset

— 2 Job memory clear

— 98 RD mode setup


code




2-123

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


SD7 20 0 Pick up solenoid /1

SD8 1 Pick up solenoid /2

SD9 2 Pick up solenoid /3

SD5 4 Pick up solenoid /BP

SD100 5 Paper feed solenoid (C-208)

MC7 21 0 Paper feed clutch /1

MC9 1 Paper feed clutch /2

MC11 2 Paper feed clutch /3

MC6 4 Paper feed clutch /BP

MC101 5 Paper feed clutch (C-208)

MC8 22 0 Pre-registration clutch /1

MC10 1 Pre-registration clutch /2

MC12 2 Pre-registration clutch /3

MC102 5 Pre-registration clutch (C-208)

M40 23 0 Tray up drive motor /1

M39 1 Tray up drive motor /2

M38 2 Tray up drive motor /3

M35 3 Tray up drive motor /BP (down)

4 Tray up drive motor /BP (up)

M100 5 UP/DOWN motor (C-208: down)

6 UP/DOWN motor (C-208: up)

M34 24 0 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (continuous rotation)

1 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (pressure)

2 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (release)

M30 25 0 Registration motor (1/3 speed)

1 Registration motor (1/2 speed)

2 Registration motor (1/1speed)

3 Registration motor (paper feed line speed)

4 Registration motor (hard timer on: 1/1 speed)

M31 26 0 Loop roller motor (1/3 speed)

1 Loop roller motor (1/2 speed)

2 Loop roller motor (1/1speed)

M31 3 Loop roller motor (paper feed line speed)

M33 27 0 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/3 speed)

1 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/2 speed)

2 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/1 speed)

3 Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:3 times speed)

4 Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/3 speed)



7 Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:3 times speed)

M41 28 0 Paper feed motor

M101 1 Paper feed motor (C-208)


code




2-124

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


MC13 29 0 Intermediate conveyance clutch /1

MC4 1 Intermediate conveyance clutch /2

MC5 2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3

SD1 3 Transfer belt separating claw

M136,

M137

5 Paper feed assist fan /F, /R (C-208)

SD6 6 ADU lock solenoid

M3 32 0 Polygon motor /Y (1/1 rotation)

M4 1 Polygon motor /M (1/1 rotation)

M5 2 Polygon motor /C (1/1 rotation)

M6 3 Polygon motor /K (1/1 rotation)

M3, M4,

M5, M6

4 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (1/1 rotation)

M3 5 Polygon motor /Y (rotates at nonvolatile setting)

M4 6 Polygon motor /M (rotates at nonvolatile setting)

M5 7 Polygon motor /C (rotates at nonvolatile setting)

M6 8 Polygon motor /K (rotates at nonvolatile setting)

M3, M4,

M5, M6

9 Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (rotates at nonvola-tile setting)

LDB Y 33 0 Laser drive board /Y

LDB M 1 Laser drive board /M

LDB C 2 Laser drive board /C

LDB K 3 Laser drive board /K

LDB Y,

M, C, K

4 Laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K

— 34 Shading correction

PS8 36 3 Color registration sensor /F

PS9 4 Color registration sensor /R

— 37 0 LD alarm level detection all colors

M1 38 0 Scanner motor (back and forth drive 1: continu-ous)

1 Scanner motor (back and forth drive 2: continu-ous)




5 Scanner motor (HP search)

6 Scanner motor(moves to the back scan position)

7 Scanner motor (back scan AGS operation+scan operation: one operation)

Main body ACDB 40 0 AC drive board (RL1 (main relay)ON)

1 AC drive board (HTR1, 2 (HTR1, 2(heater/1, /2)OFF)

M14 41 0 Drum motor /Y (1/3 speed)


code




2-125

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

1 Drum motor /Y (1/2 speed)

2 Drum motor /Y (1/1speed)

M15 3 Drum motor /M (1/3 speed)

4 Drum motor /M (1/2 speed)

5 Drum motor /M (1/1speed)

M16 6 Drum motor /C (1/3 speed)

7 Drum motor /C (1/2 speed)

8 Drum motor /C (1/1speed)

M17 9 Drum motor /K (1/3 speed)

10 Drum motor /K (1/2 speed)

11 Drum motor /K (1/1speed)

M18 12 Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed)

13 Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed)

14 Transfer belt motor (1/1speed)

15 Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed: for nip measure-ment)

x

M18 41 16 Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed: for nip measure-ment)

x

17 Transfer belt motor (1/1 speed: for nip measure-ment)

x

M2 42 0 Scanner cooling fan

M25 1 IPB cooling fan

M42 2 DCPS cooling fan

M10,

M36,

M37

3 Fixing cooling fan /1, /3, /2

M48 4 Charger intake fan

M47 5 Drum unit fan

M43,

M44,

M45,

M46

6 Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan /1, /2

M24 7 IP cooling fan

M26,

M27,

M28

8 Exhaust fan/R, /M, /F

M12 9 Drum cooling fan /1

M13 10 Drum cooling fan /2

M11 11 Transfer belt cooling fan

T (C) 43 1 Total counter

T (BK) 2 Black counter

T (K) 6 Key counter

Main body DCPS2 44 DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC breaking)

L2, L3,

L4

45 0 Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, Fixing lower lamp1

2


code




2-126

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

3

L2 4 Fixing upper lamp /1

L3 5 Fixing upper lamp /2

L4 6 Fixing lower lamp

L2, L3,

L4

7 Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, Fixing lower lamp8

9

10

M29 47 0 Fixing motor (1/3 speed)

1 Fixing motor (1/2 speed)

2 Fixing motor (1/1speed)

3 Fixing motor (reverse rotation: release operation on, full-time rotation)

4 Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the pressure position)

5 Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the release position)

M29 47 9 Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/3 speed)

10 Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/2 speed)

11 Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/1 speed)

M29, L2,

L3, L4

13 Fixing motor, Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, fixing lower lamp (fixing roller pressure+all heater lamps on)

M54 15 Web motor

M19 48 0 1st transfer pressure/release motor (full-time rotation)

1 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at the release position)

2 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at black and white pressure position)

3 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at color mode pressure position)

M18 49 0 Transfer belt motor (for checking photosensitive material control 1: 1/1 speed)

x

1 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for check-ing photosensitive material control 2: 1/2 speed)

x


x


x


x


x

Intrinsic functions

M20 50 0 Developing motor /Y (1/1speed)

1 Developing motor /Y (1/2 speed)

2 Developing motor /Y (1/3 speed)

M21 3 Developing motor /M (1/1speed)


code




2-127

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

4 Developing motor /M (1/2 speed)

5 Developing motor /M (1/3 speed)

M22 6 Developing motor /C (1/1speed)

7 Developing motor /C (1/2 speed)

8 Developing motor /C (1/3 speed)

M23 9 Developing motor /K (1/1speed)

10 Developing motor /K (1/2 speed)

11 Developing motor /K (1/3 speed)

PCL Y 51 0 Pre-charging lamp /Y

PLC M 1 Pre-charging lamp /M

PCL C 2 Pre-charging lamp /C

PCL K 51 3 Pre-charging lamp /K

PCL Y 4 Pre-charging lamp /Y (turns on the control signal)

PCL M 5 Pre-charging lamp //M (turns on the control signal)

PLC C 6 Pre-charging lamp /C (turns on the control signal)

PCL K 7 Pre-charging lamp /K (turns on the control signal)

— 52 0 L detection reference for all colors x

— 1 L detection reference for colors (Y, M, C) x

— 2 L detection reference for K x

— 3 L detection reference for Y x

— 4 L detection reference for M x

— 5 L detection reference for C x

M49 54 0 Toner supply motor /Y (high speed)

1 Toner supply motor /Y (low speed)

2 Toner supply motor /Y (setting value)

M50 3 Toner supply motor /M (high speed)

4 Toner supply motor /M (low speed)

5 Toner supply motor /M (setting value)

M51 6 Toner supply motor /C (high speed)

7 Toner supply motor /C (low speed)

8 Toner supply motor /C (setting value)

M52 9 Toner supply motor /K (high speed)

10 Toner supply motor /K (low speed)

11 Toner supply motor /K (setting value)

MC14 12 Toner bottle clutch /Y

MC15 13 Toner bottle clutch /M

MC16 14 Toner bottle clutch /C

MC17 15 Toner bottle clutch /K

Intrinsic functions

SD2 55 0 Color registration shutter solenoid

SD3 1 Gamma sensor shutter solenoid

— 56 0 Indicator lamp (PAT1 on)

1 Indicator lamp (PAT2 on)


code




2-128

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T



— 57 0 FN-120, FN-9 connection check

— 1 C-208 connection check

— 2 AFR-20 connection check

TDS Y 58 0 Toner density sensor /Y




AFR-20 M301 60 1 Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec)

2 Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec)

3 Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec)

4 Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec)



M302 7 Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec)

8 Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec)

9 Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec)

10 Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec)



M303 13 Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec)

14 Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec)

15 Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec)

16 Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec)



SD302 19 Reverse solenoid

SD301 20 Paper exit solenoid

MC301 21 Registration clutch

FN-120, FN-9 M701 75 1 FNS conveyance motor

M702 2 Shift motor (HP search)

3 Shift motor (moves to the shift position)

4 Shift motor ( rotation)


code




2-129

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

FN-120, FN-9 M703 75 5 Tray up/down motor (HP search)

6 Tray up/down motor (down)

7 Tray up/down motor (up)

M705 8 Alignment motor /U (HP search)

M707 9 Paper exit roller motor (HP search)

10 Paper exit roller motor (reverse rotation)

M708 11 Paper exit opening motor (HP search)

M708 12 Paper exit opening motor (moves to opening)

M709 13 Stapler motor /R (initianl operation)

14 Stapler motor /R (stapling)

M714 15 Stapler motor /F (initianl operation)

16 Stapler motor /F (stapling)

M711 17 Stapler movement motor (HP search)

18 Stapler movement motor (movement by size)

M713 19 Stacker entrance motor

M718 20 Stopper motor (HP search)

M716 21 Alignment motor /L

M719 23 Folding knife motor

M720 24 Folding conveyance motor

SD704 31 Paper exit opening solenoid

SD705 32 By-pass gate solenoid

M705 33 Alignment motor /U (open)

34 Alignment motor /U (close)

35 Alignment motor /U (rocking)

M716 36 Alignment motor /L (open)

37 Alignment motor /L (close)

38 Alignment motor /L (rocking)

M718 39 Stopper motor (moves to the A4R position)

TMG-3 M101 55 Conveyance motor

M102 56 Cutter motor (normal rotation)

57 Cutter motor (reverse rotation)

M103 58 Stopper motor (HP search)

M104 59 Stopper release motor (HP search)

60 Stopper release motor (release)

61 Stopper release motor (set)

M105 62 Press motor (HP search)

63 Press motor (press)

Cover Inserter D

MC202 75 64 Conveyance clutch /L

M202 65 Tray up/down motor /L (down)

66 Tray up/down motor /L (up)

SD202 67 Sheet feed solenoid /L

PK-5 M801 78 Punch motor


code




2-130

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

M802 79 Punch shift motor (HP search)

Cover Inserter D

MC201 83 Conveyance clutch /U

M201 84 Tray up/down motor (down)

85 Tray up/down motor (up)

SD201 86 Sheet feed solenoid /U

M203 87 PI conveyance motor

FN-120, FN-9 M712 88 Gate drive motor (HP search)

89 Gate drive motor (stacker direction switching)

90 Gate drive motor (straight direction switching)

M721 91 Sub-tray paper exit motor

M704 92 Clincher rotation motor (HP search)

93 Clincher rotation motor (skew shift)

M706 94 Stapler rotation motor (HP search)

95 Stapler rotation motor (skew shift)

SD706 96 Three-folding gate solenoid

— 99 FNS paperless running mode

ADU SD4 80 Reverse/exit solenoid

MC2 81 0 ADU conveyance clutch /1

MC1 1 ADU conveyance clutch /2

MC3 2 ADU pre-registration clutch

M32 84 0 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/3 speed)

1 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/2 speed)

2 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/1 speed)

3 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: paper feed line speed)

4 ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 3 times speed)

5 ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/3 speed)



8 ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: paper feed line speed)

M32 84 9 ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation:3 times speed)

Others — 94 0 Adjustment data display

— 1 Illuminate all LEDs on the operation board

— 2 Message display

— 97 1 E-RDH (DRAM) capacity display

— 98 2 E-RDH (DRAM) check

— 99 3 HDD bad sectors check and recovery


code



CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

2-131

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

Caution:


unplugged from the power outlet

9.1 Paper feed roller/BP pres-sure adjustment

Perform the paper feed roller/BP pressure adjust-

ment when the no feed jam occurs at the by-pass

feed.

A. Procedure


2. Install the piled plate [3] on the paper feed roller/

BP [2] with 2 screws [1].

3. Replace the ADU.

4. Perform the copy to check the paper feed opera-

tion.

5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 if the no feed jam continues

to occur at the paper feed.

Note:

• The weight plate is a supply part. It should be

purchased separately.

• Up to 4 plates can be used at a time.

• Perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount

adjustment (by-pass)" when the weight plate

is added.

[1] [3] [2]

8050fs1050

OTHER ADJUSTMENTS CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

2-132

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.2 Paper feed height (upperlimit) adjustment (by-pass)

Perform the paper feed height (upper limit) adjust-

ment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge of the

fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled

paper.

Note:

• This adjustment affects the pick-up movement

amount. When the adjustment is complete,

perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount

adjustment (by-pass)".

A. Procedure


2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper feed

solenoid cover [2].

[1][2]

[1]

8050fs1051


2-133

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the

tray upper limit sensor/BP (PS25) [2].

Note:

• Take note of the original scale.

(1) If it is not within the standard value:

Adjust the vertical position of the sensor mounting

bracket to make the height of the entrance guide

upper surface and the up/down plate upper surface

to be within the standard value.

• When raising the height of the up/down plate:lower the sensor mounting bracket.

• When lowering height of the up/down plate:lower the sensor mounting bracket.

(2) If any problem occurs:

• When the edge of the fed paper is folded: raisethe position of the sensor mounting bracket.

• When paper with a concave curl is fed: raise theposition of the sensor mounting bracket.

• When paper with a convex curl is fed: lower theposition of the sensor mounting bracket.

1. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover.

2. Replace the ADU.


tion.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of

PS25 again if the problem continues to occur.

[2]

[1]

8050fs1052


2-134

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.3 Pick-up movement amountadjustment (by-pass)

Perform the pick-up movement amount adjustment

when a no feed jam occurs frequently.

A. Procedure



solenoid cover [2].

3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the

pick-up solenoid/BP (SD5) [2].

Note:

• Take note of the original scale.

4. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover.

5. Replace the ADU.


tion.

7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of SD5

again if the no feed jam continues to occur.

[1][2]

[1]

8050fs1053

[2]

[1]

8050fs1054


2-135

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.4 Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment

Perform this adjustment when the mis-centering

occurs even after "Printer-centering adjustment" in

the 36 mode, has been performed.

A. Procedure

1. Pull out the paper feed tray.

2. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the up/down plate [1].

3. Move the guide plate and adjust the center posi-

tion.

4. Tighten 3 screws [2].

5. Print the test pattern (No.16).

6. Fold the output in half vertically and check

whether the mis-centering [3] of the center of

image [2] against the center of paper [1] is

within the standard value.

Standard value: ± 3 mm or less

7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the mis-centering

amount is within the standard value.

8050fs1055

[2][1]

[3]

8050fs1056

[2]

[1]

[3]


2-136

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.5 Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheetfeed pressure adjustment

Perform the sheet feed pressure adjustment when

the no feed jam or the double feed jam occurs at the

paper feed. The sheet feed pressure is affected by

the paper type and the operating environment (the

no feed jam is likely in the low temperature environ-

ment and the double feed is likely in the high tem-

perature environment). Excess adjustment may

reverse the symptom.

A. Procedure

1. Pull out the paper feed tray [1].


unit cover [3].

[2]

[1]

[2]

[3]

8050fs1057


2-137

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

3. Unplug the connector [1].

4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down

shaft screw [3].

5. Slide the paper feed unit [4] toward the rear side

and lift it up. Then, unplug the connector [5] and

remove the paper feed unit [4].

6. Change the hook position of the spring [1] at the

bottom of the paper feed unit.

Weak[2]: Double feed jam is corrected.

Strong [3]: No feed jam is corrected.

7. Replace the paper feed unit and the paper feed

tray.

[1]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[3]

8050fs1058

8050fs1059

[1]

[2] [3]


2-138

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.6 FNS adjustment of the by-pass conveyance guide platemagnet

A. Procedure


2. Check whether the stopper piece [4] of the by-

pass conveyance guide plate is in contact with

the by-pass conveyance guide plate/L [5] when

the magnet [2] for the by-pass conveyance

guide plate [1] is attached to the front panel [3].

If not, perform the following adjustment.

3. Loosen the magnet screw [1].

4. Push the by-pass conveyance guide plate [2]

toward the arrow until the stopper piece [4]

comes into contact with the conveyance guide

plate/L [4].

5. Attach the magnet [5] to the front panel [6].

Then, tighten the magnet screw [1].

6. Close the finisher door.

8050fs1075

[1]

[1]

[3][5]

[5]

[2]

[4]

[2]

[4]

8050fs1076

[2]

[6][5]

[1]

[3]

[4]


2-139

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.7 FNS adjustment of the by-pass gate

A. Procedure


2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].

3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [2]. Then, pull out

the stacker unit further.

Note:

• To avoid FNS from falling, make sure to place

a support [3] under the stacker unit.

4. Open the by-pass conveyance guide plate [1].

5. Visually check whether the clearance between

the by-pass gate [2] and the by-pass convey-

ance plate [3] is within the standard value when

the by-pass gate solenoid (SD705) is off.

Standard value: A = 3.2 ± 0.5 mm


8050fs1077[3]

[1]

[2]

[2]

8050fs1078

A=3.2

0.5m

m

[2]

[2]

[1]

[3]


2-140

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


7. Unplug all connectors [2] from the FNS control

board (FNSCB) [1] and remove the wiring har-

ness from the clamp [3].

8. Remove 5 screws [4]. Then, remove the FNSCB

[1] with the bracket [5].

9. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the by-pass gate sole-

noid (SD705) [1] and adjust the position of SD

705 [1] based on the mark [5] to make the clear-

ance between the by-pass gate [3] and the by-

pass conveyance plate [4] to be within the stan-

dard value when SD705 [1] is off.



steps in reverse.

8050fs1079

[4]

[2] [3]

[5]

[1]

8050fs1080

A=3.2 0.5mm

[5]

[2]

[1]

[4]

[3]


2-141

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.8 FNS adjustment of the shiftposition

A. Procedure

1. Remove the following parts.

• Top cover or optional PI (if installed)• Top cover/22. Turn on the main body, and then drive the shift

motor (M702) in the 47 mode (code 75-2/75-3).

3. Check whether the edge of the actuator [5] for

the slide gear is placed in the notched hole [3] at

the slide stay [2] for the shift unit [1] for both the

HP search (home position) and the shift posi-

tion.


4. Loosen the bracket screw [2] for the shift HP

sensor (PS718) and adjust the position of the

bracket [4] based on the mark [3].

5. Tighten the bracket screw [2] when the adjust-

ment is complete.


steps in reverse.

8050fs1081

[5][3]

[4]

[2]

[1]

8050fs1082

[2]

[3]

[4][1]


2-142

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.9 FNS adjustment of the paperexit opening solenoid

A. Procedure


• Top cover/1 or optional PI (if installed)• Top cover/2• Rear cover2. Turn on the main body, and then turn on the

paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) in the 47

mode (code 75-31).

3. Check whether the clearance between the

plunger [2] on the solenoid and the stopper [3]

on the bracket is within the standard value when

SD704 [1] is on.



4. Remove 2 solenoid bracket screws [1] and

remove the solenoid [2] with the bracket [3].

8050fs1083

A=6.5 0.5mm

[1]

[2]

8050fs1084

[1]

[3]

[2]


2-143

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

5. Loosen 2 solenoid screws [1], adjust the posi-

tion of the solenoid [2], and then tighten the

screws.


6. Replace the solenoid bracket [1] and tighten the

solenoid bracket screws [5] at the position

where the paper exit guide [2] is in contact with

the stopper (rubber) [4] on the paper exit guide

stay [3].

Note:

• There should be the gap of 1 mm or more

between the paper exit guide [2] and the paper

exit guide stay [3].


steps in reverse.

8050fs1085

[2]

[1]

A=6.5 0.5mm

8050fs1086

1mm

[1] [5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[2]

[3]


2-144

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.10 FNS adjustment of the posi-tion of paper exit arm

A. Procedure

1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker

unit.

2. Check whether the upper face of the paper exit

belt arm [4] is located at the center of 2 marks

[5] when the edge of the actuator [2] for the belt

detection gear [1] is placed in the notched hole

[3] at the rear panel.

If not, perform the adjustment.

3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker

unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.

Note:

• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to

place a support under the stacker unit.

8050fs1087

[3]

[1]

[2]

[5]

[4]


2-145

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

4. Remove a screw [2] for the belt detection gear

[1]. Place the paper eject belt arm at the speci-

fied position. Then, fix the detection gear [1] at

the specified position.


steps in reverse.

8050fs1088

[1]

[2]


2-146

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.11 FNS adjustment of the posi-tion of alignment plate/U

A. Procedure

1. Turn on the main body. Once the finisher com-

pletes its initial operation, turn off the main body.


unit.



Note:



4. Check whether the actuator [2] for the alignment

HP sensor/U (PS708) [1] is aligned with the

home position.

5. Check whether the clearance A for the align-

ment plate/U [1] is within the standard value.

Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in)


8050fs1089

[1]

[2]

8050fs1090

[1] PS708

A=340.6 mm


2-147

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6. Loosen 2 screws [1]. Align the rear side of the

alignment plate/U [2] with the long line at the

center of the marking lines [3]. Then, adjust the

front side of the alignment plate/U [4] to be

within the standard value based on the rear

side.

8050fs1091

[1] [3]

[2]

[1] [2][4]


2-148

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.12 FNS adjustment of the posi-tion of alignment plate/L(only for FN-9)

A. Procedure

1. Check whether "Adjustment of the position of

FNS alignment plate/U" has been completed.

2. Turn on the main body. In the 47 mode, use one

of the following codes to drive a motor and turn

off the main body.

• Code 75-8: alignment motor/U (M705) homeposition search

• Code 75-21: alignment motor/L (M716) homeposition search

• Code 75-39: stopper motor (M718) moves to theA4R or larger position


unit.



Note:

• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure

to place a support under the stacker unit.

5. Remove the stapler unit cover.

6. Check whether the actuator for the alignment

HP sensor/U (PS708) is aligned with the home

position.

7. Check whether the actuator [3] for the alignment

HP sensor/L (PS724) for the alignment plate/L

[1] is aligned with the home position.

8050fs1092

[1]

[2]

[3]


2-149

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

8. Place a sheet larger than A4R in the stacker

section and check the position of the alignment

plate/U (rear) [1] and alignment plate/L (rear) [2]

by placing a sheet [3]. Check whether the space

A between the alignment plate/L (rear) [2] and

the alignment plate/L (front) [4] is within the

standard value.

Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in)


9. Loosen 2 screws [1] and adjust the position of

the alignment plate/L [2] to be within the stan-

dard value.

8050fs1093

[3][1]

[2][4]

A=340.6 mm

8050fs1094

[1][1]

[1]

[2]

[2]


2-150

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.13 FNS adjustment of the sta-pling position (flat stapling)

Note:

• Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal

direction manually (it may cause the teeth to

skip between the belt and gear).

A. Procedure

1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it

is performed within the standard value.

• Standard value for the one-corner stapling (atrear) [1]: A = 8.5 ± 3mm

• Standard value for the one-corner stapling (atfront) [2]: B = 8.5 ± 3mm

• Standard value for the flat stapling [3]: C= B=8.5± 3mm

(In the flat stapling, the paper edge and the line [4]

connecting 2 staples must become parallel)



unit.



Note:




8050fs1095

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

A=8.5 3mm

B=8.5 3mm

C=8.5 3mm


2-151

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

5. Loosen the adjustment screws [3] for the

clincher/F [1] and the clincher/R [2] and adjust

the position of the flat-stapling stopper [5] based

on the mark [4].

6. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it

is performed within the standard value.

8050fs1096

[1]

[1]

[2]

[2]

[4]

[4] [3]

[5]


2-152

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.14 FNS adjustment of the sta-pling position in a verticaldirection

A. Procedure

Note:


direction manually (it may cause the teeth to

skip between the belt and gear).

1. Perform a stapling operation to check for the

clinch failure.

• Buckled staple-needles [1]• Floating stapling [2] (standard value: L = 1mm or

less)• Height of belt staple-needle [3] (standard value:

L = 0.7mm or less)If there is a failure, perform the following adjust-

ment.

Note:

• Adjust the clincher or stapler if it is replaced

or removed.


unit.



Note:

• To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure

to place a support under the stacker unit.


5. Remove the cartridge [1], open the cover [2],

and then remove the staple sheet [3] by sliding

it.

8050fs1097

[1]

[2]

[3]

L=1mm

L=0.7mm

LL

8050fs1098[2]

[3][1]


2-153

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler position-

ing jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into

the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then

close the cover [5].

7. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler.

8. Loosen 4 screws [3] for the clincher/F [1] and

the clincher/R [2].

8050fs1099

[1]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[4]

8050fs1100

[1] [2]

[3]

[2][1]

[3] [3]


2-154

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2

guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2]

into the holes [5] on the clincher [4].

Note:

• The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be

hooked on the clincher.

8050fs1101

[2]

[1]

[5]

[2]

[3]

[4]


2-155

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

10. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler downward.

Adjust the position of the clincher [4] for the

plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be inserted

into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly. Rotate the

gear [1] downward further. Then, place the plate

[2] onto the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the

jig into the clincher unit [4].

11. Tighten 4 screws for each clincher.

12. Remove the jig by rotating the gear for the sta-

pler upward.

Note:

• Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the

clincher when removing the stapler position-

ing jig.

13. Remove the cartridge and plate. Then, replace

the staple sheet removed at the step 5. Replace

the cartridge.

14. Check the operation of the stapler.

8050fs1102[1]

[2]

[3]

[1]

[4]


2-156

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.15 FNS adjustment of the sta-pling position (flat stapling)(only for FN-9)

A. Procedure

Note:


direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip

between the belt and gear).

1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether

the paper edge and the line [2] connecting 2 sta-

ples [1] becomes parallel [3] and the discrep-

ancy L is within the standard value.

Standard value: discrepancy L = 1 mm or less

If the discrepancy is not within the standard

value, perform the following adjustment.

2. Check whether "adjustment of the position of

FNS alignment plate/U" and "adjustment of the

position of alignment plate/L" has been com-

plete.


unit.



Note:




6. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the alignment plate/L

[1].

8050fs1103

L

[1]

[2]

[3]

8050fs1104[2]

[1]


2-157

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7. Adjust the position based on the mark [3] to

make the upper edge [1] and lower edge [2] of

paper to be horizontal.

8. Tighten the 3 screws, then perform a stapling

operation to check whether the stitch-and-fold

position is within the standard value.

8050fs1105[3]

[3]

[2]

[1]


2-158

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.16 FNS adjustment of the angleof the folding stopper (onlyfor FN-9)

Note:


direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip

between the belt and gear).

• Never loosen the screw [1] that must not be

removed.

A. Procedure

1. Perform a folding operation with A3 paper to

check whether the discrepancy at the folding

edge is within the standard value.

Standard value: A = 1mm or less

If the discrepancy is not within the standard

value, perform the following adjustment.


unit.



Note:




8050fs1106

[1]

8050fs1107

A


2-159

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

5. Loosen 5 screws [2] for the folding stopper [1]

and adjust the angle based on the mark [3].

Note:

• Never loosen the screw [4] that must not be

removed.

6. Tighten the 5 screws [2], then perform the fold-

ing to check whether the discrepancy is within

the standard value.

8050fs1108

[1]

[3]

[2]

[4]


2-160

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.17 FNS adjustment of the fold-ing force (only for FN-9)

A. Procedure

1. Perform the followings to change the pressure of

the folding roller.



unit.

4. Remove the stacker unit cover.

5. Change the positions of each 2 pressure

springs [3] at front [1] and rear [2].

Note:

• The 4 pressure springs [3] must be hooked on

the hook holes with same symbol.

8050fs1109[3]

[1]

[3]

[2]

C

AA

B

C

B

C

A

B

C

A

B


2-161

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-holding position (only forFN-9)

A. Procedure

1. Check whether "adjustment of the angle of the

folding stopper" has been completed.

2. Perform a three-folding operation to check

whether the three-folding position is within the

specification.

If it is not within the specification, perform the

following adjustment.

3. Turn on the main body, adjust the first folding

position (standard value a) in "Finisher adjust-

ment" ⇒ "Three-holding position adjustment" in

the 36 mode. Then, perform the three-folding for

confirmation.

4. Once the first folding line is adjusted within the

specification, open the finisher door and pull out

the stacker unit.

5. Open the three-folding guide plate [1], loosen 2

three-folding stopper screws [2], and then adjust

the position of the three-folding stopper [4]

based on the mark [3].

6. Tighten the 2 screws [2], then perform the three-

folding to check whether the three-folding posi-

tion is within the standard value.

Folding

position

Standard value Specification

A4R 8.5 x 11R

a 95 mm 89.4 mm ± 2 mm

b 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm

c 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm

8050fs1110

a

b

c

8050fs1111

[1][2][4]

[2]

[3]


2-162

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.19 FNS adjustment of the sta-pler drive belt position

A. Procedure

Note:

• This adjustment is performed only if the posi-

tion between the drive belt and the gear is dis-

placed during another adjustment by mistake.


unit.



Note:




• Rear cover• Stapler unit cover4. Insert the stacker unit.

5. Loosen 2 screws (M3) [2] for the staple slide

pulley/B [1] from the rear side with the hexago-

nal wrench [3].

6. Move the stapler and clincher simultaneously

toward center until they contacts with the bear-

ing.

Note:

• Make sure to move them simultaneously. The

flat-stapling stopper may be damaged at the

metal frame of the stapler if they are moved

individually.

8050fs1112

[1] [3][2]


2-163

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

7. Remove the cartridge [1] for the stapler/R, open

the cover [2], and then remove the staple sheet

[3] by sliding it.

8. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler position-

ing jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into

the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then

close the cover [5].

9. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler/R.

8050fs1113

[1]

[2]

[3]

8050fs1114

[4]

[5]

[3]

[2]

[1]


2-164

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

10. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2

guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2]

into the holes [5] on the clincher [4].

Note:

• The stapler positioning jig is adequate to behooked on the clincher.

11. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler/R downward.

Adjust the horizontal position of the clincher [4]

for the plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be

inserted into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly.

Then, adjust the horizontal position of the sta-

pler/R and the clincher/R. Then, rotate the gear

[1] downward further. Place the plate [2] onto

the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the jig into

the clincher unit [4].

Note:

• Do not loosen the screws for the clincher at

this time.

• The stapler/R and the clincher/R must be

finely adjusted if the position is not matched.

8050fs1115

[2]

[1]

[5]

[2]

[3]

[4]

8050fs1116[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]


2-165

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

12. Insert the stacker with the jig attached (with the

plate and the jig joined). Then, tighten 2 screws

for the staple slide pulley/B from the rear side.

13. Pull out the stacker unit. Then, remove the jig by

rotating the gear for the stapler upward.

Note:

• Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the

clincher when removing the stapler position-

ing jig.

14. Remove the cartridge for the stapler/R and

plate. Replace the staple sheet removed at the

step 7 and replace the cartridge. Then check fol-

lowing 3 stapling operations.

• 1-staple (at rear)• 1-staple (at front)• 2-staple15. Replace the rear cover and the stapler cover.


2-166

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.20 TU adjustment of the sheetcutting parallelism

A. Procedure

1. Measure the length between the folding face [1]

and trimming surface [2] and calculate the paral-

lelism. Then, check whether it is within the stan-

dard value.

Standard value: parallelism = A-B = ± 1 mm or

less


2. Open the front door [1].

3. Push up the pressure release lever [2].

4. Loosen the screw [3]. Then adjust the convey-

ance guide plate [5] based on the mark [4].

5. Tighten the screw [3].

8050fs1117

[1] [2]

A

B

8050fs1118

[2]

[1]

[5]

[3][4]


2-167

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.21 LCT tray mis-centeringadjustment

Perform this adjustment when the positioning cor-

rection cannot be done (the mis-centering amount

exceeds the automatic adjustment range of ± 5mm)

even if "Printer centring adjustment (tray 4)" in the

36 mode, has been performed.

A. Procedure

1. Print the test pattern No.16 to check the mis-

centering amount.

2. Lift up the up/down plate [1].


4. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the top of LCT. Then,

slide the guide plate/front [4] and the guide

plate/rear [5] in the same direction at the same

amount.

8050fs1064

[3] [5][4] [3]

[2]

[1]


2-168

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

5. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the center positioning

bracket [1] at the bottom of LCT. Then, slide the

guide plate in the same direction at the same

amount with step 4

6. Tighten the 2 screws [2].

7. Replace the LCT and print the test pattern

No.16 again.

8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the mis-centering

amount becomes within the automatic adjust-

ment range.

8050fs1065

[2]

[1]


2-169

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.22 LCT skew adjustment

Perform the LCT skew adjustment when the paper

skew is different with paper supplied from the other

tray in such case as LCT is placed on the inclined

surface. However, it has just a little effect because

all paper is corrected at the second paper feed sec-

tion.

A. When all printouts are skewed:

1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous

copy mode to check the skew amount.

2. Open the front door of the LCT.

3. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the positioning bracket

[1] at the bottom of the LCT.

4. Adjust the position of the positioning bracket [2].


8050fs1066

[2][1]


2-170

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

B. When some printouts are skewed:

1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous

copy mode to check the skew amount.


3. Loosen 6 screws [2] at the top of LCT to loosen

the guide plate/front [3], the guide plate/rear [4],

and the guide plate/right side [5].

4. Tighten the 6 screws at the position where each

guide plate is in contact with paper.

Reference:

• The size indicator on the guide plate is

approximately 2mm wider than the actual

standard size paper. It may cause the skew for

some paper. The skew amount is reduced if

paper is fixed with each guide plate in tight.

8050fs1067

[2] [4][3] [2]

[1]

[5]

[2]


2-171

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.23 LCT paper feed roller pres-sure adjustment

Perform the LCT paper feed roller pressure adjust-

ment when the no feed jam occurs at the paper

feed.

Note:

• The weight plate is a supply part. It should be

purchased separately.

A. Procedure


2. Remove the spring [2].

3. Install the weight plate [4] on the paper feed

roller [3] with 2 screws [5].

4. Replace the spring [2].

5. Close the top cover.

6. Perform the continuous copy to check the paper

feed.

7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 if the no feed jam continues

to occur at the paper feed.

8050fs1068

[2]

[5] [4]

[1][3]


2-172

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.24 LCT up/down plate horizon-tal adjustment

Perform the LCT up/down plate horizontal adjust-

ment when the paper feed jam occurs frequently or

the up/down wire is replaced.

A. Procedure



3. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the front and rear side.

4. Position the mark [5] to make the up/down plate

to be horizontal with 2 adjusting screws [4] at

the front and rear side.


8050fs1069

[2]

[1] [5][3][4]

[1][5] [3] [4]


2-173

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.25 LCT sheet feed pressureadjustment

Perform the LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment

when a no feed jam or a double feed jam occurs at

the paper feed.

The sheet feed pressure is affected by the paper

type and the operating environment (the no feed

jam is likely in the low temperature environment and

the double feed is likely in the high temperature

environment).

A. Procedure

1. Remove LCT from the main body.

2. Check the adjusting spring mechanism [2] from

the top left side of the LCT (paper exit side) [1].

3. Change the spring hook position [2] depending

on the symptom.

• The load of the spring changes approximately10% for a change in its position.

Note:

• Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom.

For example, a no feed jam becomes a double

feed jam.

Weak: Double feed jam is corrected.

Strong: No feed jam is corrected.

8050fs1070

[2] [1]


2-174

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.26 LCT paper feed height (upperlimit) adjustment

Perform the LCT paper feed height (upper limit)

adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge

of the fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled

paper. The adjustment is performed by changing

the vertical position of the upper limit sensor

(PS109).

A. Procedure



3. Measure the height of the entrance guide upper

surface [3] and up/down plate upper surface [4]

with a scale to check whether it is within the

standard value.

Standard value: 2 to 5mm

Perform the following adjustment if it is not within

the standard value or the edge of the fed paper is

folded even if it is within the standard value.

Note:

• This adjustment affects the pick-up release

amount.

When the adjustment is complete, perform

"9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjust-

ment".

4. Remove the sprint [6] from the paper feed unit

[5].


6. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [8]

toward right.

8050fs1071

[6]

[5]

[1][4]

[2]

[3]

[8]

[7]


2-175

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T


8. Move the sensor mounting bracket [2] vertically

to make the height of the entrance guide upper

surface and the up/down plate upper surface to

be within the standard value.

If it is not within the standard value and the

height of the up/down plate has to be raised:

•When paper with a convex curl is fed: Lower the position of the sensor mountingbracketIf it is not within the standard value and theheight of the up/down plate has to be lowered:

•When the edge of the fed paper is folded:•When paper with a concave curl is fed:

Raise the position of the sensor mountingbracket

9. When the adjustment is complete, tighten a

screw [1].

8050fs1072

[2][1]


2-176

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.27 LCT pick-up release amountadjustment

Perform the LCT pick-up release amount adjust-

ment when a no feed jam occurs frequently. The

adjustment is performed by changing the horizontal

position of the paper feed solenoid (SD100).

A. Procedure



3. Remove the sprint [4] from the paper feed unit

[3].


5. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [6]

toward right.

8050fs1073

[4]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[6]

[5]


2-177

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

6. Pull the moving section of SD100 (paper feed

solenoid) [1] and measure the distance between

the paper feed roller [2] and the upper surface of

the up/down plate [3] to check whether it is


Standard value: 0.5 to 2.5mm

Perform the following adjustment if it is not



Note:

• Before starting the operation, note the origi-

nal position of the solenoid.

8. Move the paper feed solenoid (SD100) [1] hori-

zontally to make the distance between the paper

feed roller and the upper surface of the up/down

plate to be within the standard value.

9. Tighten the screw [4] for the paper feed sole-

noid.

8050fs1074

[3]

[2]

[4]

[1]


2-178

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.28 PK Adjusting the tilt of thepunch hole position

A. Preparation

1. Check the following items:

• The finisher is connected to the main body.• The main body is loaded with the paper based

on the punch specifications.2. Check the skew of output paper in advance.

• Slide the side guide plate and the rear guideplate for the main body's feed tray, and align thepaper loaded on the main body's tray.

• Check the skew by using the platen copy oradjustment mode.

3. To check the tilt of the punch hole position, make

a sample copy in the punch mode.

4. Make three copies each in single side copy

mode and double side copy mode with the

punch mode to check the skew.

B. Procedure

1. Measure the position of the sampled punch

holes to check the tilt of the position.

2. Open the front cover.

3. Remove the punch unit cover by removing three

screws

4. Loosen the four adjustment screws of PK.

5. Using the mark scale as a guide, move the

punch unit horizontally by the amount of tilt for

the punch hole position.

1 scale: 0.5%

6. Retighten the screws.

7. Reinstall the punch unit cover.

8. Make a sample copy of punch mode and

recheck the tilt of the punch hole position.

A

B

C

Punch unit cover

7165field135iScrews

Adjustment screws

7165field128i

Adjust to the left or right

Adjustment screws

Mark


2-179

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.29 Sensitivity adjustment forthe PK paper edge sensor

A. Preparation

1. Check that the finisher is connected to the main

body.

B. Procedure

1. Open the front door of the finisher.

2. Remove the punch drive board cover by remov-

ing one screw

3. Power on the main body.

4. Turn the volume fully clockwise and then turn it

back counterclockwise until the LED corre-

sponding to each volume lights up

5. Perform the procedure of step 4 for all five vol-

umes.

6. Power off the main body after completing the

adjustment.

7. Reinstall the punch drive board cover.

8. Close the front door of the finisher.

7165field129i

Punch drive board cover

Screw

7165field130i

LED

Punch drive board (PKDB)

Volumes


2-180

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.30 PI Centering Adjustment

Note:

• PI Centering adjustement must be performed

on the upper tray first, then on the lower tray.

When it is necessary to slide the side guide

plate (rear) a lot, perform step 11 before step 3

and subsequent procedures.

• When tightening two screws of the side guide

plate (rear), be careful not to tighten them too

much. (Tightening torque: less than 5kg/cm)

A. Preparation

1. Check that PK adjusting the punch hole vertical

position has been completed.

2. Perform Tray 1/2/3 centering adjustment.

3. Feed the three sheets from PI with the punch

mode.

4. Check the position of each punch hole on the

three sheets.

B. Procedure

1. Release the hook and remove the adjustment

cover of the side guide plate (rear)

2. When adjusting for the lower tray, remove two

screws and slide rightward to remove the side

guide plate (rear)

3. Loosen two adjustment screws securing the

side guide plate (rear), and slide it by the twice

the difference. (ie: If there is 1.5mm difference

in direction of rear side, slide by 3mm to rear

side.)

1 scale : 2 mm

4. Fasten the two adjustment screws securely to fix

the side guide plate (rear).

5. In case of the lower tray, install the side guide

plate (rear).

6. Set a sheet on the tray and fit the side guide

plate (rear) to the sheet to check that the side

guide plate (rear) is parallel to the sheet.

7. Feed the three sheets from PI with the punch

mode.

8. Check the position of each punch hole.

9. Repeat step 2 to 8 until the difference of the

holes is improved.

10. Install the adjustment cover to the side guide

plate (rear).

11. Set A4R size paper to the tray and perform the

cover sheet tray size adjustment in 36 mode.

Pi-W-1

Side guide plate

(rear)

Adjustment cover

Hock

Pi-W-2

ScrewsSide guide plate

(rear)

Pi-W-3

Adjustment

screws

Side guide plate (rear)


2-181

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

9.31 Adjusting the tilt of PI (whenPK punch is used)

A. Preparation

1. Check the following items:

• PI is connected to FNS.• The tray of PI is loaded with paper.2. Check the tilt of output paper in advance.

• Feed 3 sheets from PI with the Punch modeselected to check the tilt of punch holes.

3. Loosen one screw securing the guide plate.

B. Procedure

1. Fold each of the fed 3 sheets into two as illus-

trated below and find out in which direction the

punch holes tilt.)

2. Open the FNS front cover.

3. Loosen one screw securing the guide plate.

4. Using the mark as a guide, move the guide plate

laterally by the amount of tilt in the position of

punch holes.

5. Retighten the screw securing the guide plate.

6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the amount of tilt in the

position of punch holes is improved.

7165field142i

Tilting toward

the right edge

of the sheet

Tilting toward

the left edge

of the sheet

Tilting towardthe right edgeof the sheet

Tilting towardthe left edgeof the sheet

Screw securingthe guide plate

7165field143i


2-182

II A

DJ

US

TM

EN

T

Blank page

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ISW

3-1

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

III SERVICE TOOL

1. ISW

1.1 Description of the ISW

ISW (In-system Writer) is an operation to rewrite the

control program stored in the flash ROM on a vari-

ety of control boards in Minolta's digital copier with-

out removing the boards from the main body of the

copier. ISW allows you to update the version of the

control program without replacing the board or to

install the latest program when replacing the board.

[ISWTrns (PC software)] is provided to execute ISW,

which rewrite the program by connecting a PC to

the digital copier. The software rewrites the control

program stored in the flash ROM in the copier main

body directly.

1.2 Installing the USB driver forISWTrns

Note:

• It is required to install the USB driver for

ISWTrns to perform ISW via USB on this

machine. See the installation procedure file

attached to ISWTrns for the installation proce-

dure.

• Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to

turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] -

[Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and

press the OK button.

• Only ISWTrns is supported for ISW in this

machine.

ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

3-2

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

1.3 Setup

1.3.1 Board used for the ISW

ISWTrns supports the following boards for rewriting

the control program in CF5001.

• Overall control board (OACB)

• Printer controller board (PRCB)

• Operation board/1 (OB1)

• RADF control board (DFCB)

• FNS control board (FNSCB)

• See IP SHB for the printer controller.

ROM replacement is needed for boards other than

the above.

1.3.2 Data flow

The following shows the ISW data flow.

Note:

• The control program on other boards cannot

be written until that for the overall control

board (OACB) is written.

1.3.3 ISW transfer type

The copier supports three ISW transfer modes as

follows.

A. Power ON mode

The power ON mode is used if no program is

installed on the overall control board (OACB) or it is

faulty.

If no program is installed on OACB, the OACB pro-

gram becomes possible to be written at power ON.

No display appears on the operation panel and the

timer LED flashes even if the operation board con-

trol program is installed because the OACB controls

the power for the operation board.

B. HELP + CHECK mode

The HELP + CHECK mode is started when the

main switch (SW2) is pressed while pressing

"HELP" and "CHECK button." This mode is

designed specifically for ISW to be started when the

overall control program is installed but the operation

board control program is not installed because the

25 mode cannot be started in such case.

C. 25 mode

The 25 mode is available only if both the overall

control program and the operation board control

program are installed.

PC OACB OB1

PRCB DFCB

FNSCB


3-3

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

1.3.4 Instances of ISW transfer

A. When writing a new program (because

replacing a board or failed to rewrite the

program)

B. When updating the version of the program

Normal startup display ISW transfer method Condition

Overall control board

Flashing timer LEDNo display on the operation panel

Power ON mode Overall control program is not installed or faulty

Operation board /1 Error code display HELP + CHECK mode

The overall control program is installed but the operation board program is not installed or faulty

Others Error code display 25 mode Both the overall control program and the operation board program is installed

Normal startup display ISW transfer method Condition

Overall control board

Normal 25 mode All program has been installed

Operation board /1 Normal 25 mode

Others Normal 25 mode


3-4

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

1.3.5 Setup procedure

A. Connecting a PC

a. Procedure

Note:





B. Power on mode

a. Procedure

C. HELP + CHECK mode

a. Procedure

1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side

cover/2 [2].

2. Connect either of IEEE1284 port [1] or USB

(Type B) port [2] to the PC via a cable.

[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]

1. Turn ON the main switch (SW2).

2. Check the timer LED is flushing.

The control program becomes possible to be

written in this state.

3. Execute the operation according to the proce-

dures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH

ISW Trns."

Note:

• Do not turn OFF the copier while writing theISW data is being rewritten.

4. The operation screen appears if it is completed

successfully.

If it is terminated abnormally, see "E. The rela-

tionship between ISW resulting operation and

the operational LEDs."

1. Turn ON the copie while pressing "HELP" and

"CHECK button."

2. "ISW write mode select menu screen"

Press 1 (PC) with the numeric keys.

ISW WRITE MODE SELECT MENU

1.PC

PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 9.EXIT


3-5

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

3. "ISW device select menu screen"

Select 3 (OPERATION CONTROL) with the

numeric keys.

Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0

(PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.

Note:

• Rewrite programs other than 3 (OPERATIONCONTROL) in the 25 mode because thismode does not support them.

4. "Operation control - item select menu screen"

Select an item from 1 - 5 to rewrite it individu-

ally or select 6 (ALL) to rewrite all items at a

time.

Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0

(PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.

5. "ISW start screen"

Select 1 (YES) to start ISW.

Select 2 (NO) to cancel.

ISW DEVICE SELECT MENU [MODE:PC]

1. GRAPHIC CONTROL

2. PRINTER CONTROL3. OPERATION CONTROL4. ADF5. VIF

PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT

OPERATION CONTROL - ITEM SELECT MENU [MODE:PC]

1. 012. 023. 034. 045. 05

6. ALL

PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. PREVIOUS 9. EXIT

OPERATION CONTROL - 01 [MODE:PC]

ISW START OK ?

PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 1. YES 2. NO

6. "ISW executing screen"

Execute the operation according to the proce-


ISW Trns."

"Result screen" appears once ISW is com-

plete.

7. "Result screen"

• The operation is completed successfully

"NORMAL END" appears.

• The operation is terminated abnormally

"ABNORMAL END" appears.

Check the error code on the screen if the

rewriting is terminated abnormally.

8. Select 0 (CONTINUE) to continue ISW or

select 9 (EXIT) to exit.

"PLEASE TURN OFF A POWER SUPPLY"

appears when pressing 9, then turn OFF the

main switch (SW2).

EXECUTING

*** NORMAL END ***

PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. CONTINUE 9. EXIT

*** ABNORMAL END ***INPUT DEVICE ERROR(ERROR CODE : XX)

PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. CONTINUE 9. EXIT


3-6

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

b. Error code

• Resulting operations

(1) The program is not operating normally. Turn OFF and

ON the main switch (SW2) and then start ISW again.

(2) Check the ISW transfer data file.

(3) Check the connection of the communication

cable from the input device (PC).

(4) Check I/F between the overall control board

and the operation board.

(5) The flash ROM on the overall control board is

faulty.

Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs,

the flash ROM on the overall control board may

be faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace

the overall control board.

(6) An error is detected from the board on which

you want to rewrite the program. Check the

board on which you want to execute ISW.

Error code Causes No. of resulting

operation

01 Error in the instruction against the ISW processing unit (1)

1F Program error (1)

41 Input data format error (at ISW for the operation board program) (2)

42 Model name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) (2)

43 Board name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) (2)

81 Input device error such as the input time out (at ISW for the operation board program)

(3)

C1 Flash ROM erasing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) (5)

C2 Flash ROM writing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) (5)

C3 ROM check sum error (at ISW for the overall control program) (8)

C4 Output device error such as the input time out (6)

E1 Erase error (9)

E2 Write error (9)

E3 Communication error (4)

E9 I/F communication parameter error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)

(4)

EA I/F command sequence error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)

(4)

EB I/F communication timeout error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)

(4)

F0 Flash ROM error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)

F1 Flash ROM verify error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)

F2 Flash ROM write error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)

F3 Flash ROM erase error (at ISW for the operation board program) (7)

F8 I/F receive checksum error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)

(7)

F9 I/F receive header code error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)

(7)

FA I/F receive parity error between the overall control board and the opera-tion board (at ISW for the operation board program)

(7)

FB I/F receive framing error between the overall control board and the oper-ation board (at ISW for the operation board program)

(7)

FC I/F receive overflow error between the overall control board and the oper-ation board (at ISW for the operation board program)

(4)


3-7

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

(7) The flash ROM on the operation board/1 is

faulty.

Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs,

the flash ROM on the operation board/1 may be

faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace

the operation board/1.

(8) The checksum calculated after the program is

written does not become equal to the ROM

checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the

same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file

may not be downloaded properly.

(9) It cannot write/erase data to/from area on which

ISW is executed.

The flash ROM may be faulty or have reached

its life. Replace the object board.

The checksum calculated after the program is

written does not become equal to the ROM

checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the

same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file

may not be downloaded properly.

Note:

• If an error occurs during rewriting the pro-

gram on the overall control board, the opera-

tion panel cannot be displayed even if the

main switch is ON because the program con-

trolling the whole components has been lost.

Execute ISW in the power ON mode if such is

the case.

• If an error occurs during rewriting the pro-

gram on the operation board/1, it cannot be

started in the 25 mode because the error code

is displayed. Execute ISW in the HELP +

CHECK mode if such is the case.

D. 25 mode

a. Procedure



Press the [11 ISW] key.

3. "ISW mode menu screen"

Select a program for which ISW is executed.

4. Pressing the [Start] key, cause the machine to

be data waiting condition.

Note:

• See "C. HELP + CHECK mode" since select-ing "Operation panel" switches to the HELP+ CHECK mode.

5. Execute the operation according to the proce-


ISW Trns."

Note:

• Do not turn OFF the copier while rewritingthe ISW data is being written.


3-8

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

E. The relationship between ISW operation and

the operational LEDs

The following shows the display of the operation

panel in the power ON mode with ISW executed.

No. Operation Timer LED Power save LED

1 CPU initialization OFF OFF

2 During memory check OFF OFF

3 Memory check error (waiting data from PC) Blink OFF

4 ISW processing (receiving data) OFF Blink

5 ISW processing (writing to flash ROM) OFF Blink

6 Transfer data error Blink Blink

7 Flash ROM write error Blink Steady lit

8 Memory check successful and reboot OFF OFF

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 UPDATING WITH ISW Trns

3-9

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

2. UPDATING WITH ISW Trns

2.1 Setting Up ISW Trns

Note:

• The explanation screen here is used based on

another model. Therefore, there is a thing dif-

ferent from an actual screen.

2.1.1 Installing the application program

Install the ISW Trns on the PC.

2.1.2 Setting up ISW Trns

When the ISW Trns program has been installed

on the PC, run it to set up a folder in which the

transfer file (update data) is stored. When this

setting completes, the ISW Trns program is

ready to run.

Step Procedure

1 Boot the PC.

2 Mount setup disk 1 on the PC and double-click the [Setup.exe] icon to start the installer.If an old version ISW Trns program is present, uninstall it first, then start the setup operation.

3 [ISW Trns setup window]Confirm the installation folder as instructed by on-screen guidance and click Next.By default, the program installs in [C:\Program_File\Minolta\ISWTrns for Minolta].To change the installation folder, click Browse and type a new folder name.

4 [Program folder confirmation window]Confirm the ISW Trns program installation folder as instructed by on-screen guidance and click Next.By default, the ISW Trns program installs in [ISW Trns for Minolta].To change the installation folder, either type a new folder name or select one from the list of existing folders on display.

5 [Next disk insertion request window]Mount setup disk 2 as instructed by on-screen guidance and click OK.

6 [Information dialog box]Click OK as instructed by on-screen guid-ance.This procedure will add an ISW Trns icon to the Start menu.

7 [Setup completion window]Click Complete as instructed by on-screen guidance.

8 The ISW Trns install exits automatically.

Step Procedure

1 Boot the PC.

2 [Select [ISW Trns] from the start menu to run the ISW Trns program.

3 [ISW Trns dialog box]

Click OK to set up a folder in which the transfer file (update data) is stored.This dialog box will not appear when ISW Trns is run next time.

4 [Option window]

Set up a folder in which the transfer file (update data) is stored and click Make Folder.By default, the folder in which the ISW Trns program has installed (C:\Program_File\Minolta\ISWTrns for Minolta) has been set up as a storage folder (data folder).To change the storage folder, click Browse and select a new folder or type its full-path name in directly the edit box.

UPDATING WITH ISW Trns CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

3-10

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

Step Procedure

Note:

• Clicking Make Folder will create the fol-lowing hierarchy of folders branchingoff from the new storage folder:

5 [Option window]Click OK.

Note:

• This procedure will save the data fold-ers created in Step 4 to the INI file forthe ISW Trns program.

6 [ISW Trns main window]The ISW Trns main window opens.

CF5001

Printer

Vif

ISWTrns for Minolta

Operation

Euro

Japan

Usa

Adf

Graphic control

Fns


3-11

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

2.1.3 ISW Trns Main Window Overview

The ISW Trns program, when run, comes up

with the ISW Trns main window. The ISW Trns

main window lets you select, verify, and trans-

fer a transfer file (update data) and display

information in it.

A detailed description of its functions follows:

A Select Type frame

Select conditions for a transfer file (update

data). When you select all the four combo

boxes, folder is set up on the basis of the

information set in the INI file.

The settings of the combo boxes selected are

saved to the ISW Trns.INI file when you click

File Send. The ISW Trns program comes up

with the ISW Trns main window prefilled with

these combo box settings when runs next time.

Version selection frame

This frame lets you select which version of a

transfer file you want transmitted when more

than one version is stored in a single folder.

Send file information frame

List the files that are transferred actually on the

basis of the information specified in frames

and . Click File Check to view a checksum

of each file and its consistency (OK, NG or ??).

File Status frame

View detailed information about the version file

as it is selected in .

The table below presents differences in the

ways transfer files are displayed according to

their data distribution types.

* Sample display : Display information may be different from what you actually will see on your machine.

CF5001

CF5001

50img_dc00012003/ 9/15

50img_dc0001.b0150img_dc0001.b00

50img_dc000.b01

1

5

2

3

1

2

4

6


3-12

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

Data sources appearing in the detailed file informa-

tion list

Version Folder edit box

When Select Type frame is established, the

full-path folder name is displayed to reflect the

data folder and the INI file information set up in

the option window. If the transfer file exists in a

folder different from the data folder, change the

folder name to that folder by using Browse

or rewriting the folder name directly.

Those transfer files in the folder that meet the

INI file conditions are listed in File list box .

Version File selection list box

Lists those display files existing in the folder set

in .

Display Files are marked by a wildcard name(such as 85img*.b01) in the ISWTrns.INI file. Ifmultiple versions of a file exist in the folder,therefore, multiple versions would appear inthis list box accordingly.Example: 50img_dc0001AAA.bol 50img_dc002AAA.bol

The files in this list are sorted by name. Whenthe list opens, the last display item in the list ispreselected. Change the choice to establishthe version of transfer files to transmit.

Browse Version File button

Click Browse button to open the folder selection

window and select a folder for .

Send file information display list

List the names of files that are actually trans-

mitted when a version file is selected in . A

count of the number of files that are actuallytransmitted is indicated in a checksum fileattached to each transfer file (write data). If not

all the transfer files are stored in folder or if

extra files are included in it, the error message“Send files not found or invalid file name in thefolder” is displayed. This check is not made.

Clicking the File Check button in calculates

a checksum of the display files as a whole andcompares it with the checksum stored in thechecksum file (*.SUM) attached to the transferfile (write data), displaying the result of thatcomparison.

Display title ORIGINAL (Batch data) DIVIDE (Divided data)

File Name File name of the version selection file File name of the version selection file

File Date Date of the version selection file Date of the version selection file

File Time Time of the version selection file Time of the version selection file

File size File size of the version selection file File size of the version selection file

ROM Version Footer information Footer information (last file)

SP ROM Version Footer information Footer information (last file)

Message Conversion For development use For development use

Machine Name Header information + INI file Header information + INI file

Country Combo box display Combo box display

Board Name Header information + INI file Header information + INI file

Data Format Header information (Binary) Header information (Binary)

5

1

7

6

6

5

7

5

8

6

5

9


3-13

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

File Check button

Click this button when send files are listed in

the Send File Info list in , and a file check-

sum of the transfer files displayed (file check-

sum) is calculated and attached to each file.

Further, the calculated checksum is compared

with the checksum storage file (*.SUM)

attached to the transfer file (write data) to dis-

play the result of the comparison in the follow-

ing format:

[OK] = Matched

[NG] = Unmatched

[??] = Checksum file (*.SUM) not found

File Send Button

Perform transmission of transfer files

2.1.4 Parallel port setup

If a parallel data transfer is to be executed with

the ISW Trns program, the ECP mode setting

of the PC parallel port should be cleared. ISW

Trns does not support parallel data transfers. If

a parallel data transfer is launched with the PC

set in ECP mode, the transfer could be aborted

by an error occurring in between. It would be

necessary, therefore, to disable ECP mode

before run ISW Trns on a PC with the ECP set-

ting.

Instructions on how to disable ECP mode are

given below.

9

8

10Step Procedure

1 Boot the PC.

2 Open the System icon in the Control Panel and click the Device Manager tab. Then, search for LPT1 in Ports (COM/LPT1).

Note:

• If LPT1 appears as “ECP Printer Port(LPT1),” then it is an ECP port.

• If LPT1 appears as “Printer Port(LPT1),” then it is a regular parallel port.

3 With an ECP printer port, change the BIOS setting of the PC to disable the ECP port.

Note:

• Because the BIOS setting depends onthe PC, check with your system admin-istrator on how to disable ECP mode.

4 When the BIOS change is complete, open the System icon in the Control panel and change the parallel port driver.

5 Run a send test to verify the successful operation.

Note:

• If a transfer succeeds on one copiermodel, then transfers would be suc-cessful on all models.


3-14

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

2.2 Copying Transfer Data(Update Data)

Run the ISW Trns program to copy transfer

data (update data) to the PC.

Step Procedure

1 Boot the PC.

2 Select ISW Trns from the Start menu to run the ISW Trns program.

3 Click the Option menu.

4 [Option window]

Click Data Copy.

5 [File Copy window]

Mount an update disk on the PC and click Browse.

6 Select the folder on drive A that contains the transfer file (update data) as a source file.

Note:

• The selected folder is displayed in theupper section in the Original Files field.

• The transfer files (update data) that arestored in the selected folder are dis-played in the lower section in the Origi-nal Files field.

7 Select the transfer files (update data) you want copied from the lower section in the Original Files field.

Note:

• You can select multiple transfer files(update data).

• To copy all the files (update data) dis-played, skip this step to go to Step 8directly.

8 Click Copy to copy the selected transfer files (update data) to the folder created at ISW Trns setup.

Note:

• To copy all the files (update data) dis-played in the Original Files field, clickCopy All, instead of Copy.

• The folder name created at ISW Trnssetup is displayed above the CopiedFile field.

• The transfer files that have been copiedsuccessfully so far are listed in full-path name in the lower part of the Cop-ied File list view.The transfer files that have not beencopied successfully are listed in theFailed to Copy Files list view.Causes of copy errors:

1. A file with the same name existed and

the O/W (overwrite) check box was not

checked.

2. The storage destination folder could

not be found.

3. Attempted to overwrite an overwrite

protected file.

• To update existing transfer files (updatedata), check the O/W (overwrite) checkbox.

9 When the copying completes, click Refresh.

10 If more update disks are involved, repeat Steps 5 to 9.

11 Click Cancel to return to the option win-dow.

12 [Option window]Click OK.


3-15

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

2.3 Connecting the CF5001

The ISW connector is hidden under the drum

cover. Detach this cover to run ISW.

A. Procedure

(1) Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover/

2 [2]

(2) Connect the PC port and the copier ISW con-

nector with interface cable.

Note:





2.4 Updating

2.4.1 Update operation overview

Follow the steps below to update the ROM data

on each control board using ISW Trns. For

more operational details, see the relevant parts

of this section.

[2]

[1]

Interface cable

USB (TypeB) port

IEEE1284 port

PC

Step Procedure

1 Check the ROM version of the copier before proceeding with updating. (See 2.4.2 “Checking the ROM version of the copier (before updating).”)

2 Run the ISW Trns program. (See 2.4.4 ”Running ISW Trns.”).

3 Set the copier in ISW receive mode.(See 2.4.3 “Preparing the copier to trans-fer.”)

4 Select conditions for transfer files (update data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.5 “Selecting transfer file (update data) conditions.”)

5 Select a version of transfer files (update data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.6 “Selecting a version of transfer files (update data).”)

6 Verify the transfer files (update data) selected with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.7“Verify-ing transfer files (update data).”

7 Transmit the transfer files (update data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.8 “Transmitting transfer files (update data).”)

8 To update ROM data on more control boards, repeat Steps 3 to 7.

9 Exit the ISW Trns program. (See 2.4.9 “Exiting ISW Trns.”)

10 Verify the ROM version of the copier after updating. (See 2.4.10 “Verifying the ROM version of the copier (after updating).”)


3-16

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

2.4.2 Checking the ROM version of the copier

(before updating)

Before updating ROM data, check the ROM

version of the existing control program in the 25

mode.

2.4.3 Preparing the copier to transfer.

Start the copier with 25 mode enabled to put

the copier into ISW transfer wait state.

2.4.4 Running ISW Trns.

Run the ISW Trns program.

2.4.5 Selecting transfer file (update data)

conditions

Select various conditions for selecting the

transfer files (update data) in the ISW Trns

main window. Conditions to select are:

• (Machine) The name of the model on which

ROM data is updated.

• (Country) The destination of the transfer files

(update data)

• (Board) The name of the board on which ROM

data is updated

• (Divide) The type of the transfer files (update

data)

Step Procedure

1 Turn OFF the copier main switch.

2 Turn ON the copier main switch while hold-ing down the copy count setup buttons 2 and 5, to enable 25 mode.

3 [25 mode menu window]Check the ROM version by following the copier-specific procedure.

Note:

• For operating instructions, refer to theAdjustment section of the service man-ual supplied for the copier.

Step Procedure



3 [25 mode menu window]Put the copier into ISW transfer wait state by following the copier-specific procedure.

Note:

•“ ISW transfer wait state” is the state ofthe copier with the “START” key beingshown in the display area.


Step Procedure

1 Boot the PC.

2 Select ISW Trns from the Start menu and run the ISW Trns program.

Step Procedure

1 [ISW Trns main window]In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Machine] field in [Select Type] and select the name of the model on which to update ROM data from the pulldown menu.

2 In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Country] field in [Select Type] and select the destination of the transfer files (update data) from the pulldown menu.

CF5001

CF5001

USA

EuroJapan


3-17

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

2.4.6 Selecting a version of transfer files

(update data)

When a transfer file (update data) has been

chosen to meet a given set of conditions, it may

be available in multiple versions. Here, select a

particular version of a transfer file (update data)

for use in the actual data transfer.

Step Procedure

3 In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Board] field in [Select Type] and select the name of the board on which to update ROM from the pulldown menu.

4 In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Divide] field in [Select Type] and select a method of dividing the transfer files (update data) from the pulldown menu.

Note:

• Normally, select ORIGINAL as themethod of division.

• Select DIVIDED for large ROM data (e.g.for Main Control Unit), that is dividedinto several files (extension .001.b01,etc.) to be stored to several floppydisks for distribution.

CF5001

USA

CF5001

ORIGINALDIVIDED

USA

C1/C4(ALL)

Step Procedure

1 [ISW Trns main window]In the ISW Trns main window, select a transfer file (update data) of the version that is used in the actual data transfer from among the files listed in the [File] field in [Version].

Note:

• The version of a transfer file (updatedata) can be determined from its filename.Example: 50img_DC001AAA.b01 .. Version 1 50img_DC002AAA.b01 .. Version 2

2 The target file (update data) may not be shown in the [File] field in [Version], if it exists in a folder different from the data folders set in the Option screen. Click Browse and find the appropriate file to select.

Note:

• Clicking Browse will open the Select

File window.

CF5001

CF5001

50img_dc00012003/ 8/15

50img_dc0001.b0150img_dc0001.b00

50img_dc000.b01

Di850CF5001


3-18

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

2.4.7 Verifying transfer files (update data)

Once a particular version of a transfer file

(update data) is selected, the transfer files

(update data) that are transmitted actually are

listed in [Send File Infor] in the ISW Trns main

window. Verify the validity of the transfer files

(data) for transfer.

2.4.8 Transmitting transfer files (update data)

When transfer files (update data) are estab-

lished, run a data transfer to the copier.

Step Procedure

1 [ISW Trns main window]In the ISW Trns main window, click File Check in [Send File Infor]..

2 Check to see if OK appears in the [File Sum] field in [Send File Infor] in the ISW Trns main window.

Note:

• A file that is labeled NG is inappropriateas a transfer file (update data). Try tocopy the file again. If you can not suc-ceed to copy it again, the original filemay be corrupted.

• Transfer files (update data) may bemarked ?? when enough information isnot available to verify their validity.When a transfer file is labeled, check ifthe checksum file (*.sum) was copiedcorrectly.

CF5001

CF5001

50img_dc00012003/ 8/15

50img_dc0001.b0150img_dc0001.b00

50img_dc000.b01

Step Procedure

1 Press the “START” key on the copier while it is in ISW transfer wait state.

Note:

• The “START” key is displayed in thedisplay area on the copier.

2 [ISW Trns main window]Click File Send in [Send File Infor] in the ISW Trns main window.

3 Transfer files (update data) are transmitted to the copier.Note7: While data is being transferred to a

copier, an LED or indicator flashesto indicate a data transfer inprogress. The mode of such indica-tion varies from one copier toanother.

Note8: ISW Trns produces an indication todesignate a data transfer inprogress.

Note9: If a data transfer is aborted due toany trouble occurring with the copieror ISW Trns, turn the copier mainswitch OFF, then ON to retry thedata transfer by ISW Trns. In thiscase, a condition indication andnecessary operation vary depend-ing on each model. Please refer toservice manual for the copier.

4 To update ROM data on more control boards, repeat the step in 2.4.5 “Selecting transfer file (update data) conditions,” to 2.4.8 “Transmit-ting transfer files (update data).”

CF5001

CF5001

50img_dc00012003/ 8/15

50img_dc0001.b0150img_dc0001.b00

50img_dc000.b01


3-19

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

2.4.9 Exiting ISW Trns.

When the update of the ROM data on the con-trol boards completes, exit the ISW Trns pro-gram.

2.4.10 Verifying the ROM version of the copier

(after updating)

When the update of the ROM data completes,

verify the ROM version of the control program

in the 25 mode.Step Procedure

1 Exit the ISW Trns program.

2 Turn OFF the PC.


4 Disconnect the parallel interface cable from the PC and the copier.

Note:

• Turn OFF the PC and copier before dis-connecting the parallel interface cablefrom them.

Step Procedure



3 [25 mode menu window]Check the ROM version by following the copier-specific procedure.

Note:



3-20

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

2.5 ISW Trns Messages

The ISW Trns program displays dialogue messages when errors occur and when processing ends. Def-

initions of these messages are listed below, along with the associated display status.

Message Display status

Cannot open a checksum file Opening of a checksum file failed. Possible causes include a corrupted file and a file in use.

Cannot read a checksum file Loading of a checksum file into memory failed. Possible causes include a shortage of memory and an OS prob-lem.

Cannot open a file Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a corrupted file and a file in use.

File transmission complete File transfer completed.

Cannot open the LPT port Opening of the LPT port failed.

Communications port setup acquisition error

A call to GetCommSate failed.

Communications port setup error A call to GetCommSate failed.

Cannot open a send file Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a corrupted file and a file in use.

Cannot send a Term Test file Transmission of a communications test block failed.1. The copier is not ready to receive.2. The cable is out of position.3. Transmission of the wrong send file was attempted.

Unsuccessful file transmission The transmission of a send file failed. Possible causes include a cable out of position.

Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT port Output to the LPT port failed. Possible causes include a cable out of position.

Starting file transmission. OK? A message seeking confirmation at the start of file transmission.

Send file not selected No files exist on the send file list.

Canceled Transmission of a file in progress was canceled. CAN-CEL is normally hidden. Its setting can be altered with the INI file.

Default data folder created A data folder was created by clicking Create Folder.

Invalid folder name An invalid folder name was entered. Start a folder name with a drive name, such as C:\.

Default data folder not set. Set a folder.

A data folder is not set in ISWTrns.INI. This message is displayed when ISW Trns launches for the fist time.

Unsuccessful thread creation The creation of a thread failed.

Copying the selected file. OK? File copy start message

Copying all files to the default data folder. OK?

File copy start message

No send file available No file to copy file is selected or exists in the folder.


3-21

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

Message Display status

Unable to copy several files 1. The destination folder does not exist.2. When the Overwrite check box is not checked, an

attempt is made to copy to a file having the same file name.

3. An attempt is made to overwrite a protected file4. Any other cause (such as a file being used by another

application or OS problem)

File copying end File copying completed.

Send file not found, or invalid file name in the folder. Check.

The number of divisions of a send file recorded in thefolder. Check. checksum file and the number of files actually existing do notmatch.1. A file having an invalid file name exists in the data

folder. Delete possibly invalid file names from the folder list.

2. The number of files in a divided file is wanting. Iden-tify the wanting files in the folder list and recopy them.


3-22

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

2.6 Troubleshooting ISW Trns

If errors occur while running the ISW Trns pro-

gram, take the actions suggested below to cor-

rect them.

2.6.1 Unable to run ISW Trns

• Corrupted ISWTrns.EXE file

→ Set up again.

• The setup disk is corrupted.

→ Verify the setup disk and then set up again.

2.6.2 Send file is not displayed when a

combo box item is selected

• The send file is not stored in the folder.

→ Check to see if the send file is stored in the folder

appearing in the [Folder] text box in [Versions].

Use the [File Copy] function if the file storage

location is unknown.

• Check to see if the base data folder setting in the

option window is not wrong.

→ Verify the base folder setting. Use the [File Copy]

function if the file storage location is unknown.

• Invalid file name (altered)

→ The file name of a file must be used exactly as it

is delivered. If a file is renamed, it cannot be

displayed or selected. If a file name has been

altered, return it to its original file name.

• Invalid folder name (altered)

→ If a folder as created with [Make Folder] in the

option window is renamed, it cannot be located.

Restore the original folder name and check.

2.6.3 NG produced by a file check

• Corrupted send file

→ Copy the file again and recheck. If NG recurs,

check with the vendor of that file.

2.6.4 “??” produced by a file check

• With any other model, the checksum file (*.SUM)

had not been copied when the send file was cop-

ied to the PC.

→ Copy the checksum to the same folder as the file

is copied. It would be copied automatically if the

[File Copy] function is used.

2.6.5 Unsuccessful file transfer

A. “Cannot open a file” error

• The file is used by any other program or by the

system.

→ Close that other program. If the file transfer.

still fails, reboot Windows.

B. “Cannot send a Term Test file” error

• The cable is not in firm position.

→ Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm

position or if the cable is not impaired.

• The copier is not ready to receive.

→ Check to see if the copier is ready to receive.

C. “Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT

port” error

• The cable is not in firm position.

→ Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm.

position or if the cable is not impaired.

• Invalid data has been transmitted.

→ Check to from the file information window to see

if the receive mode (receiving board type) of the

copier and the send file on the PC match.

→ If the file is transmitted for the first time,

check with its vendor.

• The PC parallel port is set in ECP mode.

→ Consulting the manual, free the parallel port from

ECP mode.

• Compatibility between the PC parallel port and

the copier port.

→ Verify by testing on a PC with proven trans

mission performance.

• Use a cable shorter than 2 meters in length.

2.7 Connecting to the ISW con-nector

The ISW connector is at the right side of the

copier.

2.7.1 Procedure

• Connect the PC port and the copier ISW port

with a interface cable.

• Connect port is correct.

→ Use the USB port or Parallel port.

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 INTERNET ISW

3-23

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

3 INTERNET ISW

3.1 What is the Internet ISW?The Internet ISW is the system to perform ISW, by indicating ISW using the Internet mail (E-mail) or

browser to let copier automatically acquire the subject program from program server and rewrite its own

program.

With this Internet ISW, you can update copier's programs just by transmitting E-mail with simple keyword

described, without visiting customer's office. With the Web function, you can perform the ISW on customer

site, without carrying the actual programs with you.

3.2 Operating environmentTo use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must be satisfied.

A. The copier is connected to a built in network where programs can be downloaded from the

Internet using ftp or http protocol. *1

B. The Internet ISW does not function in copier under the following conditions.

(1) The reset switch (SW1) is OFF.

(2) The main switch (SW2) is OFF.

(3) The copier is shut OFF by the auto shut off function.

*1 Programs can be downloaded using Firewall.

Note:

• The Internet ISW does not function even if the copier receives the Internet ISW designating mail,

as long as it is in any of the above conditions. The Internet ISW starts when the above condi-

tions are released.

However, the mails are able to have period of validity.

• The Internet ISW continues to function in the condition of a paper jam or SC occurs, or in the

low power mode.

3.3 Main featuresWith the Internet ISW, the following functions are available.

A. Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system *2

By sending simple keywords to a copier by E-Mail, the programs in the copier are rewritten automatically.

The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. *3

(1) Overall control board (I)

(2) Printer control board (C)

(3) Operation board /1 (O)

(4) RADF control board (F)

(5) FNS control board (N)*2 To use the function, the E-Mail remote notification system must be setup separately.*3 The available boards are different depending on the copier models.

B. Internet ISW using Web utility

By accessing copier main body's homepage via PC web browser, programs in the copier are rewritten

automatically. To use the function, a Web terminal that is networked to the copier is necessary. *4*4 In case it is connected to a LAN, it can only be used within the LAN.

INTERNET ISW CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

3-24

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

3.4 Initial setting

To use the Internet ISW, the related settings such as network parameter, program server address, firewall

address must be performed in the copier main body beforehand.

Also, to use the [1.1 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system], the related settings such as

account registration must be set on the mail server separately.

For the details, please refer to "3. Mail remote notification system".

3.4.1 Setting on Control panel

First, set the copier's IP address on the control panel, to network the copier. If it has already been set, go

to "2.4.2 Setting on Web brouser".

a. Procedure

1. Select "Key operator mode" on the control panel.

2. Select "[1] System initial setting".

3. Select "[3] IP address setting".

4. Enter [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address]. *5

5. Reboot the copier.*5 Copier's IP address, etc. are usually assigned by the system administrator.

For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator.

3.4.2 Setting on Web browser

Next, set the program server, etc. from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, prepare a networked

PC *6.*6 Prepare a PC by borrowing customer's PC or carrying laptop PC, for example.

(Considerations)

• In any setting item, space cannot be set.

• If there is a mistake in input process on the Web browser, be sure to correct it according to error mes-

sage displayed. If the mistake is left without correction, program download error may occur.

• Web's layout may change without prior notice.


3-25

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

a. Procedure

1. Start the Web browser. *7

2. Specify the copier's IP address that you have entered at "2.4.1 Setting on Control panel".

If you access the copier's http address, the [Main page] as the top figure on next page appears.*7 If proxy is set on the web browser, it may not be able to access the copier's http address (web page).

For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator. As Web browser, Internet Explorer

or Netscape is recommended.

Do not perform setting from two or more browsers concurrently.

Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.Copier Web Utility Main Page

3. On the [Main page], click the [Environment setup], to display [Login to Environment setup] page.

Login window to Environment setting


3-26

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

4. On [Login to Environment setup] page, enter the key operator password (the same password as key

operator mode password) and click Apply. The environment setup list appears. Then click [Extension

for maintenance].

Environment setup screen

5. On [Login to Extension for maintenance] page, enter the password (the same password as mode

change menu password) and click Apply. The environment setting list appears. Then click [Internet

ISW].

Login window to Extension for maintenance Extension for maintenance screen


3-27

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

6. Click [Initial Setting].

Internet ISW main screen

7. Set proxy server.

When you don't use proxy server (firewall), go to Step 9.


3-28

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

*8 Types 2, 3 and 4 are not guaranteed.

When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen.

If all are fine, click [Next]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-

sage in red.

8. Set the program server. (Proxy server is used)

Enableproxy Select [no] if you do not use proxy

Select [Use ftp proxy] if you use ftp proxy

Select [Use http proxy] if you use http proxy

Proxy server Type *8 If you selected [Use ftp proxy] for [Use of proxy], select the type of proxy

from the following.

Type1 [USER USER@HOST]

Type2 [OPEN HOSTNAME]

Type3 [FW USERNAME→FW PASSWORD→SITE HOSTNAME]

Type4 [FW USERNAME→FW PASSWORD→USER USER@HOST]

Proxy server IP Address If you use proxy server, enter the IP address of the proxy server.

Port Number If you use proxy server, set the port No. that is used by the proxy server.

User name on the proxy

server

If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set an account

name for the proxy server.

Password for the proxy server If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set a password

for the proxy server.


3-29

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL


If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-

sage in red.

9. Set the program server. (Proxy is not used.)

Program server address Enter the address of the server where programs to download are stored.

Select the protocol you use from the drop down list at the left and enter

the following address in the test box at the right.

In case of ftp, it is the relative path from the home directory.

Example: ftp://210.226.5.5/EUR/8050/

User name on the program

server

Enter the account name of the program server.

Password for the program

server

Enter the program server password.

Receiving time out Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)

If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. With-

out performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.

Protocol Select a protocol to receive programs.

Program server IP Address Enter the IP address of the server where programs to download are

stored.

Target directory For http, enter path that follows the host domain. For ftp, enter the rela-

tive path from the home directory.

Example: EUR/8050/

User name on the program

server

Enter the account name of the program server.

Password for the Program

server

Enter the program server password.

Receiving time out Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes)

If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. With-

out performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.


3-30

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL


If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the mes-

sage in red.

10. Perform the download test.

This test downloads "test.dat" from the program server set in the initial setting, to ensure all items

have been set appropriately. If the download test fails, check the setting items again according to the

error message.

When the test finished successfully, the communication speed and estimated download time are displayed

as shown below. Draw upon the data to decide [Reception timeout].


3-31

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

If the download test fails, response error code sent from the server is displayed as follows. There may be

input errors. Check the initial setting again.


3-32

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

3.5 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system

3.5.1 Function

Customer engineer sends an E-mail with simple keyword description. Then, the copier that received the

mail downloads specified program from the program server and rewrites its program.

This function is executed by a different command (keyword) from the list print acquisition function of the [E-

Mail remote notification system].

A. The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows.

(1) Overall control board: I0

(2) Printer control board: C0

(3) Operation board /1: O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5

(4) RADF control board: F0

(5) FNS control board: N0

B. You can acquire version information of programs to be rewritten.

C. You can find out how to use [Internet ISW] by mail.

To use the above functions, it is necessary to send the copier E-mail with the specified simple keyword

(command) description. The following are the commands and the options.

When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired from the program server address set

beforehand.

Command Option Description

ISW Subject board name Specifies name of a board to ISW. (must be entered)

The specifiable boards are as follows.

[I0, C0, O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5, F0, N0]

The available boards are different depending on mod-

els. File name can be specified with "=" as [Subject

board name=File name].

Timeout Specifies period of validity of mail.

(From 5 to 1,440 minutes. Unit is minute. If none is

specified, timeout takes place at 90 minutes.)

When the time from mail transmission by CE to mail

reception at copier exceeds the specified period, ISW is

not performed due to expiration.

ISWHELP — Returns a help mail with the above command use

descriptions.

I0 bootI1.bin C0 bootC1.bin O0 bootO0.bin F0 bootF1.bin N0 bootN1.bin

O1 bootO1.bin

O2 bootO2.bin

O3 bootO3.bin

O4 bootO4.bin

O5 bootO5.bin


3-33

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

3.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail

The following is an example of transmitting an E-mail with the aforementioned command to a copier.

You can use either upper and lower case characters when typing a command (option) in E-mail. *9

When transmitting an E-mail to a copier, take care of the following.

• The ISW-designated mail has the period of validity. Therefore, set the date of mailer and time zone of

the copier *10 accurately.

• One mail can be described with only one ISW command. If two or more commands are described,

the second and later ones are ignored.

• Any mail software can be used. For example, mobile device mail, browser mail and so on.

• With the mail software in use, transmit mails in text mode.

(Commands in mails in HTML mode cannot be handled correctly.)

• Place at least one space or TAB *11 between command and option, and option and option described

in mails.

• Type every command in mails only with alphanumeric one-byte characters (ASCII characters). If other

characters *12 are typed, an error mail with [Command not found] is returned.

• Type every command in mails from the line head. Line head starting with a space or TAB is ignored.

• Do not attach files or others to the mails transmitted to copiers.

Depending on the size of files, such mails may be handled as illegal mails and copier may refuse to

receive.

• Do not type signatures in the mails transmitted to copiers. If auto signature addition is set on the mail

software, turn off the setting. Signatures may be handled as commands and error mails may be

returned from the copier.

*9 Case sensitivity is on for the file name. Take care when typing.*10 Set in the E-mail transmission setting for [E-mail transmission setting].*11 Linefeed is not available.*12 Two-byte characters also cause errors. Take care not to use them.

(1) Transmitting ISW command

The transmission mail must have the following descriptions.

• In Subject, type a CE password that has been entered in the mail reception setting.

For the details, please refer to the "3. E-Mail remote notification system".

• In To, type mail address of a copier.

• In Body, type a command.


3-34

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

An example of I0 ISW:

An example of return mail (ISW start) *13

When the copier allows the ISW, it moves into the ISW mode, displaying [Remote ISW executing] on the

operation panel. The copier cannot be used while it is in the ISW mode. *14 Then, a mail like the following

is returned from the copier.

*13 The return mail is in English regardless of the language selected for the copier's main body operation

panel display.*14 During the ISW, main switch (SW2) of the copier does not function. The copier cannot be shutdown.

Password for authentication

Command

Copier's mail address

aaaaa.com


3-35

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

An example of return mail (ISW complete)

When ISW completes and copier reboots automatically, a mail like the following is returned from the copier.

You can confirm that the ROM version is upgraded.

However, if transmission of the above two kinds of return mails fails, the mails are not retransmitted.

When specifying a file name

When specifying a file name for ISW command, type the name with "=" following the subject board name.

In this case, "65FAI012UGH0.bin" must exist in the program server address that has been set in the Inter-

net ISW setting.

Transmission mail

ISW I0 = 65FAI012UGH0.bin 30

When transmission mail exceeds the period of validity

On ISW command, period of validity (timeout) can be changed set for every mail. (Default: 90 minutes) If

period from the mail transmission to mail reception at copier (duration) is longer than the timeout period,

ISW is not performed by that mail.


3-36

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

Transmission mail

Return mail

5 minutes is set for timeout

aaaaa.com

Timeout took place as 6 minutes had passed.

aaaaa.com


3-37

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

(2) Transmitting ISWHELP command

Manual that shows how to use command is returned by mail.

It is useful if you forget how to use command and options.

Transmission mail

ISWHelp

Return mail


3-38

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

3.6 Internet ISW using Web utility

3.6.1 Function

Using the copier's web utility, just by clicking on the browser *15, customer engineer can let the copier

automatically download programs from the program server and rewrite its own programs.

The boards of which programs can be rewritten are the same as those of [Internet ISW using E-mail

remote notification system]. *15 Usually, it is not possible to access company-inside copier from outside exceeding firewall.

3.6.2 How to use

A. Going to Internet ISW page

The same as instructed in "2.4 Initial Setting", go to the [Internet ISW] page on the Web browser.

Internet ISW main screen

Next to each board name, the program version is displayed.

aaaaa.com


3-39

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

B. Performing ISW

From the [ISW] items, select a board to ISW and check the box. When specifying a name of file to down-

load, type the name in the text box of [File name]. When no file name is specified, the following files are

acquired from the program server address set beforehand.

When the above input completes, click [ISW].

C. Starting ISW

When ISW starts, the following screen appears. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item

according to the message in red.

ISW execution screen

When ISW completes successfully, the copier automatically reboots.

If you click [Check status], you can check the current ISW status.

If you click [Cancel], you can stop the ISW only while program is being downloaded

I0 bootI1.bin C0 bootC1.bin O0 bootO0.bin F0 bootF1.bin N0 bootN1.bin

O1 bootO1.bin

O2 bootO2.bin

O3 bootO3.bin

O4 bootO4.bin

O5 bootO5.bin


3-40

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

D. Checking ISW status

ISW status check screen

This screen shows the current performance or error. The display items are as follows.

• ISW is downloading

• ISW is writing

• Finished *16

• ISW was cancelled due to transferring problem

• ISW was cancelled due to transferring overtime

• ISW was cancelled due to writing problem to flash memory*16 Copier reboots after ISW completes normally. Do not click [Refresh] on the browser.

E. Ending ISW

When ISW completes and copier reboots, ensure that the program version is upgraded on the [Internet

ISW main screen].


3-41

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

3.7 Precautions for use

3.7.1 Prior announcement to administrator

When performing the Internet ISW, be sure to contact the copier's administrator or the like and get his/her

agreement beforehand.

Perform ISW in condition that the copier is not being used.

If the copier is being used (a job is being processed), the Internet ISW is not performed.

3.7.2 If power failure occurs during data rewriting

While ISW rewriting is in progress *17, the operation panel and main switch (SW2) are locked. However, if

the main power goes down due to power failure or other, the copier becomes unable to start up. *18

This is only the problem on rewriting the overall control board and the operation board/1. Even if errors

occur on rewriting other boards, the boards can be overwritten again with the Internet ISW.

If the copier becomes unable to start for the above reason, go to the copier's site and rewrite the program

using the ISWTrns.

<How to recover> Overall control board : Turn ON the main switch (SW2) and then perform ISW.

Operation board /1: Turn ON the main switch (SW2) while pressing HELP and CHECK

button and then perform ISW.

For the details, please refer to "1. ISW"*17 Rewriting takes maximum 10 minute.*18 No problem is cased by power failure during program downloading process.

3.7.3 ISW of multiple programs

It is not possible with the Internet ISW to ISW several programs concurrently. Always perform ISW one by

one. If several programs must be rewritten at the same time, perform ISW from board of higher priority. *19

When rewriting several programs, SC may occur during rewriting intervals between programs.

However, such SC will clear when all the subject programs are rewritten.*19 In case of the Internet ISW using the E-mail remote notification system, the sequence of transmitted

ISW designating mails and mails received by copier may change. Transmit multiple mails while ensur-

ing reception of completion mail or putting enough intervals.

3.7.4 If ISW fails in low power mode

If ISW fails due to errors in program download, data check, and so on, the copier recovers into normal

mode. Only in low power mode, the copier reboots when ISW fails.

Priority 1 RADF control board (F), FNS control board (N)

Priority 2 Printer control board (C), Operationboard/1 (O)

Priority 3 Overall control board (I)


3-42

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

3.8 Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW

3.8.1 What is a proxy server?

It is a server that receives request (HTTP or FTP etc) from a client inside the firewall, and represents the

client. With this server, access to outside the firewall is enabled.

3.8.2 Authentication of proxy server

Following are the lists of commands of each authentication type:

All the 4 types below are supported in the Internet ISW.

3.8.3 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server

The following shows the brief description of each authentication type and the list of commands being used.

A. Type 1: USER user@host

This type does not require an authentication to the proxy sever when accessing outside via proxy.

In case it is possible to access outside via proxy server without entering user name and password of the

proxy server, this type may be used.

Command

B. Type 2: OPEN host

It is almost the same as Type 1. The only difference is a command at the authentication.

Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 1.

Command

Command Parameter Reply Code Description

USER user@host 331 Sends user name of the program server and program

server's address

PASS password 230 Sends password for the above user name


OPEN host ftp expanded

function:

Defined by

each server

Sends program server's address

USER user 331 Sends user name of the program sever



3-43

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

C. Type 3: FW user → FW password → SITE host

This type requires an authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing outside.

It is necessary to enter information of the server that you wish to access, user name and password of the

proxy sever (firmware).

In case the user name and password of the proxy server are required when accessing outside via proxy

sever, this type may be used.

Command

D. FW user name → FW password → USER user@host

It is almost the same as Type 3. The only difference is a command at the authentication.

Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 3.

Command

3.8.4 Remarks

• For fwtk2.1 (for unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), authentication Type 1 is used.

• Type 1 is used in many proxy servers.

If you are not sure about the authentication type of the proxy server, KC recommends that you use

Type 1 in the meantime.


USER FW user 331 Sends user name of the proxy server

PASS FW password 230 Sends password for the above user name

SITE host ftp expanded

function:

Defined by

each server

Sends program server's address

USER user 331 Sends user name of the program sever



USER FW user 331 Sends user name of the proxy server

PASS FW password 230 Sends password for the above user name

USER user@host 331 Sends user name of the program server and program

server's address


MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

3-44

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

4 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

4.1 What is the Mail remote notification system?Mail remote notification system allows to acquire machine data, that have been available as "List Output

Mode" in 36 mode from copier, through internet mail (E-mail). This function is achieved without visiting

customer site and printing on paper if the simple keyword is e-mailed.

4.2 Operation environmentFollowing conditions should be satisfied in order to use mail remote notification system. The function

works during JAM, SC or Low power mode, but does not work during shut-off. However, the sent mail does

not disappear and the copier process the mail after next starting up. During low power mode, the machine

operation is as usual.

A. The mail server *1 that allows copier to receive mail in POP3 or IMAP protocol.

(It is preferred that mail server can receive external mail and service constantly.)

B. The mail server *2 that allows copier to transmit mail in SMTP protocol.

(It is preferred that mail server can send external mail and service constantly.).

C. Mail remote notification system disabling conditions on copier are as follows.

(1) Main power switch is OFF.

(2) Sub power switch is OFF.

*1 Popper, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. Assign one account per one copier. It can be the same machine

to the SMTP server. "Mail remote notification system" corresponds to "POP before SMTP".*2 Sendmail 8.9, qmail, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. It can be the same machine to the receiving

server.

4.3 Initial setting

In order to use Mail remote notification system, settings such as network parameter on copier and account

registration on mail server are necessary.

A. Setting on operation panel

In order to connect the copier main body to network, IP address of the copier should be set on opera-

tion panel. If it is already set, please go to "B. Setting on Web.

a. Procedure

1. Select [Key operator mode] on operation panel.

2. Select [1. System initial setting].

3. Select [3. IP address setting].

4. Input [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]*1.

5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.

*1 System administrator usually assigns IP address and network related setting to copier. Please ask sys-

tem administrator for details.

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

3-45

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

B. Setting on Web

Next, input setting for mail server from Web browser. Please use PC*2 connected to the network in

order to use Web browser.

*2 Prepare PC; borrow the customer's one or bring notebook computer.

Note:

• No blank space should be entered for any column. Following characters cannot be used for the

E-mail address.

( ) < > ; : ¥ " [ ]

When the error message is displayed on the web browser, correct the input error following to the

message. If the error is not corrected, mail sending or receiving may fail.

• Web design is subject to change without notice.

(1) How to set

a. Procedure

1. Start up Web browser *1.

2. Type IP address of the copier you input to the [A. Setting on operation panel].

When accessing Web, the [main page] (see upper figure in next page) is displayed.

*1 If proxy is set on Web browser, it may not possible to access web utilities of copier. Please ask system

administrator for details. KC recommends to use Internet explorer or Netscape as the Web browser. Do

not perform setting from the two or more browsers concurrently.

Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copier Web utilities main page


3-46

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

3. In [Main] page, click [Environment Setup] button and display [Environment setup log in] page.

Environment setup log in page

4. Input key operator password in [Environment setup log in] page, then click [Apply].

[Environment set up] page is displayed. Then click [E-Mail transmission setting].

Even key operator password set "0000" in 25-mode setting, input "0000".

Environment setup page


3-47

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

5. Set the transmission setting.

In order to use Mail remote notification system, registration of E-mail address of manager (machine

administrator), and sending (SMTP) server input is mandatory.

*1 The same setting can be set on LCD of the copier. But do not set concurrently from web browser and

Web.

*2 Please see the "INSTRUCTION MANUAL" of copier if use the mail transmission system.

E-Mail transmission setting page

Manager Address *1 To specify E-mail address of machine manager.

The e-mail address to notify error from SMTP.

DNS Server IP Address Input as needed. If not needed, leave it blank.

Time difference *1 The send time of mail is calculated referring this value.

Input the time difference from UTC within the range -1200 (-

12h00min) to +1200 (+12h00min).

If setting is not made, it is +0000 (the same as UTC).

For example, the time difference in New York is -5 hours, - 500 is

input.

Sending mail (SMTP) sever *1 The IP address of SMTP sever.

Condition Informing Address *1 It is for mail transmission system. *2

You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.

E-Mail Transmission *1 It is for mail transmission system. *2

You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.


3-48

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

6. Click [Apply] button to finish input.


3-49

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

(2) Test mail sending

Click [Sending test] button and then a test mail is sent to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [Manager

address] set on Step5. Click [Sending test] to display result of the test mail. If it is failed, please re-con-

firm the setting following to error message.

a. Procedure

1. Set the reception setting.

In the [Extension for maintenance] column at the bottom of the page, input the password to change

the mode then click the initial setting.

Use the password for changing modes.

Extension for maintenance page (for customer engineer)


3-50

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

The records of sent and received mails listed on mail log on the [Extension for maintenance] page are the

latest 10 mails. Even the main power switch is turned OFF, the communication is logged and kept though

there are some restrictions.

E-Mail reception setting page


3-51

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

2. Set the e-mail reception screen based on the following.

*1 Consult system administrator and create mail account for copier on receiving mail server.*2 No echo back from the password.*3 Use it as identifier, when managing multiple copiers.

*4 Use it to check the copier. is turned ON or not. If the time of the copier or the mail application software

is not set correctly (including time difference), wrong time is described. In that case, select [No].

3. Click "Apply" to finish input.

Enable E-mail notification Select [Yes] to use Mail remote notification system.

Default is [No].

Interval between fetching mails Interval between checking mail on receiving mail server from copier.

The interval can be set within the range from 1 min. to 60 min.

Usually, set around 10 min. considering load for network.

Receiving mail server The IP address of receiving mail server.

Kind of mail spool Select [POP3] or [IMAP]. Default is [POP3].

User name on the server *1 The account name for copier assigned on receiving mail server.

Password *2 The password for the above user name.

E-Mail Address of this copy

machine

E-mail address of the copier.

Usually, the name is [User name@receiving mail server name].

Nickname *3 The name added to the mail subject sent from the copier.

It can be blank.

CE Password *2 Input password used for the "Subject" of the mail sent to the copier.

The copier uses this password for security check.

Also Notice to the administrator (CC mail)

- No

- Only illegal mails

- All mails

Default (Do not send the e-mail to the administrator)

Specify whether to transfer mail in following conditions; When the

mail received by copier does not match to the registered password or

the mail size is 10 k-byte or larger.

Transfer all sending mails from Mail remote notification system.

Administrator E-Mail address Input address for the transfer if above [Only illegal mail] or [all mails]

is selected.

Announce delay time in reply mail

*4

Select whether to contain the time difference from CE`s transmission

and copier reception on the mail.

Default is [No].

Enable POP (IMAP) before SMTP Select whether SMTP server transmits the mail after POP (IMAP)

server attests.

Default is [Yes].


3-52

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

4. Test mail sending and receiving.

Click [Sending and receiving test] button and then sending and receiving tests are performed by one

transaction. It checks whether the sent mail is correctly received. Click [Sending and receiving test]

to display result of the test. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message.

5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.

Sending mail test Mail sending test is performed to SMTP server.

Test mail is sent to [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on

Step2.

Receiving mail test Receiving test from receiving mail server is performed.

Test mail is received by [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set

on Step2.


3-53

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

4.4 How to use the Mail remote notification system

A. Function

CE can use following functions of Mail remote notification system by e-mailing simple keyword to copier.

CE can receive the data of the desired copier data list by the e-mail.

• JOB memory list

• User management list

• Font pattern list

• Machine management list 1

• Adjustment data list

• Parameter list

• E.K.C. management list

• Machine management list 2

• Counter list

• Pixel ratio data list

In order to use above function, the simple keyword (command) must be sent by e-mail.

The following table shows the command and options.

Command Options Explanation Mini-

mum

GETLOG [List output] The [List output] specified by the following is returned by

mail.

G

JOB [JOB memory list] J

USER [User management list] U

FONT [Font pattern list] F

MANAGEMENT [Machine management list 1] M

ADJUSTMENT [Adjustment data list] A

PARAMETER [Parameter list] P

EKC [EKC management list] E

2MANAGEMENT [Machine management list 2] 2

COUNTER [Counter list] C

PIXEL [Pixel ratio data list] PI

ALL All of above list data. AL

Not specified Edited [Counter list] for the cellular phone display.

CHPASS [OldPasswd] [New-

Passwd]

To change the password used to certify mail. C

[OldPasswd] Specify current password

[NewPasswd] Specify new password

HELP Not specified Help mail explaining usage of the above commands is sent. H


3-54

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

B. Send mails

The example of the mail containing the command to the copier is shown. The command and option on

the mail are recognized by the top letters without distinction between capital and small letters. Accord-

ingly, not all letters of the command must be typed. It is recognized by the minimum letters in the above

table *1. When sending mail to the copier, please note followings.

Note:

• Mail software on any OS, handy terminal, free-mail using browser can be used without any differ-

ence.

• When sending mail on mail software, be sure to use text mode.

(Mail in HTML mode cannot be handle properly.)

• As for the reception on mail software, the desirable maximum displayable letters per one line is 128

and over (single-byte).

(The length of the one line reaches to 128 letters in the part of the data list mail. Accordingly, mail

may not be easily seen on the cellular phone or other mobile devices.)

• Put minimum one space or TAB*2 between the command and option on the mail.

• Use only single-byte alphanumeric character (ASCII character) for the command on mail. Other-

wise, an error mail, [Command Not Found], is returned.

• Type command from the beginning of the line. If the line starts with blank or TAB, the line is

ignored.

• Maximum number of commands that can be contained in one mail is 10. The eleventh and onwards

commands are ignored.

• Do not attach file to the mail sent to the copier. Depending on file size, it is handled as illegal mail.

• Do not attach signature to the mail sent to the copier. If automatic attachment of the signature is

already set to the mail software, change the setting not to attach the signature. The signature is

regarded as command and error mail may be returned.

• While copier is sending or receiving the mail, if the power switch of the copier is turned OFF or list

output is performed on the copier, two mails may be returned.

• The maximum number of the mails that copier receives from the mail server is 5 per one time. If the

mail server has more received mails at a time, remaining mails are processed after the [interval

between fetching mails].

*1 Example: All of G, GE, GET, GETL, GETLO, GETLOG equal to specify GETLOG.*2 Return cannot be used.


3-55

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

(1) Send GETLOG command

Following should be described in the sending mail.

• Subject: Input "CE password" set in reception setting.

• To: Input E-mail address of the copier.

• Body: Input command.

a. Example of mail requesting counter list

Mail address of the copier

CE password

Command


3-56

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

b. Example of mail requesting counter list*1

*1 Language of the returned mail is English only.

Serial number of copier

Nickname of the copier

Mail address of the sender

Requested counter list


3-57

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

c. When option is not specified

GETLOG command without option is specified, Counter list for the cellular phone display is returned.

Sending mail [GetLog]

Example of returned mail


3-58

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

d. To receive multiple data list

Data lists in reply to GETLOG command are separately returned by mails; one list per mail. If the

same list is requested twice or more in a mail, the list is returned only once.

When followings are described in a mail, both counter list mail and machine management list 1 mail

are returned.

[GetLog Counter]

[GetLog Management]

When the commands are written in one line continuously, Management (the later command) is ignored

and only counter list (the first command) is returned.

[GetLog Counter Management]

e. When unrecognizable option is specified.

Sending mail

[GetLog Log]

Returned mail

[Option Not Found → GetLog Log]

(2) Send CHPASS command

The sending mail password described on the subject can be changed remotely. Specify 20 or less let-

ters to [OldPasswd] and [NewPasswd]. Use ASCII characters except space.

Password cannot be changed by mail if you don't remember the old password. Change the [CE pass-

word] from the browser, explained in Chapter 2.

a. Example of correct password change

In this case, old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].

Sending mail

[ChPass U-BIX Sitios]

Returned mail

[SE's Password was changed successfully. → New Password [Sitios]]

When the password is changed, use [NewPasswd] from the next mail. When the mail is sent with [Old-

Passwd], it is treated as illegal mail.

b. Example of invalid password change

Old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios].

Sending mail

[ChPass Sitios U-BIX]

Returned mail

[Old Password is Invalid. → ChPass Sitios U-BIX]

Then, password was not changed. Accordingly, the password is unchanged and [U-BIX].

Sending mail

[ChPass Sitios]

Returned mail

[Violation on format by new password. → ChPass Sitios]

When the new password is blank, password is not changed.


3-59

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

(3) Send HELP command

The manual describing above usage of the commands is returned by mail. Use this function when you

forget how to use command and option.

Sending mail [Help]

Returned mail

4.5 Disabling systemIn order to disable Mail remote notification system, in Mail reception setting, select [No] for the "Enable

E-Mail notification" and then click [Apply] button.


3-60

III

SE

RV

ICE

TO

OL

Blank page

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE SCHEDULE

4-1

IV S

ER

VIC

E

IV SERVICE

1. SERVICE SCHEDULE

1.1 Service schedule

Guarantee period (5 years or 5,000,000 copies)

Service itemx 10,000 copies Service

count0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500

Main

body

Maintenance

Every 100,000

copies

49 times

Periodic check (1)

Every 200,000 copies

24 times

Periodic check (2)

Every 400,000

copies

12 times

Periodic check (3)

Every 600,000

copies

8times

Periodic check (4)


4times

Periodic check (5)

Every 1,500,000

copies

3times

Periodic check (6)

Every 2,000,000

copies

2times

Periodic check (7)


1time

Periodic check (8)

Every 4,000,000

copies

1time

AFR-20 *1

Maintenance

Every 100,000

copies

49 times

Periodic check (1) *1


2times

*1 Perform the periodic check (1) for the AFR-20 at 2 times (1,800,000 copies and 3,600,000 copies).

SERVICE SCHEDULE CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

4-2

IV S

ER

VIC

E

C-208

Maintenance

Every 100,000

copies

49times

Periodic check (1)

Every 600,000

copies

8times

Periodic check (2)

Every 2,500,000

copies

1time

FN-120/

FN-9

Maintenance

Every 100,000

copies

49times

Periodic check (1)

Every 200,000

copies

24times

Periodic check (2)

Every 400,000

copies

12times

Periodic check (3)

Every 1,000,000

copies

4times

Periodic check (4)

Every 2,500,000

copies

1time

Cover

Inserter

D

Maintenance

Every 100,000

copies

49times

Periodic check (1)

Every 500,000

copies

9times

Periodic check (2)Every 1,000,000

copies

4times

Periodic check (3)

Every 3,000,000

copies

1time

PK-5

Maintenance

Every 100,000

copies

49times

TMG-3MaintenanceEvery 100,000

copies

49times

Periodic check (1)

Every 4,000,000

copies

1time

Service itemx 10,000 copies Service

count0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500


4-3

IV S

ER

VIC

E

1.2 Maintenance items

A. Main body (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No.Classifica-

tionService item Quantity

Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-

ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Prepara-

tions

(1) Image check

2 Drum (1) Drum cartridge 4 Setting powder

(2) Drum unit cleaning Hydro wipe (cleaning pad is not available)

3Charging corona

(1) Charging wire assy /Y, /M, /C, /K

4

(2) Changing grid plate /Y, /M, /C, /K

Blower brush

(3) Charging corona dust-proof filter

1 ( )

4 Developer (1) Developer (Y, M, C, K) 4

(2) Developer unit cleaning Hydro wipe (cleaning pad is not availa-ble)

5Transfer belt

(1) Belt cleaning blade1

6 ADU (1) Separation corona unit 1

(2) Paper feed roller /BP

(3) Feed roller /BP

(4) Double feed prevention roller /BP

(5) Registration roller cleaning Hydro wipe/drum cleaner

(6) Conveyance roller section cleaning

Hydro wipe/drum cleaner

(7) ADU paper through sen-sor cleaning

Blower brush

7 Exterior (1) Ozone filter /1 1

(2) Dust proof filter /1 2

(3) Dust proof filter /2 1

8Fixing (1) Fixing roller /U *2

1Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)

(2) Fixing roller /L *21

Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)

(3) Cleaning roller Roller cleaner

9Reverse/exit

(1) Decurler roller25 mode count reset

1*1

*1 Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mode to prevent the fixing jam when

replacing the decurler roller.

*2 When replacing the fixing roller /U or /L, be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM on the heat insulating sleeve

/U or /L, respectively.


4-4

IV S

ER

VIC

E B. AFR-20 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

10Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller /1, /2, /3 Hydro wipe/

drum cleaner

(2) Feed roller /1, /2, /3 Hydro wipe/drum cleaner

(3) Double feed prevention roller /1, /2, /3

Hydro wipe/drum cleaner

11

Vertical

convey-

ance

(1) Conveyance roller, sensor Hydro wipe/drum cleaner/blower brush

12Scanner (1) Original glass, exposure

lamp, reflector, lens, mir-ror, sensor

Hydro wipe/drum cleaner/blower brush

13Write unit (1) Dust-proof glass (Y, M, C,

K)Hydro wipe

14Toner supply

(1) Toner supply unit cleaning Hydro wipe

15Toner collection

(1) Toner collection box replacing/cleaning

( )Hydro wipe

16 Final check (1) W.U.T. check

(2) Exterior cleaning Hydro wipe/drum cleaner

(3) Image and paper through check

(4) PM counter resetting (25 mode)

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

Prepara-

tions

(1) Paper through check

1Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller Cleaning pad/

drum cleaner

(2) Feed roller Cleaning pad/drum cleaner

(3) Double feed prevention roller

Cleaning pad/drum cleaner

(4) Pre-separation rubber Cleaning pad/drum cleaner

(5) Rubber roller Blower brush

(6) Reflective sensor Blower brush

(7) Conveyance belt Cleaning pad/drum cleaner

2Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/

drum cleaner

3 Final check (1) Paper through check


4-5

IV S

ER

VIC

E

C. C-208 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

D. FN-120 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Prepara-

tions


2Paper feed (1)Paper feed roller Cleaning pad/

drum cleaner

(2) Feed roller Cleaning pad/drum cleaner



(4) Paper dust removing

(5) Sensor Blower brush

(6) Gear( )

Plus guard No.2 *1

3Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/

drum cleaner


No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Prepara-

tions


2Convey-

ance

(1) Conveyance roller Cleaning pad/drum cleaner

3Drive (1) Main drive unit

( )Plus guard No.2 *1

(2) Tray up/down drive unit( )

Plus guard No.2 *1

(3) Shift drive unit( )

Plus guard No.2 *1

(4) Paper exit drive section( )

Plus guard No.2 *1

(5) Staple unit( )

Plus guard No.2 *1

4Stapler (1) Staple check Actual durable

count: 5,000

5 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning


*1 If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.


4-6

IV S

ER

VIC

E

E. FN-9 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

F. Cover Inserter D (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Prepara-

tions


2Convey-

ance


3Drive (1) Main drive unit


(2) Tray up/down drive unit( )

Plus guard No.2 *1

(3) Shift drive unit( )

Plus guard No.2 *1

(4) Paper exit drive section( )

Plus guard No.2 *1

(5) Staple unit( )

Plus guard No.2 *1

(6) Folding unit ( )

4 Folding (1) Folding roller

5Stapler (1) Staple check Actual durable

count: 5,000

6 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning

7Final check (1) Paper through check Stapler

positioning jig


No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Convey-

ance


2Paper feed (1) Feed roller Cleaning pad/

drum cleaner

(2) Paper feed conveyance roller





(2) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/drum cleaner


4-7

IV S

ER

VIC

E

G. PK-5 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

H. TMG-3 (Every 100,000 copies/prints)

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1 Punch unit (1) Punch die Blower brush

2 Punch scraps section

(1) Punch scraps dump

(2) Punch scraps full sensor Blower brush


(2) Interior cleaning Cleaning pad/drum cleaner

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Convey-

ance


(2) Conveyance belt

2Trimmer (1) Trimmer blade /U Cleaning pad/

drum cleaner

(2) Trimmer blade /L

(3) Trimming box and its periphery

3Stacker (1) Pusher section


(2) Stacker section( )

Plus guard No.2 *1

4 Drive (1) Conveyance drive section


(2) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/drum cleaner



4-8

IV S

ER

VIC

E

1.3 Periodic check items (main body)

A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints)

B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Charging corona

(1) Changing grid plate4

(2) Changing grid spring 8

2Transfer belt

(1) 1st transfer roller /K25 mode count reset

1*1

(2) 1st transfer roller /C25 mode count reset

31

(3) 2nd transfer roller /U 1

(4) Belt drive roller cleaning Hydro wipe/drum cleaner

(5) Transfer belt 1

(6) Toner collection sheet /1 1

32nd trans-

fer

(1) 2nd transfer roller /L1

4Fixing (1) Fixing cleaning unit

25 mode count reset1

*2

*1 Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" to prevent a image disturbances in the 25

mode when replacing the 1st transfer roller /Y/M/C/K.

*2 Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mod when replacing the fixing clean-

ing unit. Otherwise, the message "You need to replace the fixing cleaning unit. Please call the service."

appears and the copy/print prohibition state is started.

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1

Paper feed (1) Feed rubber (tray/1, /2, /3)

3Actual durable count: 125,000

(2) Double feed prevention rubber (tray/1, /2, /3)



4-9

IV S

ER

VIC

E

C. Periodic check (III) (Every 600,000 copies/prints)

D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)

E. Periodic check (V) (Every 1,500,000 copies/prints)

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Charging corona

(1) Charging corona dust-proof filter

1

2Developer (1) Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, /

K4

3Transfer belt

(1) Transfer belt separation claw

3

(2) Belt cleaning brush unit 1

4Registra-

tion

(1) Registration cleaning sheet 1

5 Fixing (1) Ball bearing /U 2

(2) Ball bearing /L 2

(3) Heat insulating sleeve /U2


(4) Heat insulating sleeve /L2


(5) Fixing torque limiter 1

No.Classifica-

tionService item

Quantity Implementation classificationMaterials•Tools usedClean-

ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Fixing (1) Fixing drive gear

1Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240)

22nd trans-

fer

(1) Transfer ground plate unit1

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Registra-

tion

(1) Registration roller1

2Transfer belt

(1) Separation claw solenoid1

3ADU (1) Feed rubber /BP


(2) Double feed prevention rubber /BP



4-10

IV S

ER

VIC

E

F. Periodic check (VI) (Every 2,000,000 copies/prints)

G. Periodic check (VII) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Vertical convey-ance

(1) Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 1

Actual durable count: 2,000,000

2ADU (1) Intermediate conveyance

clutch /2 1Actual durable count: 2,000,000

(2) Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 1


No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1 Fixing (1) Fixing upper lamp /1 1

(2) Fixing upper lamp /2 1

(3) Fixing lower lamp 1

(4) Fixing temperature sensor /3

1

(5) Fixing temperature sensor /4

1

2Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller

(tray/1, /2, /3)3

Actual durable count: 800,000


4-11

IV S

ER

VIC

E

H. Periodic check (VIII) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints)

1.4 Periodic check items (AFR-20)

A. Periodic check (I) (Every 1,800,000 copies/prints)

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch

(tray/1, /2, /3) 3Actual durable count: 2,000,000

(2) Pre-registration clutch (tray/1, /2, /3) 3


2ADU (1) ADU conveyance clutch /1

1Actual durable count: 2,000,000

(2) ADU conveyance clutch /21


(3) ADU pre-registration clutch 1


(4) Paper feed roller /BP1


(5) Paper feed clutch /BP1


No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement



(2) Feed roller1





4-12

IV S

ER

VIC

E

1.5 Periodic check items (C-208)


B. Periodic check (II) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement



(2) Feed roller1




No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch


(2) Pre-registration clutch1



4-13

IV S

ER

VIC

E

1.6 Periodic check items (FN-120/FN-9)


B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)

C. Periodic check (III) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)

D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Convey-

ance

(1) Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 10


(2) Intermediate conveyance roller /4 (sponge roller)


No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Convey-

ance

(1) Stack assist roller (sponge roller) 1

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1

Stapler (1) Stapler unit

2

Stapler positioning jigActual durable count: 200,000

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Drive (1) FNS up/down motor



4-14

IV S

ER

VIC

E

1.7 Periodic check items (Cover Inserter D)


B. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)

C. Periodic check (III) (Every 3,000,000 copies/prints)0

1.8 Periodic check items (TMG-3)

A. Periodic check (I) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints)

No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /B


(2) Double feed prevention roller assembly


No.Classifica-



ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /A


No. Classification Service item QuantityImplementation classification

Materials•Tools usedClean-

ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Paper feed (1) Torque limiter


No. Classification Service item QuantityImplementation classification

Materials•Tools usedClean-

ingCheck

Lubri-cation

Replacement

1Trimmer (1) Trimmer blade /U


(2) Trimmer blade /L1



4-15

IV S

ER

VIC

E

1.9 Replacement parts list

Note:

• No. in this list is identical with No. in "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25

mode.

No. Unit Parts name QuantityActual durable

count

001 Toner correction Toner collection box 1 50,000

002 Main body Ozone filter /1 1 100,000

004 Dust proof filter /1 2 100,000

005 Dust proof filter /2 1 100,000

006 Charging corona Charging corona dust-proof filter 1 600,000

007 Drum Drum cartridge /Y 1 100,000

012 Drum cartridge /M 1 100,000

017 Drum cartridge /C 1 100,000

022 Drum cartridge /K 1 100,000

028 Charging corona Charging wire assy /Y 1 100,000

029 Charging grid plate /Y 1 200,000

031 Charging wire assy /M 1 100,000

032 Charging grid plate /M 1 200,000

034 Charging wire assy /C 1 100,000

034 Charging grid plate /C 1 200,000

037 Charging wire assy /K 1 100,000

038 Charging grid plate /K 1 200,000

— Charging grid spring 8 200,000

040 Transfer belt Transfer belt 1 200,000

041 1st transfer roller /Y 1 200,000

042 1st transfer roller /M 1 200,000

043 1st transfer roller /C 1 200,000

044 1st transfer roller /K 1 200,000

045 2nd transfer roller /U 1 200,000

046 Transfer belt separation claw 3 600,000

048 Belt cleaning brush unit 1 600,000

049 Toner collection sheet /1 1 200,000

050 Belt cleaning blade 1 100,000

051 2nd transfer 2nd transfer roller /L 1 200,000

052 ADU Separation Discharging board unit 1 100,000

053 Fixing Fixing cleaning unit 1 200,000

054 Fixing roller /U 1 100,000

055 Fixing roller /L 1 100,000


4-16

IV S

ER

VIC

E

056 Developing Developer /Y 1 100,000

057 Developer /M 1 100,000

058 Developer /C 1 100,000

059 Developer /K 1 100,000

060 Developing unit /Y (color label included) 1 600,000

061 Developing unit /M (color label included) 1 600,000

062 Developing unit /C (color label included) 1 600,000

063 Developing unit /K (color label included) 1 600,000

069 FN-120/FN-9 FNS up/down unit 1 2,500,000

070 Stapler unit 1 200,000

071 Stapler unit 1 200,000

— Staple 1 5000

— Staple 1 5000

108 Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) 10 200,000

109 Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) 4 200,000

110 Stacking assist roller (sponge roller) 1 400,000

078 Cover Inserter D Feed roller assembly /A 1 200,000

079 Feed roller assembly /B 1 100,000

080 Double feed prevention roller assembly 1 100,000

081 Torque limiter 1 600,000

083 Feed roller assembly /A 1 200,000

084 Feed roller assembly /B 1 100,000

085 Double feed prevention roller assembly 1 100,000

086 Torque limiter 1 600,000

087 TMG-3 Trimmer blade /U 1 500,000

087 Trimmer blade /L 1 500,000

092 AFR-20 Paper feed roller 1 625,000

093 Feed roller 1 625,000

095 Double feed prevention roller 1 625,000

113 Registration Registration cleaning sheet 1 600,000

112 Fixing unit Fixing torque limiter 1 600,000

114 Ball bearing /U (for upper roller) 2 600,000

115 Heat insulating sleeve /U (for upper roller) 2 600,000

116 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 1 2,000,000

117 ADU Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 1 2,000,000

118 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 1 2,000,000


count


4-17

IV S

ER

VIC

E

119 Main body paper feed Paper feed rubber /1 1 125,000

119 Double feed prevention rubber /1 1 125,000

120 Paper feed rubber /2 1 125,000


121 Paper feed rubber /3 1 125,000


122 Paper feed rubber /BP 1 125,000

122 Double feed prevention rubber /BP 1 125,000

130 Paper feed roller /1 1 800,000



133 Paper feed roller (By-pass) 1 800,000

123 Registration Registration roller 1 1,500,000

124 Transfer belt Separation claw solenoid 1 1,500,000

125 Fixing Fixing upper lamp /1 1 2,500,000

126 Fixing upper lamp /2 1 2,500,000

127 Fixing lower lamp 1 2,500,000

128 Fixing temperature sensor /3 1 2,500,000

129 Fixing temperature sensor /4 1 2,500,000

134 ADU ADU conveyance clutch /1 1 2,000,000

135 ADU conveyance clutch /2 1 2,000,000

136 ADU pre-registration clutch 1 2,000,000

137 Fixing Ball bearing /L (for lower roller) 2 600,000

138 Heat insulating sleeve/L (for lower roller) 2 600,000

139 Fixing drive gear 1 1,000,000

140 Reverse/exit unit Decurler roller 1 100,000

141 C-208 Paper feed roller 1 500,000

142Feed roller 1 500,000

Double feed prevention roller 1 500,000

143 Paper feed clutch 1 2,000,000

144 Pre-registration clutch 1 2,000,000

145 Main body paper feed Paper feed clutch /1 1 2,000,000

146 Pre-registration clutch /1 1 2,000,000

147 Paper feed clutch /2 1 2,000,000


149 Paper feed clutch /3 1 2,000,000


151 Paper feed clutch /BP 1 2,000,000

152 2nd transfer Transfer ground plate unit 1 1,000,000


count


4-18

IV S

ER

VIC

E

1.10 Important maintenance parts

• The important parts specified by Minolta in order

to maintain safety of the products are referred to

as "important maintenance parts". The important

maintenance parts for this machine are as

described below:

No. Unit Parts name Quantity

1 Fixing unit Thermostat /1 1

2 Fixing unit Thermostat /L 1

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 COPY MATERIAL

4-19

IV S

ER

VIC

E

2. COPY MATERIAL

2.1 Product

A. Drum cartridge

2.2 Materials

A. Single unit supply

B. Kit

a Developer black set

b Developer yellow set

c Developer magenta set

d Developer cyan set

Drum

Toner black

Toner yellow

Toner magenta

Toner cyan

Developer black

Developer charging funnel/U

Developer collection sheet (rubber band)

Developer yellow



Developer magenta



Developer cyan



COPY MATERIAL CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

4-20

IV S

ER

VIC

E

2.3 PM parts kit

A. 100,000 copies/1 set (total)

B. 200,000 copies/1set (total)

NameQuantity

North America Europe

Toner collecting box assy 2 1

Ozone filter /1 1 1

Dust proof filter /1 2 2

Dust proof filter /2 1 1

Belt cleaning blade 1 1

Separation corona unit 1 1

Fixing roller /U 1 1

Fixing roller /L 1 1

Decurler roller 1 1

Charging wire assy 4 4

Paper for fixing speed adjustment (16 sheets/A3)

1 1

Dust bag (rubber band) - 1

Hand case for collection - 1

Cotton swab (x4) - 1

Hydro wipe (x10) - 1

NameQuantity

*All area

Transfer belt 1

1st transfer roller /K 1

1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C 3

Toner collection sheet /1 1

2nd transfer roller /U 1

2nd transfer roller /L 1

Fixing cleaning unit 1

Changing grid plate 4

Changing grid spring 8

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SERVICE MATERIAL LIST

4-21

IV S

ER

VIC

E

3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST

Material No. Name Shape Remark

4014-5007-01 Setting powder

25g

Multemp grease

FF-RM 25g

Solvest 240 Multemp FF-RM is

recommended

Plasguard No.2

CE TOOLS LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

4-22

IV S

ER

VIC

E

4. CE TOOLS LISTTool No. Name Shape Quantity Remark

4969-1885-01 Fixing thermostat positioning jig

(for upper roller) 1

4969-1886-01 Fixing thermostat positioning jig

(for lower roller) 1

4014-5005-01 Mirror positioning jig

2

4014-5006-01 Door switch jig

1

4969-1887-01 Color chart (metric)

1

4969-1888-01 Color chart (inch)

1

4024-2153-01 New Pyramid chart

1

4014-5010-01 Adjustment chart

1

4014-5009-01 Stapler positioning jig

1

For adjusting

FN-120/FN-9

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 JAM CODE LIST

5-1

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

V CODE LIST

1. JAM CODE LIST

Classifi-cation

Jam code

Causes Resultingoperation

Correction

By-pass feed

J10-01D

urin

g op

erat

ion After the pickup solenoid /BP (SD5) is

turned ON, by-pass feed feeder sensor (PS26) is not turned ON within the specified time.

If copy is pro-gressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.

Remove the paper from the by-pass feed tray once and remove jammed paper, if any.

J10-02 After no paper sensor /BP (PS47) is turned ON, tray up drive motor /BP (M35) is not turned ON within specified time.

Remove paper from the by-pass feed tray once, decrease the stacked sheets and set again.J10-03 After the tray up drive motor /BP (M35)

is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) is not turned ON within specified time.

J10-11

Whe

n id

ling By-pass feed conveyance sensor

(PS26) was turned ON in the idling con-dition.

— Remove the paper from the by-pass feed tray once and remove jammed paper, if any.

Paper feed tray /1

J11-01

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) is not turned ON within the specified time.


Pull out the paper feed tray /1 and remove jammed paper, if any.

J11-11

Whe

n id

ling Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) was

turned ON in the idling condition.—

Paper feed tray /2

J12-01

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After pick-up solenoid /2 (SD8) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) is not turned ON within speci-fied time.



J12-11

Whe

n id



JAM CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

5-2

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Paper feed tray /3

J13-01

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the pick-up solenoid /3 (SD9) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) is not turned ON.



J13-11

Whe

n id



C-208 J14-01

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the paper feed solenoid (SD100) is turned ON, paper feed sensor (PS107) is not turned ON within speci-fied time.


Open the LCT top cover and remove jammed paper, if any.

J14-11

Whe

n id

ling Feed sensor (PS106) was turned ON in

the idling condition.—

Paper feed

J17-01

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the loop roller motor (M31) is turned ON, registration sensor (PS22) is not turned ON within specified time.


Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.

J17-02 After the ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) is turned ON, registration sensor (PS22) is not turned ON within the specified time.

Printer section stops immedi-ately.

J17-03 After the pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12) is turned ON, vertical convey-ance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON within specified time.


Open the vertical con-veyance door and remove jammed paper, if any.

J17-04 After the pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10) is turned ON, vertical convey-ance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON within specified time.


Classifi-cation

Jam code


Correction


5-3

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Paper feed

J17-05

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13) is turned ON, interme-diate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time.


Open the vertical con-veyance door and remove jammed paper, if any.

J17-06 After the pre-registration clutch /1 (MC7) is turned ON, intermediate con-veyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time.

J17-07 After the pre-registration clutch (MC102) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time.

Open the LCT front door and remove jammed paper, if any.

J17-08 After the intermediate conveyance sen-sor /1 (PS27) is turned ON, intermedi-ate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not turned ON within specified time.


J17-09 After the by-pass feed conveyance sen-sor (PS26) is turned ON, the intermedi-ate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not turned ON within the specified time.

Remove paper from the by-pass feed tray and remove jammed paper, if any.

C-208 J17-10 After the pre-registration clutch (MC102) is turned ON, paper feed sen-sor (PS107) is not turned ON within the specified time.

Open the LCT top cover and remove jammed paper, if any.

Paper feed

J17-11

Whe

n id

ling Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) was

turned ON in the idling condition.— Open the vertical con-

veyance door and remove jammed paper, if any.

J17-12 Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) was turned ON in the idling con-dition.


J17-13 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) was turned ON in the idling con-dition.

J17-14 Registration sensor (OS22) was turned in the idling condition.

C-208 J17-15 Paper feed sensor (PS107) was turned ON in the idling condition.

Open the LCT front door and remove jammed paper, if any.

Classifi-cation

Jam code


Correction


5-4

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Others J19-01

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n Vertical conveyance door open jam. Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51) was turned OFF when copying /printing.


Close the vertical con-veyance door.

OthersC-208

J19-02 LCT top cover open jam or LCT front door open jam. Top cover open/close sensor (PS100) or front door open/close sensor (PS115) was turned OFF when copying/printing.

In case of LCT paper feed, main body stops after completion of paper exit. In case of paper feed other than LCT, main body does not stop.

Close the LCT top cover or LCT front door.

Paper exit

J31-02 After the registration roller motor (M30) is turned ON, fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is not turned ON.



J32-01 After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is not turned ON within the specified time.

J32-02 After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is not turned ON within the specified time.

J32-03 In the reverse paper exit mode, after the reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is not turned ON within the specified time.

J32-04 After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.

J32-05 After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in straight paper exit mode).

J32-07 After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in reverse paper exit mode).

J32-08 When the registration roller motor (M30) is ON, fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is ON.

Paper exit

J32-11

Whe

n id

ling Paper exit sensor (PS13) is ON in the

idling condition.— Pull out ADU and

remove jammed paper, if any.J32-12 Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is

turned ON in the idling condition.

J32-13 Reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is ON in the idling condition.

Classifi-cation

Jam code


Correction


5-5

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Others J51-01

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n Front door open jam. Front door open/close sensor (PS18) was turned OFF while copying/printing.


Close the front door.

AFR-20 J61-01 Paper feed section cover open jam. Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) was turned OFF when copying.

RADF stops immediately.If there is paper in or after trans-fer process, main body stops after paper exit.

Close the paper feed section cover.

J61-02 Paper feed tray open jam. Tray open/close sensor (PS308) was turned OFF when copying.

Close the paper feed tray.

J61-03 Paper exit section cover open jam. Paper exit cover sensor (PS307) was turned OFF when copying.

Close the paper exit section cover.

J62-01 Registration sensor (PS301) is not turned OFF within specified time after paper feed is started.

Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance sec-tion, if any.

J62-02 After reversal of paper feed motor (M301) is started, timing sensor (PS302) is not turned ON within the specified time.

J62-03 After the timing sensor (PS302) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.

J62-04 After the reverse/paper exit motor (M303) is turned ON, reverse sensor (PS305) is not turned ON within the specified time.

Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance sec-tion, if any.

J62-05 After the reverse sensor (PS305) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.

J62-06 In the one-sided original exit mode, paper exit sensor (PS306) is not turned ON within the specified time after the start of paper exit.In the double-sided original exit mode, original exit sensor (PS306) is not turned ON within the specified time after the reverse sensor (PS305) is turned ON.

Classifi-cation

Jam code


Correction


5-6

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

AFR-20 J62-07

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the paper exit sensor (PS306) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.

RADF stops immediately.If there is paper in or after trans-fer process, main body stops after paper exit.

Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance sec-tion, if any.

J65-01

Whe

n id

ling Registration sensor (PS301) is ON in

the idling condition.— Open the paper feed

section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.

J65-02 Reverse sensor (PS305) is ON in the idling condition.

Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.

J65-03 Timing sensor (PS302) is ON in the idling condition.

Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.

J65-04 Paper exit sensor (PS306) is ON in the idling condition.

Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any.

OthersFN-120FN-9

J71-01

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n FNS front door open jam. FNS interlock switch (MS701) was turned OFF when copying/printing.


Close the FNS front door.

OthersTMG-3

J71-02 TU front door open jam. Front door MS2 (MS2) was turned OFF when copying/printing.

Close the TU front door.

FN-120FN-9

J72-16 After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS/main body stop immedi-ately.

Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.

J72-17 After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is not turned ON within the specified time.

J72-18 After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is not turned ON within the specified time (when stapling).

Classifi-cation

Jam code


Correction


5-7

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

FN-120FN-9

J72-19

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the stacker inlet motor (M713) is turned ON, stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is not turned ON within the specified time.



J72-20 After paper exit operation is started, main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is not turned ON within the specified time (when stapling).

J72-21 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the large-size staple mode).

J72-22 After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is not turned ON within the specified time within the specified time (in the sub-tray paper exit mode).

J72-23 After the sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the large-size staple mode).

J72-24 After completion of stapling, folding passage sensor (PS726) is not turned ON.

J72-25 After the folding knife motor (M719) is turned ON, folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is not turned ON within the specified time.

J72-26 After the folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.

J72-28 After the stacker inlet sensor (PW705) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.

J72-29 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the non-staple mode).

J72-30 After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the small-size staple mode).

Classifi-cation

Jam code


Correction


5-8

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

TMG-3 J72-32

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is turned ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned ON within the specified time.

TU/FNS/main body stop imme-diately.

Remove jammed paper in TU/FNS/main body, if any.

J72-33 After the inlet sensor (PS101) is turned ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned ON within the specified time.

J72-34 After the conveyance motor (M101) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS108) is not turned OFF within the specified time.

Cover Inserter D

J72-35 After the conveyance clutch /L (MC202) is turned ON, PI passage sensor /L (PS206) is not turned ON within speci-fied time.



PK-5 J72-43 After the punch motor (M801) is turned ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FN-120FN-9

J72-48 After the folding passage sensor (PS726) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.

Cover Inserter D

J72-49 After the conveyance clutch /U (MC201) is turned ON, PI passage sen-sor (PS201) is not turned ON within the specified time.

J72-50 After the PI passage sensor (PS201) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time.

J72-51 After the PI passage sensor /L (PS206) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FN-120FN-9

J72-81 After the stapler motor /F (M714) and clincher motor /F (M715) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) and clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) are not turned ON within specified time.

J72-82 After the stapler motor /R (M709) and clincher motor /R (M710) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) and clincher HP sensor (PS732) are not turned ON within the specified time.

Classifi-cation

Jam code


Correction


5-9

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

FN-120FN-9

J72-83

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the stapler motor /F, /R (M714), M709), and clincher motor /F, /R (M715, M710) are turned ON, stapler HP sen-sor /F, /R (PS731, PS730) and clincher HP sensor /F, /R (PS733, PS732) are not turned ON within the specified time.



J72-90 After operation stop signal is transmit-ted from the main body to FNS, FNS does not stop within the specified time.

J73-01

Whe

n id

ling Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is

ON in the idling condition.— Open the FNS front

door and remove jammed paper, if any.J73-02 Stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is ON in

the idling condition.

J73-05 FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is ON in the idling condition.

J73-07 Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is ON in the idling condition.

Remove jammed paper in the sub-tray, if any.

J73-08 Stacker no-paper sensor (PS720) is ON in the idling condition.

Open the FNS front door and remove jammed paper, if any.J73-09 Folding passage sensor (PS726) is ON

in the idling condition.

J73-10 Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is ON in the idling condition.

TMG-3 J73-11 Inlet sensor (PS101) is ON in the idling condition.

Open the TU front door and remove jammed paper, if any.J73-12 Conveyance sensor (PS102) is ON in

the idling condition.

J73-13 Paper exit sensor (PS108) is ON in the idling condition.

Cover Inserter D

J73-14 PI passage sensor (PS206) is ON in the idling condition.

Remove paper from the cover sheet feeder /L and remove jammed paper, if any.

J73-17 PI passage sensor /U (PS201) is ON in the idling condition.

Remove paper in the cover sheet feeder /U once and remove jammed paper, if any.

ADU J92-01

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is turned ON, ADU reverse sen-sor (PS21) is not turned ON within the specified time.



ADU J92-11

Whe

n id

ling ADU reverse sensor (PS21) is ON in

the idling condition.— Pull out ADU and

remove jammed paper, if any.

Classifi-cation

Jam code


Correction


5-10

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

J93-01

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After reversal of ADU reverse motor (M32) is turned ON, ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is not turned ON within the specified time.


J93-11

Whe

n id

ling ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is ON

in the idling condition.—

J94-02

Dur

ing

oper

atio

n After the ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is turned ON, ADU pre-registra-tion sensor (PS23) is not turned ON within the specified time.


J94-11

Whe

n id

ling ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is

ON in the idling condition.—

Classifi-cation

Jam code


Correction

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ERROR CODE LIST

5-11

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

2. ERROR CODE LIST

Note:

• In the F code area of warning codes, "Contact the Service Section" is indicated and in the E

code area, "Turn ON the power switch again" is indicated. On the actual LCD screen, all the indi-

cations are SC codes.

Classification Abnor-mality code

Causes Resulting operation

Estimated abnormal parts

Mai

n bo

dy

Commu-nication abnor-mality

F10-10 Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and LT drive board (LTDB)

Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.

Printer control board (PRCB)LT drive board (LTDB)

Paper feed motor abnor-mality

F13-01 M41 abnormality detection sig-nal was continuoudly detected for the specified time when the paper feed motor (M41) was ON.

Printer control board (PRCB)Paper feed motor (M41)

C-2

08

LT paper feed motor abnor-mality

F13-02 M101 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time when the paper feed motor (M101) was ON.

LT drive motor (LTDB)Paper feed motor (M101)

Mai

n bo

dy

Paper feed tray abnor-mality

F18-01 After the tray up/down motor /l (M40) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) is not turned ON.

Printer control board (PRCB)Tray up/down motor /1 (M40)Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30)

F18-02 After the tray up/down motor /2 (M39) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS38) is not turned ON.

Printer control board (PRCB)Tray upper limit motor /2 (M39)Tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS38)

F18-03 After the tray up/down motor /3 (M38) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42) is not turned ON.

Printer control board (PRCB)Tray upper limit motor /3 (M38)Tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42)

F18-04 After the tray up/down motor /BP (M35) is turned ON, the tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) is not turned ON within the specified time.

Conveyance drive board (CVDB)Tray up/down motor /BP (M35)Tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25)

C-2

08

LT up/down motor abnor-mality

F18-50 When the up/down motor (M100) was ON, M100 abnor-mality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.


LT drive board (LTDB)UP/DOWN motor (M100)

ERROR CODE LIST CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

5-12

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

C-2

08

LT up/down motor abnor-mality

F18-51 When the upper limit sensor (PS109) or lower limit sensor (PS101) is OFF, PS101 or PS109 is not turned ON within the specified time after the up/down motor (M100) is turned ON.


LT drive board (LTDB)UP/DOWN motor (M100)Upper limit sensor (PS109)Lower limit sensor (PS101)

LT paper feed assist fan abnor-mality

F18-60 When the paper feed assist fan /R (M137) was ON, M137 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.

LT drive board (LTDB)Paper feed assist fan /R (M137)

F18-61 When the paper feed assist fan /F (M136) was ON, M136 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.

LT drive board (LTDB)Paper feed assist fan /F (M136)

LT power abnor-mality

F18-70 24VDC is not supplied to LCT. DC power unit /2 (DCPS2)LT drive board (LTDB)

F18-71 12VDC is not supplied to LCT. DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)LT drive board (LTDB)

Mai

n bo

dy


F20-10 Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y) or drum drive board /M (DRDB /M).

Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y)Drum drive board /M (DRDB /M)

F20-11 Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and drum drive board /C (DRDB /C) or drum drive board /K (DRDB /K).

Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C)Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)

F20-12 Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and transfer belt motor (M18)

Printer control board (PRCB)Transfer belt motor (M18)





5-13

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dyPre-charging exposure lampabnor-mality

F21-01 Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y (PCL Y) set cannot be detected.


Printer control board (PRCB)Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y (PCL Y)

F21-02 Pre-charging exposure lamp /M (PCL M) set cannot be detected.

Printer control board (PRCB)Pre-charging exposure lamp /M (PCL M)

F21-03 Pre-charging exposure lamp /C (PCL C) set cannot be detected.

Printer control board (PRCB)Pre-charging exposure lamp /C (PCL C)

F21-04 Pre-charging exposure lamp /K (PCL K) set cannot be detected.

Printer control board (PRCB)Pre-charging exposure lamp /K (PCL K)

Develop-ing motor abnor-mality

F23-01 When the developing motor /Y (M20) was ON, M20 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Developing motor /Y (M20)

F23-02 When the developing motor /M (M21) was ON, M21 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Developing motor /M (M21)

F23-03 When developing motor /C (M22) was ON, M22 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Developing motor /C (M22)

F23-04 When the developing motor /K (M23) was ON, M23 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Developing motor /K (M23)

Drum motor abnor-mality

F23-05 When the drum motor /Y (M14) was ON, M14 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y)Drum motor /Y (M14)

F23-06 When the drum motor /M (M15) was ON, M15 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /M (DRDB /M)Drum motor /M (M15)





5-14

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dy

Drum motor abnor-mality

F23-07 When the drum motor /C (M16) was ON, M16 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.


Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C)Drum motor /C (M16)

F23-08 When drum motor /K (M17) was ON, M17 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)Drum motor /K (M17)

Transfer belt unit abnor-mality

F23-09 When the transfer belt motor (M18) was ON, M18 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Transfer belt motor (M18)

F23-10 When the 1st transfer HP sen-sor (PS15) is ON, PS15 is not turned OFF within the speci-fied time after the 1st transfer pressing/releasing motor (M19) is turned ON.When PS15 is OFF, PS15 is not turned ON within the speci-fied time after M19 is turned ON.

Printer control board (PRCB)1st transfer pressing/releasing motor (M19)1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)

Toner supply abnor-mality

F23-11 When either of the toner sup-ply motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (M49, M50, M51, or M52), toner bot-tle motor (M53), or toner bottle clutch /Y, /M, /C, /K (MC14, MC15, MC16, or MC17) was ON, either abnormality detec-tion signal was continuously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Toner supply drive board (TSDB)Toner supply motor /Y (M49)Toner supply motor /M (M50)Toner supply motor /C (M51)Toner supply motor /K (M52)Toner bottle motor (M53)Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15)Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16)Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17)

L detec-tion abnor-mality

F27-01 Output of toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y) cannot be con-trolled.

Printer control board (PRCB)Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)

F27-02 Output of toner density sensor /M (TDS M) cannot be con-trolled.

Printer control board (PRCB)Toner density sensor /M (TDS M)

F27-03 Output of toner density sensor /C (TDS C) cannot be con-trolled.

Printer control board (PRCB)Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)





5-15

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dyL detec-tion abnor-mality

F27-04 Output of toner density sensor /K (TDS K) cannot be con-trolled.


Printer control board (PRCB)Toner density sensor /K (TDS K)

High pressure unit abnor-mality

F28-01 When the charging /Y was ON, charging /Y abnormality detec-tion signal was continuously detected for the specified time.

High pressure unit /1 (HV1)

F28-02 When charging /M was ON, charging /M abnormality detec-tion signal was continuously detected for the specified time.

F28-03 When charging /C is ON, charging /C abnormality detec-tion signal was continuously detected for the specified time.

F28-04 When charging /K was ON, charging /K abnormality detec-tion signal was continuously detected for the specified time.

F29-01 When the primary transfer Y was ON, primary transfer Y abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.

High pressure unit /2 (HV2)1st transfer roller

F29-02 When the primary transfer M was ON, primary transfer M abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.

F29-03 When the primary transfer C was ON, primary transfer C abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.

F29-04 When the primary transfer K was ON, primary transfer K abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.





5-16

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dy

Process abnor-mality

F29-06 Gamma sensor (PS11) improperly adjusted while in the Dmax control.


Printer control board (PRCB)Gamma sensor (PS11)

F29-07 Dmax control /Y resulted in an abnormality.

Printer control board (PRCB)Developing unit /YGamma sensor (PS11)

F29-08 Dmax control /M resulted in an abnormality.

Printer control board (PRCB)Developing unit /MGamma sensor (PS11)

F29-09 Dmax control /C resulted in an abnormality.

Printer control board (PRCB)Developing unit /CGamma sensor (PS11)

F29-10 Dmax control /K resulted in an abnormality.

Printer control board (PRCB)Developing unit /KGamma sensor (PS11)

F29-11 In charging potential control, drum surface potential /Y was out of specification.

Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y)Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)

F29-12 In charging potential control, drum surface potential /M was out of specification.

Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M)Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)

F29-13 In charging potential control, drum surface potential /C was out of specification.

Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C)Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C)

F29-14 In charging potential control, drum surface potential /K was out of specification.

Printer control board (PRCB)Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K)Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K)

F29-15 Charging potential control /Y resulted in an abnormality.


F29-16 Charging potential control /M resulted in an abnormality.






5-17

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dyProcess abnor-mality

F29-17 Charging potential control /C resulted in an abnormality.



F29-18 Charging potential control /K resulted in an abnormality.


F29-19 Dot diameter adjustment con-trol /Y resulted in an abnormal-ity.


F29-20 Dot diameter adjustment con-trol /M resulted in an abnormal-ity.


F29-21 Dot diameter adjustment con-trol /C resulted in an abnormal-ity.


F29-22 Dot diameter adjustment con-trol /K resulted in an abnormal-ity.


F29-23 Gamma sensor (PS11) improperly adjusted while in the gamma correction control

Printer control board (PRCB)Gamma sensor (PS11)

F30-01 2nd transfer abnormality High voltage unit /2 (HU2)

F30-02 Separation abnormality High voltage unit /2 (HU2)

Motor abnor-mality

F30-10 ADU conveyance drive board communication abnormality

Conveyance drive board (CVDB)Printer control board (PRCB)

Fan abnor-mality

F32-01 When the fixing cooling fan /1 and /2 (M10, M36, M37) were ON, abnormality detection sig-nal of either of them was con-tinuously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10)Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37)Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)

F32-02 When the drum unit fan /3 (M47) was ON, M36 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Drum unit fan /3 (M47)Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)





5-18

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dy

Fan abnor-mality

F32-03 When the paper exit fan /F, /M, and /R (M28, M27, and M26) were ON, abnormality detec-tion signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time.


Printer control board (PRCB)Paper exit fan /F (M28)Paper exit fan /M (M27)Paper exit fan /R (M26)

F32-04 When charging air intake fan (M48) was ON, M48 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.

Toner supply drive board (TSDB)Charging air suction fan (M48)

F32-05 When the drum cooling fan /1 and /2 (M12, M13) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continu-ously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Drum cooling fan /1 (M12)Drum cooling fan /2 (M13)

F32-06 When the transfer belt cooling fan (M11) was ON, M11 abnor-mality detection signal was continuoudly detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)

Motor abnor-mality

F33-01 When the fixing motor (M29) was ON, M29 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.

Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)Fixing motor (M29)

F33-02 When the pressure release sensor (PS16) is ON, PS16 is not turned OFF within the specified time after the fixing motor (M29) is turned ON.When PS16 is OFF, PS16 is not turned ON within the speci-fied time after M29 is turned ON.

Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)Fixing motor (M29)Fixing pressure release sensor (PS16)

F33-03 After the 2nd transfer pressing/releasing motor (M34) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.

Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)2nd transfer pressing/releasing motor (M34)

F33-04 Abnormality of Web motor (M54) or circuit was detected.

Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)Web motor (M54)





5-19

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dyFixing high tem-perature abnor-mality

F34-01 Fixing high temperature abnor-mality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature over 250°C was continuously detected for the specified time.


Printer control board (PRCB)AC drive board (ACDB)Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2)Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3)Fixing lower lamp (L4)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)

WARNING• When F34-**, F35-** or

F36-** (fixing tempera-ture related abnormality)occurs, be sure to repaira defective part beforesetting the 25 DIPSW 3-1to 0.If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is setto 0 without repairing adefective part, this maycause a fire.




F34-05 Fixing compensation high tem-perature abnormality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature over 150°C was continuously detected for the specified time.

F34-06 Fixing compensation high tem-perature abnormality (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature over 150°C was continuously detected for the specified time.

F34-08 Fixing roller paper seizure abnormalityJ31-02 occurred 4 continuous times.





5-20

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dy

Fixing low tempera-ture abnor-mality

F35-01 Fixing low temperature abnor-mality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature under 150°C was continuously detected.





F35-02 Fixing low temperature abnor-mality (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detection temperature under 150°C was continuously detected for the specified time.



F35-05 Fixing compensation low tem-perature abnormality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature under 20°C was continuously detected for the specified time.

F35-06 Fixing compensation low tem-perature abnormality (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature under 20°C was continuously detected for the specified time.





5-21

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dyFixing sensor abnor-mality

F36-02 Fixing high temperature hard-ware detection abnormality (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.





F36-04 Fixing high temperature hard-ware detection abnormality (TH4)Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.

F36-05 Fixing low temperature hard-ware detection abnormality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.

F36-06 Fixing low temperature hard-ware abnormality (TH2)Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.



F36-09 Fixing compensation high tem-perature hardware detection abnormality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.





5-22

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dy

Fixing sensor abnor-mality

F36-10 Fixing compensation low tem-perature hardware detection abnormality (TH1)Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.





Fixing sensor abnor-mality

F36-11 Fixing compensation high tem-perature hardware detection abnormality (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.

F36-12 Fixing compensation low tem-perature hardware detection abnormality (TH3)Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.

F38-02 After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection tem-perature does not reach 150°C within the specified time.

F38-03 After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection tem-perature does not reach 150°C within the specified time.

F39-01 Fixing section has not been set.

Scanner abnor-mality

F41-01 At the home position search, scanner HP sensor (PS1) is not turned on within the speci-fied time after the scanner motor (M1) is turned ON.

Scanner drive board (SCDB)Scanner motor (M1)Scanner HP sensor (PS1)

Motor abnor-mality

F41-02 When the polygon motor /Y (M3) is started or when the speed is switched, M3 lock sig-nal is not detected within the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /Y (M3)

F41-03 When the polygon motor (M4) is started or the speed is switched, M4 lock signal is not detected within the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /M (M4)





5-23

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dyMotor abnor-mality

F41-04 When the polygon motor /C (M5) is started or the speed is switched, M5 lock signal is not detected within the specified time.


Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /C (M5)

F41-05 When the polygon motor /K (M6) is started or the speed is switched, M6 lock signal is not detected within the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /K (M6)

Scanner abnor-mality

F41-06 When the optical scanning returns, scanner HP sensor (PS1) is not turned ON within the specified time after the scanner motor (M1) is turned ON.

Scanner drive board (SCDB)Scanner motor (M1)Scanner HP sensor (PS1)

Motor abnor-mality

F41-07 Abnormal temperature of poly-gon motor /Y (M3) was detected.

Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /Y (M3)

F41-08 Abnormal temperature of poly-gon motor /M (M4) was detected.

Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /M (M4)

F41-09 Abnormal polygon motor /C (M5) was detected.

Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /C (M5)

F41-10 Abnormal temperature of poly-gon motor /K (M6) was detected.

Printer control board (PRCB)Polygon motor /K (M6)

F41-11 Temperature detection board (TDB) detected temperature abnormality in writing unit /K.

Printer control board (PRCB)Temperature detection board (TDB)

Fan abnor-mality

F42-01 When the write intake fan /1, /2 (M43, M44), and write exhaust fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continu-ously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Writing suction fan /1 (M43)Writing suction fan /2 (M44)Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45)Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46)

F42-02 When scanner cooling fan (M2) was ON, M2 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.

Scanner drive board (SCDB)Scanner cooling fan (M2)





5-24

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dy

Color reg-istration abnor-mality

F45-01 Color registration base line correction /F resulted in abnor-mality.


Printer control board (PRCB)Color registration sensor /F (PS8)

F45-03 Color registration base line correction /R results in abnor-mality.

Printer control board (PRCB)Color registration sensor /R (PS9)

F45-07 When laser correction motor /Y (M7) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) was turned OFF.

Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /Y (M7)Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)

F45-08 When the laser correction motor /M (M8) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) was turned OFF,

Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /M (M8)Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)

F45-09 When the laser correction motor /C (M9) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) was turned OFF.

Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /C (M9)Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)

F45-10 After the laser correction motor /Y (M7) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the speci-fied time. Or, laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) installing position is abnormal.

Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /Y (M7)Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)

F45-11 Laser correction motor /M (MB) is not turned OFF within the specified time after it is turned ON. Or, laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) installing posi-tion is abnormal.

Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /M (M8)Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)

F45-12 Laser correction motor /C (M9) is not turned OFF within the specified time after it is turned ON. Or, the laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) installing posi-tion is abnormal.

Printer control board (PRCB)Laser correction motor /C (M9)Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)

F45-20 Color registration correction results in abnormality.

Printer control board (PRCB)Color registration sensor /F (PS8)Color registration sensor /R (PS9)





5-25

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dyImage process-ingabnor-mality

E46-01 When scanning the image, sub-scan beam correction APC cannot be applied. Laser does not light up because 12VDC power to drive the beam is not supplied, MPC is not correct, or because of fault laser.


Writing unit /Y /M /C /KImage processing board (IPB)

E46-02 Address abnormality of FIFO for scanner. When scanning the image, compression of scanned image data is not nor-mally completed.

Image processing board (IPB)Printer control board (PRCB)

E46-03 Address abnormality of FIFO for printer. Expansion of scanned image data is not nor-mally completed.

E46-05 FIFO interrupt error of com-pression/expansion chip occurred.

Image processing board (IPB)

E46-06 Image data expansion abnor-mality

Image processing board (IPB)Expansion memory

E46-07 Connection abnormality between A/D conversion board (ADB) and image processing board (IPB)

Image processing board (IPB)Overall control board (OACB)A/D conversion board (ADB)CCD wiring harness

E46-08 Index sensor output does not change by the execution of APC. Index sensor cannot decect the laser because the polygon mirror does not rotate, or because of the index sensor out of position or defective index sensor

Writing unit /Y /M /C /KImage processing board (IPB)Printer control board (PRCB)

E46-09 Connection abnormality between index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K (INDX SB Y, M, C, K) or laser drive board (LDB Y, M, C, K) and image processing board (IPB)

Writing unit /Y /M /C /KImage processing board (IPB)





5-26

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dy

Image process-ingabnor-mality

E46-12 After negation of SVV, com-pression of scanned image and evolution to page memory are not completed.


Printer control board (PRCB)Overall control board (OACB)Image processing board (IPB)

E46-13 When scanning the image, compression process from scanner to memory is not com-pleted within the specified time. Evolution from scanner to page memory is not completed within the specified time. SVV is not detected within the spec-ified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Overall control board (OACB)Image processing board (IPB)

E46-14 When scanning the image, expansion process from mem-ory to printer is not completed within the specified time. Out-put from page memory to printer is not completed within the specified time. PVV is not detected within the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)Overall control board (OACB)Image processing board (IPB)Writing unit /Y /M /C /K

E46-15 When scanning the image, access to expansion device or some other improper process took place even though there was no resource.

Image processing board (IPB)Program of overall control board (OACB)

E46-16 When scanning the image, access to compression device or some other improper pro-cess took place even though there was no resource.

E46-17 When processing the image, filter coefficient cannot be properly prepared.

E46-19 When accessing the memory device, software fault was detected.





5-27

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo


E46-21 Expansion process from mem-ory to page memory is not completed within the specified time.Compression process from page memory to memory is not completed within the specified time.Evolution from memory to page memory is not completed within the specified time.Compressed data transfer from memory to memory is not com-pleted within the specified time.


Printer control board (PRCB)Image processing board (IPB)Program of overall control board (OACB)

E46-23 When scanning the image, SVV is not turned OFF within the specified time and there-fore scanning of next page cannot be started.

Printer control board (PRCB)Image processing board (IPB)Overall control board (OACB)

E46-24 Shading correction abnormal-ity (GA abnormality)

Image processing board (IPB)Program of image processing board (IPB)

E46-25 AOC/AGC adjustment abnor-mality• Blocking cover and lens cover

of scanner section are out of place.

• A/D conversion board (ADB) connector is disconnected.

• ADB power cable is discon-nected.

• ADB IC protector is broken.• Quantity of light of exposure

lamp (L1) is excess.• L1 does not light up.

A/D conversion board (ADB)Exposure lamp (L1)Image processing board (IPB)Printer control board (PRCB)Overall control board (OACB)Scanner drive board (SCDB)L1 inverter board (L1INVB)





5-28

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dy

Image process-ingabnor-mality

E46-26 There is no correction data which has been reserved by resolution.

Abnormality detection process is performed but no abnor-mality code is indicated on the opera-tion board and main body contin-ues opera-tion. Abnormality code is indi-cated only for data collec-tion, list out-put and KRDS.

Image processing board (IPB)Program of overall control board (OACB)

E46-31 Before completion of MPC, APC initial sampling was attempted.


Image processing board (IPB)ICP program

E46-32 Execution of MPC was attempted during execution of APC.

E46-35 Continuous page imaging range abnormality.Image cannot be evolved on memory due to abnormal image range on memory.

E46-36 When starting APC, PVV was ON (APC was executed during print)

E46-40 Hard disk initialization abnor-mality.Hard disk failure or improper connector connection.

Image processing board (IPB)Hard disk (HDD-7)HDD I/F board (HDD IFB)

E46-41 JOB information could not be stored in the hard disk.

E46-42 At the time of automatic hard disk job deletion, route could not be opened.

E46-43 Hard disk access error.Hard disk failure or improper connector connection.





5-29

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo


E46-58 Software failure.CCD board was replaced but I1ROM version is not compli-ant.


Image processing board (IPB)ICP programCCP wiring harness of A/D conversion board (ADB)

E46-59 A/D conversion board (ADB) bunch or connector is dam-aged.

F46-62 Before completion of paper mis-centering correction, scan-ning was started (mis-center-ing correction cannot be completed).

Abnormality detection process is conducted but no code is indicated on the opera-tion board and main body contin-ues opera-tion.Abnormality code is indi-cated only for data collec-tion, list out-put and KRDS.

Printer control board (PRCB)Image processing board (IPB)LCT drive board (LTDB)

F46-63 Since the quantity of light of exposure lamp (L1) decreased, AGC was retried, though no error occurred.

Exposure lamp (L1)Overall control board (OACB)CCD board (CCDB)

F46-64 PWM gammer curve was not properly prepared.

Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)Toner density sensor /M (TDS M)Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)Toner density sensor /K (TDS K)Printer control board (PRCB)Image processing board (IPB)

E46-66 Shift failure at repeat. Image processing board (IPB)Overall control board (OACB)

E46-80 Message cue was not enough or destructed.


Image processing board (IPB)Program of overall control board (OACB)E46-81 Parameter value exceeds

allowable range.

E46-82 Message cue sender task has an undefined ID.

E46-83 Message receiving event is undefined.

E46-90 Abnormal access to memory Image processing board (IPB)Overall control board (OACB)Expansion memory

E46-91 Header address scanning abnormality

E46-98 Page memory cannot be secured for printing.

E46-99 Memory initialization abnor-mality.Memory may not be correctly connected.





5-30

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dy


E50-01 12VDC abnormality.Abnormality signal was contin-uously detected for the speci-fied time.


DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)

E50-02 24VDC abnormality.Abnormality signal was contin-uously detected for the speci-fied time after the specified time from REN /2 ON.


E50-03 Conveyance drive board (CVDB) 24VDC abnormality.Abnormality signal of 24VDC for CVDB was detected after specified time from REN /2 ON.

DC power unit /2 (DCPS2)Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)

E50-04 Laser correction motor 5VDC abnormality.Abnormal 5VDC for laser cor-rection motor /Y, /M, and /C (M7, M8, and M9) was detected.


E50-05 Conveyance drive board (CVDB) 12VDC abnormality.Abnormality signal of 12VDC for CVDB was detected.

DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)

E50-10 Line status error and check sum error was detected between the overall control board (OACB) and image pro-cessing board (IPB) and demand for re-transmission was sent but recovery could not be attained.Re-transmission was demanded and answered but recovery could not be attained.Space is not obtained in the transmission ring buffer within the specified time.

Overall control board (OACB)Image processing board (IPB)

E50-11 Communication with the coin vendor cannot be performed.

Printer control board (PRCB)Coin vendor





5-31

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dyFan abnor-mality

F52-01 When the DCPS cooling fan (M42) was ON, M42 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.


Printer control board (PRCB)DCPS cooling fan (M42)

F52-02 When the IP cooling fan (M24) was ON, M24 abnormality detection signal was continu-ously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)IP cooling fan (M24)

F52-03 When the IPB cooling fan (M25) was ON, M25 abnormal-ity detection signal was contin-uously detected for the specified time.

Printer control board (PRCB)IPB cooling fan (M25)

Opera-tion board abnor-mality

E56-02 After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, communication between the printer control board (PRCB), overall control board (OACB), and operation board /1 (OB1) is not started.

Printer control board (PRCB)Overall control board (OACB)Operation board /1 (OB1)

E56-11 When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten con-trol program 01 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected.

Operation board /1 (OB1)





AF

R-2

0 AFR-20 abnor-mality

E60-01 Communication error. RADF control board (DFCB)Printer control board (PRCB)

F61-01 Registration sensor (PS301) error.

RADF control board (DFCB)Registration sensor (PS301)

F61-02 Timing sensor (PS302) error. RADF control board (DFCB)Timing sensor (PS302)

F61-03 Reverse sensor (PS305) error. RADF control board (DFCB)Reverse sensor (PS305)

F61-04 Paper exit sensor (PS306) error.

RADF control board (DFCB)Paper exit sensor (PS306)





5-32

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

AF

R-2

0 AFR-20 abnor-mality

F61-05 Size VR (VR301) error. Main body stops imme-diately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.

RADF control board (DFCB)Size VR (VR301)

F61-06 Non-volatile memory error. RADF control board (DFCB)

F61-07 When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten control pro-gram of RADF control board (DFCB) was detected.

F61-08 Paper feed motor (M301) error. RADF control board (DFCB)Paper feed motor (M301)

F61-09 Conveyance motor (M302) error.

RADF control board (DFCB)Conveyance motor (M302)

F61-10 Reverse paper exit motor (M303) error.

RADF control board (DFCB)Reverse paper exit motor (M303)

FN

-120

, FN

-9 FN-120 and FN-9 abnor-mality

E70-01 Communication error. Main body and FNS stop opera-tion immedi-ately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Printer control board (PRCB)

F77-01 Shift unit does not reach the shifting position or home posi-tion within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Shift motor (M702)Shift HP sensor (PS718)

F77-02 After the tray up/down motor (M703) was turned ON, tray upper limit sensor (PS702) is not turned ON within the speci-fied time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Tray up/down motor (M703)Tray upper limit sensor (PS702)

F77-03 After the alignment motor /U (M705) was turned ON, the alignment HP sensor /U (PS708) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Alignment motor /U (M705)Alignment HP sensor /U (PS708)

F77-04 After the paper exit roller motor (M707) was turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Paper exit roller motor (M707)

F77-05 After the paper exit motor (M708) is turned ON, paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Paper exit opening motor (M708)Paper exit opening sensor (PS712)

F77-06 After the stapler moving motor (M711) is turned ON, stapler moving HP sensor (PS711) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Stapler movement motor (M711)Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711)





5-33

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

FN

-120

, FN

-9 FN-120 and FN-9 abnor-mality

F77-07 After the clincher rotating motor (M704) is turned ON, clincher rotating HP sensor (PS714) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.

Main body and FNS stop opera-tion immedi-ately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Clincher rotation motor (M704)Clincher rotation HP sensor (PS714)

F77-08 After the stapler rotating motor (M706) is turned ON, stapler rotating HP sensor (PS713) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Stapler rotation motor (M706)Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713)

F77-11 After the stapler motor /F (M714) is turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Stapler motor /F (M714)Stapler HP sensor /F (PS731)

F77-12 After the stapler motor /R (M709) is turned ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Stapler motor /R (M709)Stapler HP sensor /R (PS730)

F77-13 After the clincher motor /F (M715) is turned ON, clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Clincher motor /F (M715)Clincher HP sensor /F (PS733)

F77-14 After clincher motor /R (M710) is turned ON, clincher HP sen-sor /R (PS732) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Clincher motor /R (M710Clincher HP sensor /R (PS732)

F77-21 After the stopper motor (M718) is turned ON, stopper HP sen-sor (PS723) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Stopper motor (M718)Stopper HP sensor (PS723)

F77-22 After the alignment motor /L (M716) is turned ON, align-ment HP sensor /L (PS724) is not turned ON within the speci-fied time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Alignment motor /L (M716)Alignment HP sensor /L (PS724)

F77-25 After the folding knife motor (M719) is turned ON, folding knife HP sensor (PS722) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Folding knife motor (M719)Folding knife HP sensor (PS722)





5-34

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

FN

-120

, FN

-9 abnor-mality

F77-26 After the folding conveyance motor (M720) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the speci-fied time.


FNS control board (FNSCB)Folding conveyance motor (M720)

TM

G-3 abnor-

malityF77-31 After the conveyance motor

(M101) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Conveyance motor (M101)

F77-32 After the cutter motor (M102) is turned ON, cutter HP sensor (PS106) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Cutter motor (M102)Cutter HP sensor (PS106)

F77-33 After the stopper motor (M103) is turned ON, stopper HP sen-sor (PS103) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Stopper motor (M103)Stopper HP sensor (PS103)

F77-34 After the stopper release motor (M104) is turned ON, stopper release HP sensor (PS104) is not turned ON within the speci-fied time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Stopper release motor (M104)Stopper release HP sensor (PS104)

F77-35 After the press motor (M105) is turned ON, press HP sensor (PS105) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Press motor (M105)Press HP sensor (PS105)

F77-36 After the pressure motor (M107) is turned ON, pressure HP sensor (PS112) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Pusher motor (M107)Pusher HP sensor (PS112)

F77-37 After the holder motor (M106) is turned ON, upper limit PS sensor (PS110) is not turned ON.

FNS control board (FNSCB)TU drive board (TUDB)Holder motor (M106)Upper limit PS sensor (PS110)

Cov

er In

sert

er D abnor-

malityF77-41 After the tray up/down motor /L

(M202) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /L (PS209) or tray lower limit sensor /L (PS210) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)PI drive board (PIDB)Tray up/down motor /L (M202)Tray upper limit sensor /L (PS209)Tray lower limit sensor /L (PS210)





5-35

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Cov

er In

sert

er D abnor-

malityF77-42 After the tray up/down motor /U

(M201) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /U (PS204) or tray lower limit sensor /U (PS205) is not turned ON within the specified time.


FNS control board (FNSCB)PI drive board (PIDB)Tray up/down motor /U (M201)Tray upper limit sensor /U (PS204)Tray lower limit sensor /U (PS205)

F77-43 After the PI conveyance motor (M203) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)PI drive board (PIDB)PI Conveyance motor (M203)

PK

-5 PK-5 abnor-mality

F77-44 After the punch shift motor (M802) is turned ON, punch shift HP sensor (PS803) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Punch drive board (PKDB)Punch shift motor (M802)Punch shift HP sensor (PS803)

F77-47 Communication abnormality between FNS control board (FNSCB) and punch drive board (PKDB)

FNS control board (FNSCB)Punch drive board (PKDB)

F77-54 After punch motor (M801) is turned ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Punch drive board (PKDB)Punch motor (M801)Punch HP sensor (PS801)

FN

-120

, FN

-9 FN-120, FN-9 abnor-mality

F77-81 After the gate drive motor (M712) is turned ON, gate HP sensor (PS716) is not turned ON within the specified time.

FNS control board (FNSCB)Gate drive motor (M712)Gate HP sensor (PS716)

F77-91 Communication abnormality when sub-CPU in FNS control board (FNSCB) receives data

FNS control board (FNSCB)Printer control board (PRCB)

F77-92 Communication abnormality when the main CPU in FNS control board (FNSCB) receives data.

F77-98 When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten con-trol program of FNS control Board (FNSCB) was detected.

F77-99 Abnormality other than those known to control program of FNS control board (FNSCB) was detected.





5-36

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Mai

n bo

dy


E80-01 When the main switch (SW2) is ON, no response is received from the printer control board (PRCB) within the specified time.


Printer control board (PRCB)

E80-02 Printer control board (PRCB) communication abnormality

E80-03 Operation board communica-tion abnormality


ISWabnor-mality

E80-11 When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten range of ISW was detected in the printer control program.

Printer control program

E80-21 When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten range of ISW was detected in the GIF control program.

VIF control program

E80-30 In the data transfer by ISW, regular header information cannot be received within the specified time.

Printer cableUSB cablePC parallel portPC USB port

E80-31 In the data transfer by ISW, check sum error or header error was detected in the downloaded data.

Printer cableUSB cableProgram file abnormality

E80-32 When transferring data by ISW, data cannot be correctly writ-ten to flash ROM.

Printer cableUSB cableProgram transferred board

E80-40 Engine continued operation without preparing image or process patch for the specified time.

Printer control program




CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION

5-37

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

3. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION

In the event of following abnormalities, the failed unit can be isolated so that other functions may be tempo-

rarily operated.

If any abnormality code is issued, press the Auto Reset key and turn OFF and ON the SW2 (auxiliary

power switch). The unit subjected to abnormality is isolated in the software system and other functions can

be operated. If SW2 is turned OFF or ON without correcting the faulty unit, the abnormality is detected and

the abnormality code is indicated again (a function effective only one time).

Error code Error Unit to be cut off Remarks

18-01 Error in paper feed tray /1 up Paper feed tray /1 Tray can not be selected.



18-05 Error in LT tray up LT tray Tray can not be selected.

13-02 LT paper feed motor abnormality

46-40 to 43 HDD abnormality HDD HDD can not be used.

77-22, 25, 26 Folding drive abnormality Folding machine Folding mode, stitch-and-

fold mode, and cutting

mode can not be selected.

77-31, 37 Cutting drive abnormality TMG-3

77-41, 42, 43 CF tray drive abnormality Cover Inserter D Cover sheet mode can not

be selected.

77-44, 47, 55 Punch rocking motor abnormality PK-5 Punch mode can not be

selected.

ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

5-38

V

CO

DE

LIS

T

Blank page

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING

6-1

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

VI DIAGRAMS

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING1.1 CF5001 parts layout drawing

A. Switches and sensors

(1) Rear of the main body

[1] Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS60) [7] Encoder sensor /C2 (PS65)

[2] Encoder sensor /M1 (PS62) [8] Encoder sensor /K2 (PS67)

[3] Encoder sensor /C1 (PS64) [9] Waste toner full sensor (PS52)

[4] Encoder sensor /K1 (PS66) [10] Waste toner door sensor (PS53)

[5] Encoder sensor /Y2 (PS61) [11] Encoder sensor/belt 2 (PS68)

[6] Encoder sensor /M2 (PS63) [12] Encoder sensor/belt 1 (PS69)

8050fs6600

[10] [9] [8] [7] [6] [5]

[11] [12]

[4] [3] [2] [1]

PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

6-2

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(2) Top of the main body

(3) Front of the main body

[1] DF reset switch (RS1) [4] APS sensor /S (PS3)

[2] Toner supply unit open/close sensor (PS14) [5] Scanner HP sensor (PS1)

[3] APS sensor /L (PS4) [6] AAPS timing sensor (PS2)

[1] Front door open/close sensor (PS18) [3] Main switch (SW2)

[2] Front door interlock switch (MS1) [4] Reset switch (SW1)

[2][3]

[6][5]

[4]

[1]

8050fs6601

[2] [1]

[3] [4]

8050fs6602


6-3

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(4) Right side of the main body

(5) Front side of the main body

[1] Temp/humidity sensor (TEMP/HUM)

[1] 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)

8050fs6603[1]

8050fs6604[1]


6-4

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(6) Write unit

* Laser correction HP sensor does not attached to write unit /K.

(7) Process unit

[1] Index sensor board /Y (INDX SB Y) [5] Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)*

[2] Index sensor board /M (INDX SB M) [6] Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)*

[3] Index sensor board /C (INDX SB C) [7] Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)*

[4] Index sensor board /K (INDX SB K)

[1] Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) [3] Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)

[2] Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) [4] Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)

8050fs6605[1][2][3][4]

[7][6][5]

8050fs6606[1][2][3][4]


6-5

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(8) Developing unit

(9) Image correction unit

[1] Toner density sensor /K (TDS K) [3] Toner density sensor /M (TDS M)

[2] Toner density sensor /C (TDS C) [4] Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)

[1] Gamma sensor (PS11) [3] Color registration sensor /R (PS9)

[2] Color registration sensor /F (PS8)

[1][2][3][4] 8050fs6607

8050fs6608[1]

[2] [3]


6-6

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(10) Toner supply unit

(11) Paper feed tray 1 to 3

[1] Toner level detection sensor /K (TLD K) [4] Toner supply door open/close sensor (PS54)

[2] Toner level detection sensor /C (TLD C) [5] Toner level detection sensor /M (TLD M)

[3] Toner supply interlock switch (MS2) [6] Toner level detection sensor /Y (TLD Y)

[1] Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) [10] Paper size VR/1 (VR1)



[4] No paper sensor /1 (PS31) [13] Paper size /S1 (PS33)



[7] Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) [16] Paper size /L1 (PS34)



[2][3] [1]

[4] [6][5]

8050fs6609

8050fs6630[18]

[9] [8] [7]

[3] [2] [1]

[4] [5] [6]

[17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]


6-7

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(12) By-pass feed unit

(13) Vertical conveyance unit

[1] Paper size /LBP (PS49) [3] Paper size VR/BP (VR4)

[2] No paper sensor /BP (PS47) [4] Paper size /SBP (PS48)

[1] Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51) [2] Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50)

8050fs6610[4] [3] [2] [1]

8050fs6631

[1][2]


6-8

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(14) ADU

(15) Paper exit section (left side of the main body)

[1] Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) [7] ADU conveyance sensor (PS20)

[2] Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) [8] ADU reverse sensor (PS21)

[3] ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) [9] Registration sensor (PS22)

[4] 2nd transfer HP sensor (PS24) [10] By-pass conveyance sensor (PS26)

[5] Conveyance lever sensor (PS55) [11] Tray upper limit sensor (PS25)

[6] Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)

[1] Paper exit sensor (PS13) [2] Paper exit full sensor (PS12)

8050fs6611

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]

[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

8050fs6612

[1][2]


6-9

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(16) Fixing unit

[1] Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) [5] Thermostat /2 (TS2)

[2] Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) [6] Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2)

[3] Thermostat /1 (TS1) [7] Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17)

[4] Fixing pressure/release sensor (PS16) [8] Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[3]

[2]

[1]

8050fs6632


6-10

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

B. Loads


[1] 1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19) [13] DCPS cooling fan (M42)

[2] Drum motor /Y (M14) [14] Developing motor /K (M23)

[3] Drum motor /M (M15) [15] Developing motor /C (M22)

[4] Drum motor /C (M16) [16] Developing motor /M (M21)

[5] Drum motor /K (M17) [17] Scanner motor (M1)

[6] Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10) [18] Developing motor /Y (M20)

[7] IP cooling fan (M24) [19] Drum cooling fan /2 (M13)

[8] IPB cooling fan (M25) [20] Drum cooling fan /1 (M12)

[9] Tray up drive motor /1 (M40) [21] Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)

[10] Tray up drive motor /2 (M39) [22] Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37)

[11] Tray up drive motor /3 (M38) [23] Transfer belt motor (M18)

[12] Paper feed motor (M41)

8050fs6613

[12]

[11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [6]

[2][3][4][5] [1]

[13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23]


6-11

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S



[1] Scanner cooling fan (M2) [2] Exposure lamp (L1)

[1] Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)

[2]

[1]

8050fs6614

8050fs6615[1]


6-12

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(4) Right side of the main body

(5) Left side of the main body

[1] Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46) [5] Writing intake fan /1 (M43)

[2] Heater /1 (HTR1) [6] Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45)

[3] Heater /2 (HTR2) [7] Drum unit fan (M47)

[4] Writing intake fan /2 (M44)

[1] Paper exit fan /F (M28) [3] Paper exit fan /R (M26)

[2] Paper exit fan /M (M27)

8050fs6616

[4] [5] [6] [7]

[3] [2] [1]

8050fs6617[3] [2] [1]


6-13

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(6) Write unit

* Laser correction motor does not attached to write unit /K.

(7) Process unit

[1] Polygon motor /Y (M3) [5] Laser correction motor /Y (M7)*

[2] Polygon motor /M (M4) [6] Laser correction motor /M (M8)*

[3] Polygon motor /C (M5) [7] Laser correction motor /C (M9)*

[4] Polygon motor /K (M6)

[1] Pre-charging lamp /Y (PCL Y) [4] Pre-charging lamp /K (PCL K)

[2] Pre-charging lamp /M (PCL M) [5] Belt separation claw solenoid (SD1)

[3] Pre-charging lamp /C (PCL C)

8050fs6618[4] [3] [2] [1][7] [6] [5]

[1][2][3][4][5]

8050fs6619


6-14

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(8) Image correction unit

(9) Toner supply unit

[1] Gamma shutter solenoid (SD3) [2] Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2)

[1] Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15) [6] Toner supply motor /C (M51)

[2] Toner bottle motor (M53) [7] Toner supply motor /M (M50)

[3] Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16) [8] Charger intake fan (M48)

[4] Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17) [9] Toner supply motor /Y (M49)

[5] Toner supply motor /K (M52) [10] Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)

8050fs6620[1][2]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[4][5][6][7][8]

[9] [10]

8050fs6621


6-15

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(10) Paper feed tray 1 to 3

(11) Vertical conveyance unit

[1] Pick up solenoid /1 (SD7) [6] Paper feed clutch /3 (MC11)

[2] Pick up solenoid /2 (SD8) [7] Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8)

[3] Pick up solenoid /3 (SD9) [8] Pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10)

[4] Paper feed clutch /1 (MC7) [9] Pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12)

[5] Paper feed clutch /2 (MC9)

[1] Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13)

8050fs6633

[6] [5] [4][3] [2] [1]

[7] [8] [9]

8050fs6634[1]


6-16

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(12) ADU

[1] Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) [9] ADU reverse motor (M32)

[2] Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) [10] 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (M34)

[3] ADU lock solenoid (SD6) [11] Registration motor (M30)

[4] ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) [12] Loop roller motor (M31)

[5] ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) [13] Pick up solenoid /BP (SD5)

[6] Reverse/exit motor (M33) [14] Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6)

[7] ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) [15] Tray up drive motor /BP (M35)

[8] Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)

8050fs6622

[9]

[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

[10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]


6-17

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(13) Fixing unit

[1] Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) [4] Fixing motor (M29)

[2] Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) [5] Fixing lower lamp (L4)

[3] Web motor (M54)

[4]

[5]

[2]

[1]

[3]

8050fs6635


6-18

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

C. PCBs and others


[1] AC drive board (ACDB) [13] HDD: option (HDD-7)

[2] Noise filter (NF) [14] HDD I/F board: option (HDD IFB)

[3] Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2) [15] Extended memory: option

[4] Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) [16] Memory board (MB)

[5] Transformer /LCT (TRNS2) [17] High voltage unit /1 (HV1)

[6] Transformer /main body (TRNS1) [18] Overall control board (OACB)

[7] DC power supply unit /2 (DCPS2) [19] Image processing board (IPB)

[8] DC power supply unit /1 (DCPS1) [20] Scanner drive board (SCDB)

[9] Drum drive board /Y (DRDB Y) [21] DC power supply unit /4:Option (DCPS4)

[10] Drum drive board /M (DRDB M) [22] High voltage unit /2 (HV2)

[11] Drum drive board /C (DRDB C) [23] Printer control board (PRCB)

[12] Drum drive board /K (DRDB K) [24] Fixing heater control board : only in EU (FHCB)

8050fs6623

[17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23]

[24]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[16] [15] [14] [13]

[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]


6-19

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S



[1] CCD board (CCDB) [3] L1 inverter board (L1 INVB)

[2] Key counter (C (K))

[1] Black counter (C (BK)) [5] OB inverter board (OB INVB)

[2] Total counter (C (T)) [6] LCD board (LCDB)

[3] Operation board /2 (OB2) [7] Touch panel board

[4] Operation board /3 (OB3) [8] Operation board /1 (OB1)

[1]

[2][3]

8050fs6624

8050fs6625

[3]

[2] [1]

[4] [5] [6] [7] [8]


6-20

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(4) Write unit

(5) Process unit

[1] Temp detection board (TDB)

(attached to write unit /K only)

[3] Laser drive board /M (LDB M)

[4] Laser drive board /C (LDB C)

[2] Laser drive board /Y (LDB Y) [5] Laser drive board /K (LDB K)

[1] Drum potential sensor board /K (DRSPSB K) [3] Drum potential sensor board /M (DRSPSB M)

[2] Drum potential sensor board /C (DRSPSB C) [4] Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRSPSB Y)

8050fs6626

[2] [3] [4] [5]

[1]

[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6627


6-21

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

(6) Toner supply section

(7) ADU

[1] Toner supply drive board (TSDB)

[1] Conveyance drive board (CVDB)

[1] 8050fs6628

8050fs6629[1]


6-22

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

1.2 AFR-20 parts layout drawing

[1] Paper feed motor (M301) [11] Paper exit cover sensor (PS307)

[2] Conveyance motor (M302) [12] Tray open/close sensor (PS308)

[3] Reverse/exit motor (M303) [13] Size sensor /S (PS309)

[4] Registration clutch (MC301) [14] Size sensor /L (PS310)

[5] Registration sensor (PS301) [15] Paper exit solenoid (SD301)

[6] Timing sensor (PS302) [16] Reverse solenoid (SD302)

[7] Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) [17] Size VR (VR301)

[8] No paper sensor (PS304) [18] RADF control board (DFCB)

[9] Reverse sensor (PS305) [19] Size sensor board (SSB)

[10] Paper exit sensor (PS306)

8050fs6031

[5][6]

[8]

[7]

[15]

[16]

[14][13]

[1]

[2] [9]

[18] [3] [11] [10]

[12][4][17]


6-23

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

1.3 C-208 parts layout drawing

[1] Front door interlock switch (MS101) [9] Remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105)

[2] Paper mis-centering sensor (PS120) [10] Remaining paper sensor /3 (PS104)

[3] No paper sensor (PS108) [11] Remaining paper sensor /2 (PS103)

[4] Paper feed sensor (PS107) [12] Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS102)

[5] Feed sensor (PS106) [13] Top cover interlock switch (MS102)

[6] Upper limit sensor (PS109) [14] Top cover open/close sensor (PS100)

[7] Pre-registration clutch (MC102) [15] Paper feed clutch (MC101)

[8] Lower limit sensor (PS101) [16] LT drive board (LTDB)

[7][16]

SD100[15]

[2]

[4]

M101 8050fs6700

FRONT

[8] [6] [5]M100

[1]SW100[13] [14]

[3]

[9]

[10][11][12]


6-24

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

1.4 FN-120/FN-9 parts layout drawing

[1] Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) [15] Stopper HP sensor (PS723) (FN-9 only)

[2] Paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712) [16] Stacker inlet sensor (PS705)

[3] Gate HP sensor (PS716) [17] Stacker no paper sensor (PS720)

[4] FNS inlet sensor (PS704) [18] Stacker auxiliary solenoid (SD702)

[5] Stapler movement motor (M711) [19] Stack auxiliary motor (M722)

[6] FNS interlock switch (MS701) [20] Alignment HP sensor/U (PS708)

[7] Clincher rotation motor (M704) [21] Paper exit belt HP sensor (PS709)

[8] Alignment HP sensor/L (PS724) (FN-9 only) [22] Stacker inlet motor (M713)

[9] Alignment motor/L (M716) (FN-9 only) [23] Shift HP sensor (PS718)

[10] Folding knife HP sensor (PS722) (FN-9 only) [24] Shift motor (M702)

[11] Folding knife motor (M719) (FN-9 only) [25] Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706)

[12] Stopper motor (M718) (FN-9 only) [26] Sub-tray full sensor (PS719)

[13] Clincher rotation HP sensor(PS714) [27] Paper exit opening solenoid (SD704)

[14] Folding passage sensor (PS726) (FN-9 only)

[3]

[2]

[1]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[14]

[15]

[16]

[17]

[18]

[19]

[20]

[21]

[22]

[23]

[24]

[25][26] [27]

[13]

[12]

[8]

8050fs6701

FRONT


6-25

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

[1] Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor

(PS707)

[8] Relay board (RB)

[2] Tray upper limit sensor (PS702) [9] FNS control board (FNSCB)

[3] Counter rest sensor (PS715) [10] Gate drive motor (M712)

[4] By-pass gate solenoid (SD705) [11] FNS conveyance motor (M701)

[5] Tray lower limit sensor (PS703) [12] Paper exit opening motor (M708)

[6] Tray up/down motor (M703) [13] Sub-tray paper exit motor (M721)

[7] Folding conveyance motor (M720)

(FN-9 only)

[14] Paper exit opening roller motor (M707)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

8050fs6702

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12] [13]

[14]


6-26

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

[1] Folding paper exit sensor (PS725)

(FN-9 only)

[5] Three-folding gate solenoid (SD706)

(FN-9 only)

[2] Folding full LED (LED729) (FN-9 only) [6] Stapler rotation motor (M706)

[3] Folding full sensor (PS729) (FN-9 only) [7] Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711)

[4] Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713) [8] Alignment motor/U (M705)

[8]

[7]

[6]

[5]

[4] [3] [2] [1] 8050fs6703


6-27

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

[1] Clincher motor/R (M710)

Clincher motor/F (M715)

[4] Stapler HP sensor/R (PS730)

Stapler HP sensor/F (PS731)

[2] Clincher HP sensor/R (PS732)

Clincher HP sensor/F (PS733)

[5] Cartridge switch/R (SW701)

Cartridge switch/F (SW703)

[3] Stapler motor/R (M709)

Stapler motor/F (M714)

[6] Stapler switch/R (SW702)

Stapler switch/F (SW704)

[1]

[3][4]

[5]

[6]

[2] 8050fs6704


6-28

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

1.5 TMG-3 parts layout drawing

[1] Upper limit sensor (PS110) [7] Relay 2 (RL28)

[2] DC power unit (DCPS) [8] Coil (COL)

[3] Lower limit sensor (PS111) [9] Scrap box detection sensor (PS107)

[4] Holder motor (M106) [10] Conveyance motor (M101)

[5] Circuit breaker (CBR) [11] TU drive board (TUDB)

[6] Relay 1 (RL1)

[4]

[5][6][7]

[8][9]

[10]

[11]

[3]

[2]

[1]

8050fs6705


6-29

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

[1] Scrap removal fan motor (M108) [9] Front door MS2 (MS2)

[2] Scrap full LED (LED101) [10] Paper exit sensor (PS108)

[3] Scrap full sensor (PS109) [11] Stacker S3 (MS3)

[4] Entrance sensor (PS101) [12] Stacker door sensor (PS114)

[5] Trimmer motor (M102) [13] Stacker MS4 (MS4)

[6] Trimmer HP sensor (PS106) [14] Stacker full sensor (PS113)

[7] Press HP sensor (PS105) [15] Pusher HP sensor(PS112)

[8] Press motor (M105) [16] Pusher motor (M107)

[1] Stopper movement motor(M103) [4] Stopper release motor (M104)

[2] Conveyance sensor (PS102) [5] Stopper HP sensor (PS103)

[3] Stopper release HP sensor (PS104)

[4]

[5][6][7]

[8][9]

[10][11]

[3][2]

[1]

[16][15][14][13]

[12]

8050fs6706

[1]

[5]

[4]

[2]

[3]8050fs6707

CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

6-30

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1 Main Body connector layout drawing

A. Printer control board

8050fs6033

391 (GY : 18 pin)360 (W : 40 pin)357 (W : 9 pin)650 (W : 20 pin)

340 (W : 28 pin)

572 (W : 4 pin)

620 (BN : 7 pin)

700 (W : 26 pin)

309 (W : 36 pin)

353 (BN : 12 pin)

1 (N.C.)

150 (GY : 24 pin)442 (W : 34 pin)

36 (N.C.)

301 (W : 4 pin)

730 (W : 32 pin)151 (GY : 8 pin)

4 (N.C.)

573 (W : 3 pin)

651 (W : 20 pin) 384 (W : 30 pin)

574 (W : 3 pin)

376 (W : 28 pin)

564 (W : 2 pin)

393 (W : 24 pin)

459 (W : 10 pin)

736 (W : 24 pin)

37 (N.C.)

464 (BN : 19 pin)

467 (BN : 6 pin)

600 (BN : 20 pin)

300 (BN : 18 pin)

303 (W : 2 pin)

302 (W : 6 pin)

400 (BN : 32 pin)

414 (B : 32 pin)

2 (N.C.)

500 (BN : 34 pin)

428 (BN : 30 pin)

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

6-31

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

B. AC drive board

C. CCD drive board

D. Conveyance drive board

8050fs6034

121 (W : 8 pin)

120 (W : 5 pin)

157 (W : 4 pin)155 (W : 5 pin)

153 (W : 4 pin)

156 (W : 5 pin)152 (W : 11 pin)

8050fs6035511 (W : 50 pin)

8050fs6036

507 (W : 6 pin)

503 (W : 34 pin) 510 (W : 11 pin)1 (N.C.)527 (W : 15 pin)

536 (W : 6 pin)

518 (W : 15 pin) 569 (B : 4 pin) 513 (W : 6 pin)

3 (N.C.) 539 (W : 22 pin)5 (N.C.)534 (W : 12 pin)

548 (W : 6 pin)

524 (W : 7 pin)


6-32

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

E. DC power unit/1

F. DC power unit/2

G. DC power unit/3

8050fs6037

104 (W : 10 pin)

105 (W : 6 pin)

103 (W : 6 pin)

108 (W : 4 pin)

106 (W : 8 pin)

107 (W : 7 pin)

102 (W : 4 pin)

101 (W : 3 pin)

8050fs6038

115 (W : 8 pin)

111 (W : 12 pin)

112 (W : 6 pin)

113 (W : 4 pin)

114 (W : 9 pin)

110 (W : 4 pin)

8050fs6100

109 (W : 6 pin)


6-33

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

H. Drum drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K

I. Fixing heater control board

J. High voltage unit/1

8050fs6039

312,319,326,333 (W : 2 pin)

311,318,325,332 (W : 9 pin)

316,323,330,337 (W : 3 pin)

313,320,327,334 (W : 6 pin)

8050fs6040

158 (W : 4 pin)

8050fs6041

734 (W : 8 pin)

733 (W : 8 pin)

735 (W : 3 pin)

732 (W : 8 pin)

731 (W : 8 pin)


6-34

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

K. High voltage unit/2

L. Image processing board

8050fs6042

738 (W : 10 pin)

740 (N.C.)

737 (W : 12 pin)

739 (W : 3 pin)

8050fs6043

254 (BK : 120 pin)

253 (BK : 100 pin)

270 (BK : 60 pin)

8 (N.C.)9 (N.C.)

271 (W : 6 pin)

260 (W : 68 pin)

220 (W : 120 pin)272 (W : 34 pin)

280 (B : 34 pin)


6-35

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

M. Index sensor/Y,/M,/C,/K

N. L1 inverter board

O. Laser drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K

P. Memory board

8050fs6044

274,278,282,286 (GY : 5 pin)

8050fs6045?? (W : 4 pin)

606 (W : 3 pin)

8050fs6046

275,279,283,287 (W : 12 pin)

8050fs6047

142 (W : 20 pin)

141 (W : 40 pin)


6-36

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

Q. Overall control board

R. OB inverter board

8050fs6048

255 (BK : 8 pin)

259 (BK : 4 pin)

256 (BK : 36 pin)

257 (BK : 9 pin)

9 (N.C.)

14 (N.C.)

251 (W : 16 pin) 252 (W : 4 pin)

8 (N.C.)5 (N.C.)

250 (W : 18 pin) 217 (BN : 50 pin) 258 (N.C.)

254 (W : 120 pin)

253 (W : 100 pin)

270 (W : 60 pin)

13 (N.C.)

11 (N.C.)

10 (N.C.)

12 (N.C.)

6 (N.C.) 7 (N.C.)

8050fs6049

165 (W : 3 pin)166 (W : 4 pin)


6-37

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

S. Operation board/1

T. Operation board/2

U. Operation board/3

8050fs6050

176 (W : 6 pin) 173 (W : 6 pin) 172 (W : 12 pin)

175 (W : 4 pin)

174 (W : 14 pin)

8050fs6051

162 (W : 3 pin)

8050fs6101

158 (W : 3 pin)


6-38

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

V. Scanner drive board

W. Temperature detection board

X. Toner supply drive board

Y. Gamma sensor

8050fs6052

601 (W : 20 pin)

605 (W : 3 pin)602 (W : 4 pin)

609 (W : 14 pin) 1 (N.C.)607 (W : 3 pin)

603 (W : 3 pin)

8050fs6053

670 (W : 3 pin)

8050fs6054

711 (W : 8 pin)

708 (W : 11 pin)

702 (W : 26 pin)

705 (W : 7 pin)

706 (W : 6 pin)

704 (W : 6 pin) 724 (W : 18 pin)

726 (W : 12 pin)

8050fs6055

558 (W : 5 pin)


6-39

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

2.2 AFR-20 connector layout drawing

A. DF drive board

2.3 C-208 connector layout drawing

8050fs6102

13 (W : 15 pin)14 (W : 9 pin)

5 (W : 5 pin)

1 (N.C.)

8 (N.C.)

3 (W : 7 pin)

2 (W : 6 pin)

4 (W : 6 pin)

6 (W : 2 pin)10 (W : 8 pin)7 (W : 9 pin)

12 (W : 5 pin)

8050fs6103

802 (W : 10 pin)

3 (N.C.)

807 (W : 14 pin)

5 (N.C.)

4 (N.C.)

808 (W : 2 pin)

803 (W : 6 pin)

805 (W : 11 pin)

800 (W : 6 pin)

801 (W : 11 pin)

806 (W : 15 pin) 1 (N.C.)2 (N.C.)

804 (W : 12 pin)


6-40

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

2.4 FN-120/FN-9 connector layout drawing

A. FNS control board

B. Relay board

8050fs6104

33 (W : 38 pin)

8 (W : 8 pin)

52 (W : 6 pin)

61 (W : 2 pin) 51 (W : 32 pin)

62 (W : 40 pin)

4 (W : 40 pin)

5 (W : 22 pin)

9 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only

3 (W : 11 pin)2 (W : 5 pin)

43 (W : 8 pin) FS-215 only

42 (W : 5 pin) FS-215 only

41 (GY : 30 pin) FS-215 only

12 (W : 24 pin)

1 (W : 18 pin)

10 (W : 4 pin)11 (W : 9 pin)

7 (W: 6 pin)

6 (W : 5 pin)

8050fs6105

5 (W : 30 pin)6 (W : 30 pin)

2 (W : 22 pin) 3 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only

8 (W : 34 pin)

7 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only

9 (W : 2 pin) FS-215 only

4 (W : 24 pin) FS-215 only

10 (W : 8 pin)

1 (W : 40 pin)


6-41

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

2.5 TMG-3 connector layout drawing

8050fs6106

407 (W : 2 pin)

408 (W : 3 pin)

403 (W : 5 pin)

406 (GY : 20 pin)404 (GY : 18 pin)402 (GY : 28 pin)

401 (GY : 40 pin)

409 (W : 4 pin)

405 (W : 4 pin)

TIMING CHART CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

6-42

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

3. TIMING CHART

3.1 Main Body timing chart

A. Full color, life size, ADF single sided original document of 2 sheets, double sided original doc-

ument of 2 copies, paper feed tray /1 paper feed

Chart 1/2

AB

CD

49

69

fs6

32

4a

Pap

er fe

ed m

otor

Pic

k up

sol

enoi

d /1

Pap

er fe

ed c

lutc

h /1

P

re-r

egis

trat

ion

clut

ch /1

Pre

-reg

istr

atio

n se

nsor

/1In

term

edia

te c

onve

yanc

e se

nsor

/1In

term

edia

te c

onve

yanc

e se

nsor

/2R

egis

trat

ion

sens

or

Inte

rmed

iate

con

veya

nce

clut

ch /1

Inte

rmed

iate

con

veya

nce

clut

ch /2

Inte

rmed

iate

con

veya

nce

clut

ch /3

V_T

OP

Loop

rol

ler

mot

or

Reg

iste

r ou

t rol

ler

mot

or

Fix

ing

mot

or

Fix

ing

pape

r ex

it se

nsor

Pap

er e

xit s

enso

rR

ever

se/e

xit s

enso

rA

DU

rev

erse

sen

sor

AD

U c

onve

yanc

eA

DU

pre

-reg

istr

atio

n se

nsor

1st t

rans

fer

pres

sure

/rel

ease

mot

or2n

d tr

ansf

er p

ress

ure/

rele

ase

mot

or

Rev

erse

/exi

t mot

or

AD

U r

ever

se m

otor

Rev

erse

/exi

t sol

enoi

dA

DU

con

veya

nce

clut

ch /1

AD

U c

onve

yanc

e cl

utch

/2A

DU

pre

-reg

istr

atio

n cl

utch

F R

Cod

e

MC

3

Tim

e (s

ec)

Item

MC

1M

C2

SD

4

M32

M33

M34

M19

F RF R

PS

23P

S20

PS

21P

S19

PS

13P

S17

M29

M30

M31

MC

5M

C4

MC

13

PS

22P

S28

PS

27P

S29

MC

8M

C7

SD

7M

41

To c

hart

2/2

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 TIMING CHART

6-43

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

Chart 2/2

4969fs

6324b

AB

CD

Dru

m m

otor

/YD

rum

mot

or /M

Dru

m m

otor

/CD

rum

mot

or /K

Tran

sfer

bel

t mot

or

Cha

rgin

g /Y

Cha

rgin

g /M

Cha

rgin

g /C

Dev

elop

er b

ias

AC

/K1s

t tra

nsfe

r /Y

1st t

rans

fer

/M1s

t tra

nsfe

r /C

1st t

rans

fer

/K

2nd

tran

sfer

Sep

arat

ion

AC

/DC

Tran

sfer

Dru

m s

epar

atio

n cl

aw s

olen

oid

Cha

rgin

g /K

Dev

elop

er b

ias

DC

/YD

evel

oper

bia

s D

C /M

Dev

elop

er b

ias

DC

/CD

evel

oper

bia

s D

C /K

Dev

elop

er b

ias

AC

/YD

evel

oper

bia

s A

C /M

Dev

elop

er b

ias

AC

/C

To c

hart

1/2

M17

M16

M15

M14

M18

SD

1

Cod

eT

ime

(sec

)Ite

m


6-44

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

3.2 AFR-20 timing chart

A. A4, life size, single-sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/3)

4969fs6310

0

No

pape

r se

nsor

PS

304

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Reg

istr

atio

n se

nsor

PS

301

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Reg

istr

atio

n cl

utch

MC

301

OF

FO

NP

aper

feed

mot

orM

301

CW

300

mm

/sC

W 6

7mm

/sS

top

CC

W 3

00m

m/s

CC

W 7

10m

m/s

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Con

veya

nce

mot

orM

302

Sto

pC

CW

138

mm

/sC

CW

300

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/s

Rev

erse

sen

sor

PS

305

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Tim

ing

sens

orP

S30

2

Rev

erse

/exi

t mot

orM

303

CW

710

mm

/sC

W 4

00m

m/s

CW

350

mm

/sC

W 1

50m

m/s

Sto

pC

CW

150

mm

/sC

CW

400

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/sC

CW

900

mm

/s

Pap

er lo

aded

Pap

er e

xit s

enso

rP

S30

6P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

ever

se s

olen

oid

SD

302

OF

FO

NP

aper

exi

t sol

enoi

dS

D30

1O

FF

ON

CW

710

mm

/s

Pap

er lo

aded


6-45

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (2/3)

8050fs6311

No

pape

r se

nsor

PS

304

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

erlo

aded

Reg

istr

atio

n se

nsor

PS

301

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Reg

istr

atio

n cl

utch

MC

301

OF

FO

NP

aper

feed

mot

orM

301

CW

CW

67m

m/s

Sto

pC

CW

300

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/s

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Con

veya

nce

mot

or

M30

2

Sto

pC

CW

138

mm

/sC

CW

300

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/s

Rev

erse

sen

sor

PS

305

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Tim

ing

sens

orP

S30

2

Rev

erse

/exi

t mot

orM

303

CW

710

mm

/sC

W 4

00m

m/s

CW

350

mm

/sC

W 1

50m

m/s

Sto

pC

CW

150

mm

/sC

CW

400

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/sC

CW

900

mm

/s

Pap

er lo

aded

Pap

er e

xit s

enso

rP

S30

6P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

ever

se s

olen

oid

SD

302

OF

FO

NP

aper

exi

t sol

enoi

d S

D30

1O

FF

ON

CW

710

mm

/s


6-46

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (3/3)

4969fs6312

No

pape

r se

nsor

P

S30

4P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

egis

trat

ion

sens

or

PS

301

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Reg

istr

atio

n cl

utch

M

C30

1O

FF

ON

Pap

er fe

ed m

otor

M

301

CW

300

mm

/sC

W 6

7mm

/sS

top

CC

W 3

00m

m/s

CC

W 7

10m

m/s

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Con

veya

nce

mot

or

M30

2

Sto

pC

CW

138

mm

/sC

CW

300

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/s

Rev

erse

sen

sor

PS

305

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Tim

ing

sens

or

PS

302

Rev

erse

/exi

t mot

or

M30

3C

W 7

10m

m/s

CW

400

mm

/sC

W 3

50m

m/s

CW

150

mm

/sS

top

CC

W 1

50m

m/s

CC

W 4

00m

m/s

CC

W 7

10m

m/s

CC

W 9

00m

m/s

Pap

er lo

aded

Pap

er e

xit s

enso

r P

S30

6P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

ever

se s

olen

oid

SD

302

OF

FO

NP

aper

exi

t sol

enoi

d S

D30

1O

FF

ON

CW

710

mm

/s


6-47

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/4)

4969fs6313

0

No

pape

r se

nsor

P

S30

4P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

egis

trat

ion

sens

orP

S30

1P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

egis

trat

ion

clut

ch

MC

301

OF

FO

NP

aper

feed

mot

or

M30

1C

W 3

00m

m/s

CW

67m

m/s

Sto

pC

CW

300

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/s

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Con

veya

nce

mot

or

M30

2

Sto

pC

CW

138

mm

/sC

CW

300

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/s

Rev

erse

sen

sor

PS

305

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Tim

ing

sens

or

PS

302

Rev

erse

/exi

t mot

or

M30

3C

W 7

10m

m/s

CW

400

mm

/sC

W 3

50m

m/s

CW

150

mm

/sS

top

CC

W 1

50m

m/s

CC

W 4

00m

m/s

CC

W 7

10m

m/s

CC

W 9

00m

m/s

Pap

er lo

aded

Pap

er e

xit s

enso

r P

S30

6P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

ever

se s

olen

oid

SD

302

OF

FO

NP

aper

exi

t sol

enoi

d S

D30

1O

FF

ON

CW

710

mm

/s


6-48

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S


4969fs6314

No

pape

r se

nsor

P

S30

4P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edRe

gist

ratio

n se

nsor

P

S30

1P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

egis

trat

ion

clut

chM

C30

1 O

FF

ON

Pap

er fe

ed m

otor

M

301

CW

300

mm

/sC

W 6

7mm

/sS

top

CC

W 3

00m

m/s

CC

W 7

10m

m/s

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Conv

eyan

ce m

otor

M

302

Sto

pC

CW

138

mm

/sC

CW

300

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/s

Rev

erse

sen

sor

PS

305

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Tim

ing

sens

or

PS

302

Rev

erse

/exi

t mot

orM

303

CW

710

mm

/sC

W 4

00m

m/s

CW

350

mm

/sC

W 1

50m

m/s

Sto

pC

CW

150

mm

/sC

CW

400

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/sC

CW

900

mm

/s

Pap

er lo

aded

Pap

er e

xit s

enso

r P

S30

6P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

ever

se s

olen

oid

SD

302

OF

FO

NP

aper

exi

t sol

enoi

dS

D30

1O

FF

ON

CW

710

mm

/s


6-49

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original documents of 3 sheets (3/4)

4969fs6315

No

pape

r se

nsor

P

S30

4P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

egis

trat

ion

sens

or

PS

301

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Reg

istr

atio

n cl

utch

M

C30

1 O

FF

ON

Pap

er fe

ed m

otor

M

301

CW

300

mm

/sC

W 6

7mm

/sS

top

CC

W 3

00m

m/s

CC

W 7

10m

m/s

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Con

veya

nce

mot

or

M30

2

Sto

pC

CW

138

mm

/sC

CW

300

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/s

Rev

erse

sen

sor

PS

305

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Tim

ing

sens

or

PS

302

Rev

erse

/exi

t mot

or

M30

3C

W 7

10m

m/ s

CW

400

mm

/sC

W 3

50m

m/s

CW

150

mm

/sS

top

CC

W 1

50m

m/s

CC

W 4

00m

m/s

CC

W 7

10m

m/s

CC

W 9

00m

m/s

Pap

er lo

aded

Pap

er e

xit s

enso

r P

S30

6P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

ever

se s

olen

oid

SD

302

OF

FO

NP

aper

exi

t sol

enoi

d S

D30

1O

FF

ON

CW

710

mm

/s


6-50

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S


4969fs6316

No

pape

r se

nsor

P

S30

4P

aper

unl

oade

dP

aper

load

edR

egis

trat

ion

sens

or

PS

301

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Reg

istr

atio

n cl

utch

M

C30

1O

FF

ON

Pap

er fe

ed m

otor

M

301

CW

300

mm

/sC

W 6

7mm

/sS

top

CC

W 3

00m

m/s

CC

W 7

10m

m/s

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Con

veya

nce

mot

or

M30

2

Sto

pC

CW

138

mm

/sC

CW

300

mm

/sC

CW

710

mm

/s

Rev

erse

sen

sor

PS

305

Pap

er u

nloa

ded

Pap

er lo

aded

Tim

ing

sens

or

PS

302

Rev

erse

/exi

t mot

or

M30

3C

W 7

10m

m/s

CW

400

mm

/sC

W 3

50m

m/s

CW

150

mm

/sS

top

CC

W 1

50m

m/s

CC

W 4

00m

m/s

CC

W 7

10m

m/s

CC

W 9

00m

m/s

Pap

er lo

aded

Pap

er e

xit s

enso

r P

S30

6P

aper

unl

oade

d

Pap

er lo

aded

Rev

erse

sol

enoi

dS

D30

2O

FF

ON

Pap

er e

xit s

olen

oid

SD

301

OF

FO

N

CW

710

mm

/s


6-51

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

3.3 C-208 timing chart

A. A4, single sided, 2-sheet paper feed

4969fs6317

01

23

45

67

Item

Pap

er fe

ed m

otor

Pap

er fe

ed c

lutc

h

Pap

er fe

ed s

olen

oid

Pre

-reg

istr

atio

n cl

utch

Pap

er fe

ed s

enso

r

Fee

d se

nsor

Inte

rmed

iate

con

veya

nce

sens

or /1

Sta

rt b

utto

n O

N

Tim

e (s

ec)

Cod

e

M10

1

MC

101

SD

100

MC

102

PS

107

PS

106

PS

27


6-52

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

3.4 FN-120/FN-9 timing chart

A. Sort, A4, document of 2 sheets, 3-copy setting, single sided0

12

34

67

8

A

9

A

Cod

e

PS

704

M70

1F

NS

Con

veya

nce

mot

or67

0mm

/s

400m

m/s

FN

S E

ntra

nce

sens

or

M70

2S

hift

mot

orP

S71

8S

hift

HP

sen

sor

SD

704

Pap

er e

xit o

peni

ng s

olen

oid

M70

7P

aper

exi

t rol

ler

mot

or25

3mm

/s40

0mm

/sP

S70

6M

ain

tray

pap

er e

xit s

enso

r

PS

702

Tray

upp

er li

mit

sens

or

M70

3Tr

ay u

p/do

wn

mot

orU

PD

OW

N

Tim

e (s

ec)

Item

Cod

e

PS

704

M70

1

M70

2P

S71

8

SD

704

M70

7

Tim

e (s

ec)

M70

3

PS

702

PS

706

FN

S o

pera

tion

star

t si

gnal

ON

670m

m/s

400m

m/s

253m

m/s

400m

m/s

UP

DO

WN

FN

S C

onve

yanc

e m

otor

FN

S E

ntra

nce

sens

or

Shi

ft m

otor

Shi

ft H

P s

enso

r

Pap

er e

xit o

peni

ng s

olen

oid

Pap

er e

xit r

olle

r m

otor

Mai

n tr

ay p

aper

exi

t sen

sor

Tray

upp

er li

mit

sens

or

Tray

up/

dow

n m

otor

Item

2 -

2C

opy

- P

age

3 -

13

- 2

1 -

11

- 2

2 -

1


6-53

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

B. Flat stapling at 2 points, A4, document of 11 sheets, 2-copy setting

4969fs6319

12

34

514

15

16

18

17

20

19

26

28

29

27

A

A

31

32

30

0C

ode

PS

704

FN

S E

ntra

nce

sens

orM

701

FN

S C

onve

yanc

e dr

ive

mot

orS

D70

5B

y-pa

ss g

ate

sole

noid

PS

705

Sta

cker

ent

ranc

e se

nsor

M71

3S

tack

er e

ntra

nce

mot

orM

722

Sta

ck d

rive

mot

orS

D70

2S

tack

driv

e so

leno

id

M70

5A

lignm

ent m

otor

/UC

lose

Ope

nM

711

Sta

pler

mov

emen

t mot

orM

714/

715

Sta

pler

, clin

cher

mot

or /F

M70

9/71

0S

tapl

er, c

linch

er m

otor

/RP

S70

9P

aper

exi

t bel

t HP

sen

sor

PS

706

Mai

n tr

ay p

aper

exi

t sen

sor

SD

704

Pap

er e

xit o

peni

ng s

olen

oid

M70

7P

aper

exi

t rol

ler

mot

or95

0mm

/s66

0mm

/s28

0mm

/sP

S70

7S

tapl

er p

aper

exi

t upp

er li

mit

sens

or

M70

3Tr

ay u

p/do

wn

mot

or

Item

FN

S o

pera

tion

star

t sig

nal O

N

1 -

1

Tim

e (s

ec)

UP

DO

WN

1 -

21

- 3

1 -

101

- 11

2 -

12

- 2

2 -

32

- 4

2 -

92

- 10

2 -1

1C

opy

- P

age

Cod

eP

S70

4F

NS

Ent

ranc

e se

nsor

M70

1F

NS

Con

veya

nce

driv

e m

otor

SD

705

By-

pass

gat

e so

leno

idP

S70

5S

tack

er e

ntra

nce

sens

orM

713

Sta

cker

ent

ranc

e m

otor

M72

2S

tack

driv

e m

otor

SD

702

Sta

ck d

rive

sole

noid

M70

5A

lignm

ent m

otor

/UC

lose

Ope

nM

711

Sta

pler

mov

emen

t mot

orM

714/

715

Sta

pler

, clin

cher

mot

or /F

M70

9/71

0S

tapl

er, c

linch

er m

otor

/RP

S70

9P

aper

exi

t bel

t HP

sen

sor

PS

706

Mai

n tr

ay p

aper

exi

t sen

sor

SD

704

Pap

er e

xit o

peni

ng s

olen

oid

M70

7P

aper

exi

t rol

ler

mot

or95

0mm

/s66

0mm

/s28

0mm

/sP

S70

7S

tapl

er p

aper

exi

t upp

er li

mit

sens

or

M70

3Tr

ay u

p/do

wn

mot

or

Item

670m

m/s

Tim

e (s

ec)

UP

DO

WN


6-54

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

C. Stitch and fold, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided

4969fs6320

01

23

45

67

89

1011

1213

1415

1617

A

A

Cod

eIte

mT

ime

(sec

)

FN

S E

ntra

nce

sens

orF

NS

Con

veya

nce

driv

e m

otor

Sta

cker

Ent

ranc

e se

nsor

Sta

cker

ent

ranc

e m

otor

670m

m/s

500m

m/s

Alig

nmen

t HP

sen

sor

/UC

lose

Ope

nA

lignm

ent H

P s

enso

r /L

Alig

nmen

t mot

or /L

Sta

pler

mot

or, c

linch

er m

otor

/FS

tapl

er m

otor

, clin

cher

mot

or /R

Sto

pper

HP

sen

sor

Sto

pper

mot

or

Fold

ing

conv

eyan

ce m

otor

Dow

nU

p

Fold

ing

conv

eyan

ce s

enso

rFo

ldin

g kn

ife m

otor

Fold

ing

knife

HP

sen

sor

Fold

ing

pass

age

sens

orP

aper

exi

t ope

ning

HP

sen

sor

Pap

er e

xit o

peni

ng m

otor

Alig

nmen

t mot

or /U

PS

704

PS

705

M71

3

PS

708

M70

5

M70

1

PS

724

M71

6

M71

4/71

5

PS

723

M71

8

M72

0

PS

725

M71

9P

S72

2P

S72

6P

S71

2M

706

M70

9/71

0

FNS

Ope

ratio

n O

pen

star

t sig

nal O

N

2 -

1C

opy

- P

age

2 -

32

- 2

1 -

11

- 3

1 -

2

Clo

seO

pen

670m

m/s

500m

m/s

Cod

eIte

mT

ime

(sec

)

FN

S E

ntra

nce

sens

orF

NS

Con

veya

nce

driv

e m

otor

Sta

cker

Ent

ranc

e se

nsor

Sta

cker

ent

ranc

e m

otor

670m

m/s

500m

m/s

Alig

nmen

t HP

sen

sor

/UC

lose

Ope

nA

lignm

ent H

P s

enso

r /L

Alig

nmen

t mot

or /L

Sta

pler

mot

or, c

linch

er m

otor

/FS

tapl

er m

otor

, clin

cher

mot

or /R

Sto

pper

HP

sen

sor

Sto

pper

mot

or

Fold

ing

conv

eyan

ce m

otor

Dow

nU

p

Fold

ing

conv

eyan

ce s

enso

rFo

ldin

g kn

ife m

otor

Fold

ing

knife

HP

sen

sor

Fold

ing

pass

age

sens

orP

aper

exi

t ope

ning

HP

sen

sor

Pap

er e

xit o

peni

ng m

otor

Alig

nmen

t mot

or /U

PS

704

PS

705

M71

3

PS

708

M70

5

M70

1

PS

724

M71

6

PS

723

M71

8

M72

0

PS

725

M71

9P

S72

2P

S72

6P

S71

2

Clo

seO

pen

670m

m/s

500m

m/s

M71

4/71

5

M70

6

M70

9/71

0


6-55

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

D. Three-folding, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided

01

23

45

67

89

10

111

21

3

16

17

18

19

20

14

A

A

Cod

e

M70

7P

aper

exi

t rol

ler

mot

orP

S70

9P

aper

exi

t bel

t HP

sen

-P

S70

4F

NS

Ent

ranc

e se

nsor

M71

2G

ate

driv

e m

otor

M70

5A

lignm

ent m

otor

/U

M71

6A

lignm

ent m

otor

/L

PS

705

Sta

cker

Ent

ranc

e se

nsor

M71

3S

tack

er e

ntra

nce

mot

or

PS

726

Fol

ding

pas

sage

sen

sor

M71

9F

oldi

ng k

nife

mot

orP

S72

2F

oldi

ng k

nife

HP

sen

sor

M70

1F

NS

Con

veya

nce

mot

or

M71

8S

topp

er m

otor

SD

706

Thr

ee-f

oldi

ng g

ate

sole

noid

M72

0F

oldi

ng C

onve

yanc

e m

otor

PS

725

Fol

ding

exi

t sen

sor F

NS

ope

ratio

n st

art s

igna

l ON

Dow

n

Clo

se

670m

m/s

500m

m/s

Up

Ope

nC

lose

Ope

n

Item

Tim

e (s

ec)

Cod

eIte

mT

ime

(sec

)

Pap

er e

xit r

olle

r m

otor

Pap

er e

xit b

elt H

P s

enso

rF

NS

Ent

ranc

e se

nsor

Gat

e dr

ive

mot

or

Alig

nmen

t mot

or /U

Alig

nmen

t mot

or /L

Sta

cker

Ent

ranc

e se

nsor

Sta

cker

ent

ranc

e m

otor

Fol

ding

pas

sage

sen

sor

Fol

ding

kni

fe m

otor

Fol

ding

kni

fe H

P s

enso

rF

NS

Con

veya

nce

mot

or

Sto

pper

mot

or

Thr

ee-f

oldi

ng g

ate

sole

noid

Fol

ding

Con

veya

nce

mot

orF

oldi

ng e

xit s

enso

r

Dow

n

Clo

se

670m

m/s

500m

m/s

Up

Ope

nC

lose

Ope

n

M70

7P

S70

9P

S70

4M

712

M70

5

M71

6

PS

705

M71

3

PS

726

M71

9P

S72

2M

701

M71

8

SD

706

M72

0P

S72

5


6-56

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

3.5 TMG-3 timing chart

A. Cutting mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies

4969fs6322

01

-52

-51

23

45

67

89

8283

8485

8687

8889

9091

9293

Item

Cod

eT

ime

(sec

)

Fol

ding

C

onve

yanc

e m

otor

(F

NS

)C

onve

yanc

e m

otor

E

ntra

nce

sens

or

Sto

pper

mot

or

Con

veya

nce

sens

orP

ress

mot

orC

utte

r m

otor

S

topp

er c

lear

mot

orH

olde

r m

otor

P

ress

ure

mot

or

Pap

er e

xit s

enso

r

Cop

y 1

Cop

y 2

PS

108

M10

7M

106

M10

2M

104

PS

102

M10

5

M10

3P

S10

1M

101

M72

0


6-57

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

B. Through mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies

4969fs6323

01

-52

-51

23

45

67

89

8283

8485

8687

8889

9091

9293

Item

Cod

eT

ime

(sec

)

PS

108

M10

7M

106

M10

2M

104

PS

102

M10

5

M10

3P

S10

1M

101

M72

0

Cop

y 1

Cop

y 2

Fold

ing

Con

veya

nce

mot

or (

FN

S)

Con

veya

nce

mot

or

Ent

ranc

e se

nsor

S

topp

er m

otor

C

onve

yanc

e se

nsor

Pre

ss m

otor

C

utte

r m

otor

S

topp

er c

lear

mot

orH

olde

r m

otor

P

ress

ure

mot

or

Pap

er e

xit s

enso

r


6-58

VI

DIA

GR

AM

S

Blank Page

7662-4969-11 0309xxxx

Copyright2003 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

Printed in Japan

Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

KONICA MINOLTA C500 CF5001 Service Manual (Field Service)

Documents

Transcript of KONICA MINOLTA C500 CF5001 Service Manual (Field Service)